THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
o. 
 
 r x 
 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND 
 
 A COMPLETE AND SYSTEMATIC EXPOSITION 
 
 OF PHONOGRAPHY, BASED ON THE 
 
 PITMANIC ALPHABET 
 
 FOR USE IN SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES 
 
 1904 
 
Entered according to Act of Congress, 
 in the year 1893, by 
 
 THE PRACTICAL TEXT BOOK COMPANY, 
 
 In the office of the Librarian of Congress, 
 
 at Washington. 
 
(o /p 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The great number of books that have appeared within the 
 last few years on the Pitmanic systems of shorthand is some 
 evidence of the widespread protest against the old order of 
 arrangement. While these books present few radical changes, 
 they all show certain tendencies which are the direct result of 
 the impetus given to shorthand study and practice by the 
 re-arrangement of the old forms into a practically new alpha- 
 bet by Isaac Pitman, and the many invaluable expedi- 
 ents first introduced by Mr. Graham. The most marked ten- 
 dency is that toward a happy medium between the cumbersome 
 w outlines of the former author, and the extremely abbreviated 
 ^ reporting methods of the latter, which is seen in the practical 
 > work of the active reporters of the country. Although short- 
 | hand is the result of slow growth and the workings of many 
 minds rather than the product of any one mind, none deserve 
 the honors paid them by stenographers more than do these two 
 men for the good they have done the English speaking people 
 5* in furthering the study and uses of shorthand. 
 
 We have endeavored to make a complete book, mechanic- 
 
 * ally as nearly perfect as possible, scientifically accurate in all 
 
 its technical statements of principles, and at the same time, to 
 
 present those principles so plainly as to smooth the way to an 
 
 i easy and progressive mastery of the science, from its simplest 
 
 3 elements to the most complex forms used by expert writers. 
 
 This book is the result of many years' actual experience 
 in teaching and reporting. We are confident its simple and 
 direct .methods will make better stenographers, eifect a great 
 saving of time and effort on the part of both teacher and stu- 
 dent, and render quite unnecessary the enormous outlay of 
 study and blind practice required by the older books. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 LESSON I, THE CONSONANT ALPHABET, 
 
 LESSON - - II, OUTLINES OF WORDS, 
 LESSON III, THE VOWEL ALPHABET 
 
 LESSON - - IV, CIRCLES AND LOOPS, ... - 
 LESSON V, WORD SIGNS, 
 
 LESSON - - VI, DIPHTHONGS, 
 LESSON VII, PETOIDS, 
 
 LESSON - VIII, THE LETTER H, 
 
 LESSPN IX, AR, RAY, LAY, EL, ISH, SHAY, Es AND ZEE, 
 
 LESSON - - X, BRIEF SIGNS FOR W AND Y, 60 
 
 LESSON XI, INITIAL HOOKS, - 68 
 
 LESSON - XII, SPECIAL VOCALIZATION, 75 
 
 LESSON - XIII, ENLARGED INITIAL HOOKS, 81 
 
 LESSON XIV, TERMINAL HOOKS FOR F. V. AND N, 85 
 
 LESSON - - XV, TERMINAL HOOKS FOR SHUN AND TIVE, 92 
 
 LESSON - - XVI, THE ESHUN HOOK, - - 96 
 
 LESSON - XVII, THE SHADED M, 99 
 
 LESSON XVIII, THE LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE, 102 
 
 LESSON XIX, THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, - 106 
 
 LESSON XX, PREFIXES, - 120 
 
 LESSON XXI, AFFIXES, - - 127 
 
 LESSON - XXII, THE ENLARGED WEH AND YEH, 133 
 
 LESSON XXIII, OMISSION OF LETTERS, 136 
 
 LESSON - XXIV, RECAPITULATION OF SPECIAL PRINCIPLES, 141 
 
 LESSON - XXV, IMPLICATION OF WORDS, 145 
 
 LESSON - XXVI, OPTIONAL PRINCIPLES, - - 148 
 
 LESSON XXVII, PHRASING, 149 
 
 LESSON XXVIII, PHRASE LIST, 153 
 
 LESSON - XXIX, REPORTING LIST, ------ IGO 
 
 WORDS DISTINGUISHED, -- 169 
 
 How TO FORM CONTRACTIONS, - - 171 
 
 METHOD OF PRACTICE, - - - - - - - - -171 
 
 READING NOTES, ..-. 173 
 
 ADVANCED READING EXERCISES, 175-194 
 
 FAC-SIMILE NOTES OF PROMINENT REPORTERS, - 195-200 
 
 TRANSCRIPTS, 201 
 
 CHAPTER ON PHONETICS, -----_.. 230 
 
 GLOSSARY, -------. = ._ 238 
 
INTRODUCTORY. 
 
 The teacher will have constant occasion to observe the 
 necessity for absolute accuracy in shorthand, and he cannot 
 too strongly impress upon the minds of all who contemplate 
 its study, the importance of learning to think and to observe 
 accurately, for accurate thinking and close observation are the 
 foundation of all skill. It is deplorable that the majority of 
 candidates for the study of shorthand are handicapped with 
 very slovenly mental habits, due to faulty elementary training. 
 This naturally results in careless methods of writing. The 
 ordinary degree of accuracy which will answer for the every- 
 day affairs of life will not suffice for the purposes of shorthand, 
 where exactness is essential. The law has made an extra- 
 ordinary degree of carelessness, ia many fields of labor, a crime, 
 and punishes it as such ; this is evidenced by the frequency 
 with which one meets the phrase " criminal negligence." It is 
 quite possible for a shorthand writer to become criminally 
 careless. Many young people have been so accustomed to 
 careless habits of reading and writing that it is hard for them 
 to realize what scientific precision is. When once the habit of 
 accuracy is formed, it is as easy to be accurate as it is to be 
 slovenly. 
 
 Owing to the exigencies of rapid work and the consequent 
 inability to make the characters with precision, there is another 
 principle which must be borne in mind while pursuing the 
 
vi PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 study of any art, and that is the law of ease. To insist upon 
 an absolutely perfect and almost artistic formation of the signs, 
 and at the same time to cultivate a boldness of stroke and 
 confident ease and freedom of movement is the ideal, which, 
 perhaps cannot be reached. But the teacher must inspire in 
 his pupils a sense of ease and confidence. Facility of execu- 
 tion comes from within outwards. The ideal form must be 
 fixed in the mind before it can be transferred to paper ; and 
 the law of ease must work hand in hand with the law of accur- 
 acy. The signs -should be made as nearly like the printed 
 forms in the book as possible. Absolute accuracy is a desirable 
 thing, but it must not be secured at too great a sacrifice of ease. 
 It must be attempted, but it cannot be attained at first, for it 
 is a result of long practice, and not a thing with which we can 
 hope to start. Ease and accuracy, then, must be cultivated all 
 the way through, for it is the ease of writing which gives speed, 
 and accuracy which gives legibility. 
 
 The student' should study notes taken in actual reporting, 
 and the teacher should write much for him in an easy, facile 
 manner, that the pupil may know exactly how it is done, and 
 be inspired by the spirit of fast writing. 
 
 Definite instructions will be found with reference to the 
 best representation of such terminations as fer, ver ; fen, ven ; 
 ten, den ; tel, del ; tary, tory, etc., mention of which has unfor- 
 tunately been overlooked in other books. These terminations 
 are important, and unless definite instructions are given, the 
 student is in doubt as to which of the different outlines that 
 may be used for their expression is preferable. 
 
 The engraved illustrations are of the highest quality the 
 most skilled engravers can produce, and are entirely free 
 from the blurs and indistinct lines that mar and disfigure the 
 pages of almost every shorthand book hitherto published. 
 
 The glossary is an interesting feature of the book, and 
 will be of special value to young writers. We have endeavored 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. vn 
 
 to compile a list of the most frequently recurring words, the 
 formation of the correct outlines of which might be difficult 
 for the beginner. Our plan of giving the nomenclature of the 
 words instead of the engraved outlines, compels a valuable 
 mental effort on the part of the student which would otherwise 
 be lost. 
 
 Each lesson is divided into three parts : (i) a statement of 
 the principles, (2) a transcribing or reading exercise, and (3) a 
 writing exercise. Each part should be studied in its proper 
 order, and this order resolutely adhered to throughout the 
 book. 
 
 If the writing exercise is attempted before the statement 
 of principles has been carefully studied and thoroughly 
 mastered, and before the reading exercise has been accurately 
 transcribed, the student will become confused and lose much 
 valuable time. With a clear understanding of these principles 
 and their illustrations as given in the reading exercises, writing 
 becomes easy and fascinating. 
 
VITI 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 Character. Name. Sound as in Character. 
 
 \ - - Pee - - cape / 
 
 V. .-.'... Bee - - - /;ake / 
 
 ^. . . . Et- - - /ar 
 
 V. ... Vee - - t'im iX 
 
 I - - - Ar - - - arm ' 
 
 > . 
 
 \ 
 
 ''-.'- Way - - week 
 
 - - - Tee - - - wha 
 
 - - - Dee - - - heed 
 . . . Ith - 
 
 - - Thee - - - brea/ie 
 / ... Es - - - - ask 
 ) - - - Zee - - - aero 
 
 Name. Sound as in 
 
 - Chay - - - church 
 
 - Jay - - - judt/e 
 
 - Ish - - - sAall 
 
 - Zhay - - - iwual 
 
 - Lay - 
 
 - - lake 
 
 - Yay - 
 
 - - i/es 
 
 - Kay - 
 
 - - ma/;e 
 
 - Gay - 
 
 - - yo 
 
 - Em - 
 
 - - come 
 
 - En 
 
 - - ?tear 
 
 - Ing - 
 
 - sung 
 
 - Ray - 
 
 - reach 
 
 - Hay - 
 
 - - Aouse 
 
 VOWELS. 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 e as in 
 eel 
 
 a as iu 
 ale 
 
 a as in 
 ah 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 as in o 
 iwe 
 
 is in oo as in 
 old cool 
 
 tasin 
 it 
 
 6 as in 
 met 
 
 a as in 
 at 
 
 o as in u as in <><> as in 
 on up foot 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 t as in <>i as in ow as in ew as in 
 time oil owl dew 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 THE CONSONANT ALPHABET. 
 
 i. As phonography is based upon phonetic spelling some 
 slight knowledge of the nature of sounds is necessary, but 
 sufficient explanations will be made from time to time, and 
 especially when we come to the vowel alphabet, to enable the 
 student to spell phonetically. A full analysis of the sounds of 
 our language is given in the Appendix, to which the student is 
 referred when in doubt as to any question of phonetics. The 
 first duty of the student is to learn thoroughly the consonant 
 alphabet which is given below, and also upon the page opposite. 
 The student will be assisted in committing to memory the 
 alphabet by observing the underlying principles given in 
 " Remarks on the Consonant Alphabet." (p. 1 1.) These prin- 
 ciples should be clearly understood, and the reasons for things 
 should be sought for in shorthand as in all other studies. 
 Knowledge of principles will assist efforts at memorizing by 
 showing the student that phonography is not only an art but a 
 science, governed by law at every step, and not an arbitrary 
 arrangement of characters eluding the memory for want of 
 connecting principles. 
 
10 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 The consonants are represented by simple lines called 
 strokes or stems, and are, owing to their nature and mutual 
 relations, (See Sec. 4) divided into three groups as follows : 
 
 A \ui JL JL .../.. 
 
 P b 
 
 V V^_ 
 
 t 
 
 ( 
 
 d 
 
 ( 
 
 ch 
 
 ) 
 
 j 
 ) 
 
 k 
 J ' 
 
 g 
 
 J 
 
 
 i \ 
 f ~"V 
 
 th 
 
 th 
 
 s 
 
 z 
 
 sh 
 
 zh 
 
 c 
 
 x 
 
 1 r 
 
 ray 
 
 ill 
 
 11 
 
 llg 
 
 w 
 
 y 
 
 h 
 
 STATEMENT OF PRINCIPLES. 
 
 2. The Direction of the consonant stems is determined 
 by certain definite rules, which are important as controlling the 
 position of certain vowels, explained later on. Particular 
 attention should be given to the direction of sk, /, ray and ch. 
 
 All stems are written downward or from left to right, with 
 the following exceptions : 
 
 (a) The sign for sh is always written downward when 
 standing alone ; when joined to other stems it may be written 
 upward or downward to suit convenience. When written down- 
 ward it is called Ish ; when written upward it is called Shay : 
 
 Ish Ish-Kay Shay-Lay Ef-Shay Ef-Ish 
 
 (b) The sign for / is always written upward when standing 
 alone ; when joined with other stems, it is sometimes written 
 downward in accordance with principles stated in a subse- 
 quent chapter. It is called L,ay when written upward and El 
 when written downward ; thus, 
 
 Lay Lay-Em El-Em Lay-Kay El-Kay 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 11 
 
 (c) The straight sign for r (called Ray) is always written 
 upward, and is thus distinguished from ch (Chay) which is 
 invariably written downward. When standing alone they are 
 distinguished from each other by the difference in slope, Chay 
 inclining at an angle of about thirty degrees, and Ray at an 
 angle of about sixty degrees from a perpendicular line ; thus, 
 
 Chay Ray Ray-Chay Chay-Ray Ray-Tee Chay-Tee 
 
 (d) The sign for h (Hay) is always written upward. 
 
 3. The consonant stems should be made about an eighth 
 of an inch in length ; this enables them to be easily distin- 
 guished from the lengthened strokes on the one hand, and the 
 halved characters on the other, which are explained hereafter. 
 The beginner is apt to make them too long. The length given 
 in the engraved exercises of this" book is a good standard for 
 actual work. The light strokes should be made very light, and 
 the shaded ones just heavy enough to distinguish them from 
 the corresponding light stems. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE CONSONANT ALPHABET. 
 
 4. The student may follow whatever method he deems 
 best in committing to memory the alphabet. While he can- 
 not safely depart from precise rules, yet he must exercise his 
 own independence of thought and bent of mind, if he would 
 achieve results most rapidly. The following underlying princi- 
 ples will be interesting and helpful to the thoughtful student : 
 
 The idea which lies at the basis of the Pitmanic systems of short- 
 hand conies from a natural principle. Every elementary line is based 
 upon a natural relationship between the line and the sound, as, for 
 instance, a light line should and does represent a whispering sound, a 
 heavy or shaded line should represent a sub-vocal or heavy sound ; short 
 and abrupt sounds should be represented by short straight strokes, 
 while continuing sounds should be represented by curved strokes, etc. 
 
12 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 As will be seen from a study of the sounds of the consonant alpha- 
 bet, they are naturally divided into three groups. The first group, 
 called ABRUPTS, consists of eight straight, mated stems, representing 
 the cognate letters, p, b, t, d, ch, j, k, and g hard, thus : 
 
 These letters are represented by short abrupt strokes because they 
 represent the shortest sounds in the language. The straight line can 
 be written in only these four directions with sufficient distinctness to 
 insure certainty in reading, and the light lines naturally stand for the 
 light sounds or aspirants, and the shaded lines indicate the heavy 
 sounds or sub-vocals. So it becomes natural to represent p with a light 
 line, and b with a heavy line, because p is a whispered sound, while b is 
 a sub-vocal or has an undertone. The letters forming this group are 
 always written downward except Kay and Gay, which are, of course, 
 always written from left to right. 
 
 (c) The second group called CONTINUANTS, consists of eight 
 curved, mated stems, representing the cognate letters, f, v, th, th, s, z, 
 sh, and zh, thus : 
 
 These are curved characters because they represent flowing or con- 
 tinuable sounds. Half of them are made light because they represent 
 whispering or aspirant sounds, while the other half are shaded because 
 they represent heavy sounds or sub-vocals. 
 
 (d) At the risk of repeating somewhat, and to sum up, we have, 
 then, the following principles : 
 
 Cognate letters have the same sign; the shaded stroke represents 
 the heavy sound, while the light stroke represents the light sound. 
 There is no difference between the sound of p and the sound of b except 
 a slight undertone, and this undertone is represented in shorthand by 
 shading the stroke. So, there is no difference between the sound of the 
 word, pay and the sound of bay except this undertone. By pronouncing 
 the words slowly the student will see how closely related are the sounds 
 of p and b ; and the same is true of all the cognate letters. So, too, 
 with the sounds represented by th in thin and th in then. It requires no 
 knowledge of phonetics to distingush these sounds ; the one is a whis- 
 pered utterance, while the other is a vocal, \yhispered sounds called 
 Spirants, are represented in shorthand by light lines, while those letters 
 which have a slight undertone, called sub-vocals, are indicated by shaded 
 strokes. 
 
 (e) The third group consists of eight opposing stems ; that is, not 
 mated, but rather correlative, one suggests the other. They are called 
 coalescents, because they blend easily with other sounds : 
 
 ({) The letter x does not appear in the alphabet because it is not 
 an elementary sound, but composed of the sounds of k and s, as will be 
 seen by pronouncing slowly the word lax (lacks). 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 18 
 
 (g) The letter h occupies an anomalous position in any language, 
 and its history in comparative philology is very interesting. It does 
 not occur frequently in shorthand, and is provided with a special stem. 
 
 ORIGIN AND NATURE OP THE CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 
 5. The consonant alphabet is derived from the circum- 
 ference of a circle and its diameter written in four directions, 
 as shown by the following diagrams : 
 
 6. These diameters divide the circumference of the cir- 
 cle into eight parts or arcs, giving us the curved consonant 
 signs. The radii furnish us with the straight stems, with the 
 
 'exception of Hay and Ray. By observing that every curved 
 stem is a quarter of a circle, and every straight stem is a 
 radius, the student need have no difficulty in determining the 
 slope of the stroke or the exact amount of the curvature. 
 
 7. The Names of the consonant signs must be early 
 fixed in the mind. They are given at the left in the following 
 exercise, which is designed as a copy or model for practice, and 
 should be repeatedly copied with a free, steady and uniform 
 motion of the hand. They should not be drawn with labored 
 slowness nor made in nervous haste, but with an easy flowing 
 style. While accuracy of outline is important, the endeavor 
 to acquire it should not be carried to such an extreme as to 
 develop a nervous, trembling, hesitating movement. 
 
 As the slant or angle of inclination of sloping stems is of 
 such importance in making notes perfectly legible, we have 
 arranged the alphabet into four groups with reference to their 
 direction, as follows : 
 
 Left oblique. Perpendicular. Right oblique. . Horizontal. 
 
14 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 8. The grouping of the consonants together in this man- 
 ner is to furnish a standard by which a student may test the 
 accuracy of his outlines at a glance. For example, the first 
 group must be made at such an incline that a stroke exactly 
 half way between a vertical and a horizontal, will cover the 
 straight strokes and touch the points of the curves; thus, 
 
 \\v 
 
 The other groups may be tested in a similar manner, using 
 the stroke Tee for the perpendiculars ; the stroke Chay for the 
 right obliques ; and the stroke Kay for the horizontals. Hay 
 and Ray should be slanted a trifle more than Chay. 
 
 9. To impress these characters thoroughly on the memory 
 and at the same time to acquire ease and precision in their 
 execution, it is necessary to write them over and over again. 
 The following method of practice is recommended. Write the 
 names of the first group at the left edge of the note book or 
 paper, then write across the page the signs representing the 
 letters at the margin, at the same time repeating aloud their 
 names. The characters should be made small, neat, and uni- 
 form in size. Make the light strokes like hairs, and shade the 
 heavy ones just enough, and no more than is necessary, to 
 distinguish them from the others. Practice the signs in this 
 manner until you have filled at least a page, and write the 
 other groups similarly. Then commence again with the first 
 group and repeat the process until you are just as familar with 
 the entire series as you are with their longhand equivalents. 
 
 v> 
 Pee Bee - 
 
 Ef Vee ~-i 
 
 Ar Way .JSSSS^SSSSXS^^ 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 15 
 
 \ 
 
 10. Remarks. Phonography is best written on ruled 
 paper with single red lines. Double lines are confusing to 
 some, and are of no special advantage. Either pen or pencil 
 may be used, though the pen is preferable. None but the best 
 writing materials should be used, even in the most elementary 
 practice. The pen should be new, and have a smooth, fine 
 point. The paper should not be too highly glazed or calen- 
 dered, but of a good quality, and of a velvety surface, so that 
 the pen will not slip too easily over it, but can be more readily 
 guided at will by the hand. The ink should be fresh, free 
 from dust and other impurities, and flow freely. No effort 
 at speed should be made at the outset. Perfection and delicacy 
 of outline -should be the chief aim of the beginner, rather than 
 rapidity of writing. Painful accuracy, however, should be 
 avoided, lest it beget a confused mental state, with resulting 
 hesitation and lack of confidence, which are the bane of young 
 writers. The hand should be trained to move with confident 
 ease and freedom; accuracy of outline will come with the 
 movement. If each stroke be given its proper direction, shad- 
 ing, length and position, the writing will be legible and accu- 
 rate. Elegance of form may come in later on with the attain- 
 ment of manual skill, and there is a certain elegance and grace 
 in the writing of every expert, though to the unpracticed eye 
 it may not appear. The curved strokes must not be finished up 
 with a quick nervous motion or jerk of the pen, thus forming 
 a little flourish or twist at the end, but should be made with a 
 uniform and steady movement. In making the shaded curved 
 characters, the shade should be made in the middle only, 
 gradually tapering to a fine line. Stenographers differ as to 
 the best method of holding the pen. It should, however, be 
 held in a more upright position than is required in longhand, 
 for greater convenience in making the characters sloping to 
 the left. If held between the first and second fingers this up- 
 right position is insured, although some freedom of movemen* 
 
16 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 is thus sacrificed. The elbow should be thrown out a little 
 from the body, so that the backward aud perpendicular strokes 
 may be made more easily. The hand should glide along on 
 the nails of the third and fourth fingers, strictly avoiding con- 
 tact of the wrist with the paper. Let the muscles of the left 
 fore-arm sustain the weight resulting from the forward pres- 
 sure of the body, thus leaving the right hand and wrist per- 
 fectly free. 
 
 The Writing .Exercises found in this book will afford ample 
 practice on the principles under each head, and the student 
 should avoid writing any words except those found in the 
 exercises until he has mastered all the principles. Very little 
 is gained in attempting to write unfamiliar matter until the 
 principles are well understood. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 OUTLINES OF WORDS. 
 
 ii. Phonography, as the derivation of the word suggests, 
 is a method of rep resenting the sounds of a language, without ref- 
 erence to the current spelling. The phonetic principle is made 
 use of to secure brevity and a uniform basis for a system of 
 writing. All silent letters are ignored and only the sounded ele- 
 ments of language are expressed. The sounded consonants 
 making up a word are first written, and form what is called 
 the outline of the word. The sounded vowels are afterwards 
 inserted. The consonants forming the outline must be joined 
 without lifting the pen, and in accordance with the follow- 
 ing principles. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 17 
 
 12. L,et the first downward or upward stroke fall upon 
 the line of writing, the following stroke or strokes falling 
 below the line if need be ; as, 
 
 Pee-Tee En-Jay Chay-Tee Kay-Er Kay-En-Dee 
 
 Hay-Tee Lay-Hay 
 
 13. A straight stem when repeated is simply lengthened; 
 as, 
 
 V \ _ / 
 
 \ \ / 
 
 Pee-Pee Bee-Bee Tee-lee Uliay-Chay Kay-Kay 
 
 14. Curved stems are repeated as shown below. They 
 must not be lengthened to repeat the letter : 
 
 V 
 
 Em-Em En-En Ef-Vee Lay-Lay Ar-Ar 
 
 15. When light and heavy straight strokes of the same 
 direction are joined they must gradually blend, and not be 
 united with a pause, or abrupt movement of the pen ; thus, 
 
 Pee-Bee Tee-Dee Dee-Tee Kay-Gay 
 
 1 6. An angle must be made between the stems Ef and 
 En, Vee and En, Ef and Ing, Lay and Em, for reasons which 
 will become apparent hereafter ; thus, 
 
 El-En Vee-Eu Ef-Ing Vee-Ing Lay-Em 
 
 1 7. No angle, however, is required in the following combi- 
 nations. They should be made with a single sweep of the pen, 
 the first stroke flowing into the second in such a manner that 
 
18 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 the point of junction may not be observable. These combina- 
 tions furnish a good manual drill for the student. They seem 
 difficult at first, but with the proper movement of the hand 
 they become the easiest and swiftest type of phonographic 
 outline. 
 
 \ \ -4 I \ A v_ 
 
 v ---- / V^x \_>- V^^ ^ \ - A - 
 
 Pee-Eu Bee-En El-En El-Ing Dee-Ef Pee-Es Bee-Es Ef-Kay 
 
 Lay-Ar Ef-Shay Lay-Es Lay-Way Lay-Shay Shay-Lay Lay-Ish 
 
 1 8. The beginner must bear in mind that in shorthand, 
 words are spelled just as they are ordinarily sounded ; hence, 
 a double consonant is not repeated. The outline of the word 
 funny would be Ef-En ; of dummy would be Dee-Em ; of shell 
 or shallow would be Shay-Lay. 
 
 NOTE : It may not be too early in the study of shorthand to say a 
 word about movement, and it may be that the student needs no hint in 
 this direction ; but a free, easy and uniform movement of the hand is 
 very necessary for rapid writing. The forms must not only be so famil- 
 iar that no effort of the mind is required to recall them, but the hand 
 must be trained to move like an automaton. If the student does not 
 possess a full control of his hand, he should aim at the outset to acquire 
 it. What is called the purely finger movement should be discouraged, 
 and a combined movement of the fore-arm, hand and fingers should be 
 aimed at. Constant practice on phonographic forms will drill those 
 muscles of the hand which are brought into play in shorthand writing. 
 
 19. The Reading Exercises throughout this book contain 
 no outline which need be changed even by the most advanced 
 writer, and the student may have no fear of learning anything 
 to be subsequently unlearned. 
 
 20. The following Reading Exercise should be read over 
 several times, and the signs called by their proper names ; as, 
 Pee-Kay, Kay-Pee, Kay-Tee, Tee-Em, etc. Be careful to call 
 the upward stroke for / Lay, and the downward stroke for / 
 El. Do not allow the upward stroke for sh to be called 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 19 
 
 anything but Shay. Be equally exact in the naming of all 
 outlines throughout the study. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 JA.. 
 
 ....U 
 
20 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 21. The following outlines are not to be memorized as 
 words, but the exercise is designed simply as a drill on the 
 consonant alphabet, and in the formation of outlines. The 
 names of the stems, it will be observed, commence with 
 capitals. There are certain principles determining when to use 
 L,ay or El and Ar or Ray which are treated of in a subsequent 
 lesson, but for the present the student may write these stems 
 as they are indicated by their names. When the outline is 
 not given write these stems in the most convenient direction. 
 After this exercise has been neatly written it should be read 
 over and all errors noted and corrected. It is not enough to 
 notice an error, but it must be corrected immediately. 
 
 (a) Tick, Tee-Kay ; tug, Tee-Gay ; dock, dike, Dee-Kay ; pity, 
 Pee-Tee ; cub, Kay-Bee ; keep, Kay-Pee ; check, Chay-Kay ; babe, Bee- 
 Bee ; cake, Kay-Kay ; rate, Ray-Tee ; rode, Ray-Dee ; patch, Pee-Chay ; 
 deep, Dee-Pee ; ditch, Dee-Chay ; pop, Pee-Pee ; tidy, Tee-Dee ; diary, 
 Dee-Ray ; duty, Dee-Tee ; cheap, Chay-Pee ; cherry, Chay-Ray ; chum, 
 Chay-Em ; adage, Dee-Jay ; Dutch, Dee-Chay ; gaiety, Gay-Tee ; gap, 
 Gay-Pee ; catch, Kay-Chay ; ahead, Hay-Dee ; beak, Bee-Kay ; job, Jay- 
 Bee ; page, Pee-Jay ; joke, Jay-Kay ; tub, tube, Tee-Bee ; touch, teach, 
 Tee-Chay ; pitch, Pee-Chay ; judge, Jay-Jay ; keg, Kay-Gay ; reap, Ray- 
 Pee ; robe, Ray-Bee ; ridge, Ray-Jay ; reach, Ray-Chay ; haughty, Hay- 
 Tee ; bag, Bee-Gay. 
 
 (b) Tame, Tee-Em ; dumb, Dee-Em ; chime, Chay-Em ; comb, Kay- 
 Em ; fury, Ef-Ray ; vary, Vre-Ray ; thick, Ith-Kay ; thatch, Ith-Chay ; 
 ship, Ish-Pee ; shake, Ish-Kay ; sheaf, Ish-Ef ; bath, Bee-Ith ; bathe, Bee- 
 Thee ; fife, Ef-Ef; gem, Jay-Em ; fare, fire, Ef-Ar ; veer, Vee-Ar ; name, 
 En-Em ; lash, Lay-Shay ; faith, Ef-Ith ; Nash, En-Ish ; knave, En-Vee ; 
 mail, Em-Lay ; harsh, Ar-Ish ; dare, Dee-Ar ; game, Gay-Em ; ink, Ing-Kay. 
 
 (c) Veto, Vee-Tee ; thorough, Ith-Ray ; aside, Es-Dee ; chamois, Ish- 
 Em ; asthma, Es-Em ; awning, En-Ing ; avail, Vee-El ; valley, Vee-Lay ; 
 
 /ninny, En-En; lily, Lay-Lay ; error, Ar-Ar ; many, money, Em-En; 
 among, Em-Ing ; shell, shallow, Shay-Lay ; penny, Pee-En ; seeth, Es- 
 Ith ; also, lassie, Lay-Es ; leeway, Lay-Way ; lower, Lay-Ar ; mazy, Em- 
 Zee ; massy, Em-Es ; funny, Ef-En ; honey, Hay-En ; heavy, Hay-Vee ; 
 holy, Hay-Lay ; Emily, Em-Lay ; Lehigh, Lay-Hay ; early, Ar-Lay ; 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 21 
 
 awoke, Way-Kay ; rally, Ray-Lay ; ferry, Ef-Ray ; hurry, Hay-Ray ; knock. 
 En-Kay ; maim, Em-Em ; fish, Ef-Shay. 
 
 (d ) Dogma, Dee-Gay-Em ; notary, En-Tee-Ray ; injury, En-Jay- 
 Ray ; miller, Em-Lay- Ar ; polish, Pee-L,ay-Shay ; alarm, Lay-Ar-Em ; 
 caloric, Kay-Lay-Ar-Kay ; bulfinch, Bee-Lay-Ef-En-Chay ; avenue, Vee- 
 En ; evade, Vee-Dee ; equity, Kay-Tee ; militia, Em-L,ay-Ish ; Toledo, 
 Tee-L,ay-Dee ; Marietta, Em-Ray-Tee ; catholic, Kay-Ith-Lay-Kay ; comic, 
 Kay-Em-Kay ; marriage, Em-Ray-Jay ; demolish, Dee-Em-Lay-Shay. 
 
 Determine the outlines for the following words, bearing in mind 
 that words are spelled by sound in shorthand, and only the sounded let- 
 ters are written. 
 
 (e) (Words of one stem). Aid, may, edge, etch, alley, icy, eighty, 
 ache, yea, easy, Ohio, gnaw, ode, oak. 
 
 (f) (Words of two stems). Talk, chalk, item, chime, data, top, 
 ink, fame, move, mouth, sheep, faith, palm, shock, chip, dish, ditch, 
 joke, peak, calm, tithe, fetch, latch, match, page, peg, keep, deck, peach, 
 dock, dodge. 
 
 (g) (Words of three stems). Baggage, Canada, Chicago, Jacob, 
 revenue, abolish, damage, foliage, dominoe, deputy, alarm, marriage. 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 THE VOWEL ALPHABET. 
 
 22. We have thus far presented only the consonant ele- 
 ments of language. For the complete representation of 
 speech, vowels are necessary. The stenographer in active 
 practice, whether in the office receiving dictation or in the 
 court room in verbatim reporting, relies almost solely on the 
 outlines of words, vowels being only occasionally inserted for 
 greater legibility. The reporter and the amanuensis use almost 
 identically the same outlines, varying only in the degree of 
 skill in forming them, and differing in familiarity with steno- 
 graphic material and the use of special expedients. There is, 
 therefore, in actual practice no such distinction as corresponding 
 
22 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 and reporting styles. The term Corresponding Style lias been 
 used to indicate the fully vocalized outlines while Report- 
 ing Style has been applied to partially vocalized outlines. Be- 
 cause the reporter relies largely upon consonant outlines, the 
 beginner must not entertain the notion that vowels are unnec- 
 essary or unimportant. Whoever wishes to arrive at even 
 ordinary speed must be willing to go through a course of 
 thorough drill on the vowels until they are as familiar as 
 ordinary letters. They are quite as important as the con- 
 sonants. 
 
 23. There are twelve distinct vowel sounds in our lan- 
 guage, and phonography has provided them with twelve dis- 
 tinct signs. 
 
 24. The Signs for the vowels are dots and dashes placed 
 in three positions beside the consonant stroke to which they 
 belong. The following table will indicate clearly the position 
 and character of these dots and dashes. The letter Tee is 
 used only to indicate the position of the vowel. 
 
 e as in 
 
 a as in 
 
 a as in 
 
 a as in 
 
 o as in 
 
 oo as in 
 
 eel 
 
 ale 
 
 ah 
 
 awe 
 
 old 
 
 pool 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 t as in 
 
 - as in 
 
 a as in 
 
 o as in 
 
 u as in 
 
 oo as in 
 
 it 
 
 met 
 
 at 
 
 on 
 
 up 
 
 foot 
 
 25. Phonetic Spelling. As noted in Sec. n, sounded 
 letters only are written. To illustrate, gnaw in shorthand 
 would be spelled n-aw; etch would be spelled e-ch ; ache would 
 become a-k. The ordinary spelling of a word has nothing to 
 do with the phonographic manner of writing it. If the student 
 is unfamiliar with phonetics, and is in doubt as to the exact 
 sounds composing a word, let him pronounce slowly the word 
 to be written, and then pronounce separately the sounds com- 
 posing the word. In other words, let him spell the word by 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 23 
 
 sound, or separate the word into its constituent sounds. In 
 that manner the sounded elements only are likely to be writ- 
 ten. (See Chapter on Phonetics.) 
 
 26. As shown in the foregoing table, a heavy dot in the 
 first position, or opposite the beginning of a stem, represents the 
 long sound of e, or e as in the words key, lea, see. A heavy 
 dot in the second position, or opposite the middle of a stroke, 
 represents the long sound of a, or a as in pay, may. A heavy 
 dot in the third position, or opposite the end of a stroke, 
 represents the Italian sound of a, or a as in ah, arm. 
 
 A light dot in the first position indicates the short sound 
 of /, or i as in it. A light dot in the second position indicates 
 the short sound of e, or e as in met. A light dot in the third 
 position represents the short sound of a, or a as in at. In like 
 manner the heavy and light dashes represent the sounds as 
 indicated in the foregoing table. 
 
 27. The Placing of vowels to stems is governed by cer- 
 tain principles given below. They are inserted always after 
 the consonant outline has been made. 
 
 28. Reading. The order of reading consonants and 
 vowels is the same as in longhand. Read that first which 
 comes first, or read from left to right, and from above down- 
 ward. In other words, if a vowel is placed at the left of a 
 stroke it is read before it ; if it is placed at the right of a stroke 
 it is read after it. If a vowel occurs above a horizontal stem, 
 as Kay or Em, it is read before the stem. If it is found below 
 a horizontal stroke it is read after the stroke. Besides the 
 following illustrations see the Reading Exercise connected 
 with this lesson. 
 
 _:l L _...< (-.. ^ ._-_ 
 
 aid day oath though egg go 
 
 29. The Position of a vowel is reckoned from the begin- 
 ning of a stem. The stems which are made upward (L,ay, 
 
24 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Ray, Shay and Hay) commence on or near the line of writ- 
 ing, and a first-place vowel would accordingly be written at 
 the beginning of the stem; as, 
 
 law raw ill lay shawl hoe 
 
 30. When vowels occur between two consonant strokes 
 they are written in accordance with the following principles : 
 
 I. All first-place vowels are written beside the first stem; 
 as, 
 
 ___________ V ....... U ...... ......... L .._._<rV~...._>TT_ ..... 
 
 beam dim chalk dock mill lock 
 
 II. Second-place vowels are written beside the first con- 
 sonant when long ; beside the second consonant when short ; 
 thus, 
 
 pore purr bale bell cake keg bake beck 
 
 III. All third-place vowels are written beside the second 
 consonant ; thus, 
 
 rack bar doom cap pack lack 
 
 REMARK. The object of the first and third rules is to 
 avoid the placing of vowels in angles. This secures greater 
 legibility in the reading of certain, words. For instance, if the 
 word pack be written thus -\; - by placing the third-place 
 light vowel in the angle, it might be read for pick, the 
 vowel being mistaken for a light first-place belonging to 
 Kay. Hence the reason for the third rule. The object of the 
 second rule is to distinguish more surely between the light 
 and heavy vowels when imperfectly made, as a hea\y vowel 
 would then not be found immediately preceding a second 
 stem, nor would a light second-place vowel be found after the 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 25 
 
 first stem. The student will bear in mind these rules have 
 reference to vowels occurring only between stems. 
 
 31. The following illustrations will show the learner the 
 difference between certain vowel sounds which an untrained 
 ear may at first confuse. 
 
 -v^- 
 
 pa paw far for pnll pool luck look 
 
 32. It is sometimes difficult to distinguish between the 
 sound of the heavy third-place dot and the sound of the light 
 first-place dash. The heavy third-place dot does not occur 
 very often, and it is always represented by a, as in ah, far, 
 calm, and is a longer, heavier sound than the short sound of 
 o, as in doll, represented by a light first-place dash> When the 
 sound is represented by a, in common orthography use the 
 heavy dot third-place; when it is represented by o, use the light 
 first-place dash. 
 
 calm balm doll fop shock 
 
 33. The consonant r has a peculiar power of modifying 
 any vowel sound immediately preceding it, which gives rise to 
 some difficulties for the beginner, especially with a preceding 
 r, as in air, dare, there. As the sound of this vowel in most 
 parts of the country more nearly approaches the short sound 
 of a (as in a/), pupils will rightly use the third-place light dot. 
 Pupils from England and the eastern parts of the country give 
 it a more open sound approaching long a (as in ale), and will 
 represent it by the heavy second place dot; and it is thus 
 generally represented throughout this book. 
 
 34. In such words as,jftr,fur, berry, bury, some teachers 
 adopt the plan of vocalizing with a light second-place dash 
 when the sound is represented in longhand by , and when 
 
26 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 the sound is represented by any other vowel than u the light 
 second-place dot is used. Other teachers follow the sound as 
 they conceive it to be, and use the sign which most nearly 
 represents it. 
 
 fur burr fir per myrr 
 
 35. Beginners must bear in mind that words are written 
 as they are sounded, not as they are spelled. Double conso- 
 nants are not repeated. To illustrate with the word funny; 
 the double consonant is not repeated, and the final y has the 
 sound of short i. 
 
 Caution : Place vowels exactly where they belong. Avoid 
 placing them midway between two positions so that it is 
 impossible when reading them to tell for what position they 
 were intended. 
 
 THE RULE OF POSITION FOR WORDS. 
 
 36. There are three positions for the consonant outlines, 
 corresponding with the vowel positions. An outline is said to 
 be in the first position when its first perpendicular or inclined 
 stroke is half a consonant length above the line of writing ; it 
 is in the second position when its first perpendicular or inclined 
 stroke rests on the line of writing ; and it is in the third posi- 
 tion when its first perpendicular or inclined stroke is written 
 through the line of writing. When the outline consists 
 wholly of horizontal characters, it must be written nearly the 
 height of a consonant stroke above the line of writing for 
 the first position ; on the line for the second position, and a 
 slight distance below the line for the third position. 
 
 37. The Accented Vowel of a word determines its 
 position. If the accented vowel is first place, the outline of 
 the word is written in the first position ; if the accented vowel 
 is second-place, the outline is written in the second position ; 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 27 
 
 if the accented vowel is third-place, the outline is written in the 
 third position. This rule secures greater legibility, for if the 
 vowel be omitted, it would not be difficult to determine it by 
 the position of the outline. 
 
 NOTE. An exception to this rule is found in a few drivatives 
 where legibility requires them to follow the position of the primitive, 
 without regard to the rule of position. 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 38. The marks of punctuation used in Phonography are 
 as follows : 
 
 Perlod -Y-- Laughter -~<- 
 
 Dash ...^r..... , 
 
 Paragraph jf Ot I, 
 
 ? / "~" 
 Interrogation ...... ____________ .L ___ 
 
 Exclamation ........ L_ ApPlaUSO 
 
 Doubt _____ GL 
 
 Hissing 
 
 Hyphen 
 
 39. Very little use is made of punctuation in phonographic writing. 
 The period, the dash, and the indication of capitals are the only ones 
 frequently used, as the reporter has no time to indicate the minor 
 pauses. At times, however, the comma, colon, and semi-colon are used 
 when the reporting is not too rapid, and a correct interpretation of 
 the meaning of the speaker in transcribing would demand it. When 
 the reporter has not time to insert even the period, it is indicated 
 by leaving in the notes a considerable space, to correspond with 
 the pauses of the speaker's voice. Many writers are in the constant 
 habit of indicating a semi-colon in the same manner. The length of 
 the space thus left will vary according to the relative size of one's char- 
 acters, but if the reporter writes as large a " hand " as the engraved 
 exercises herewith, the space left should be about three-quarters of an 
 inch. 
 
 If the signs for the interrogation and exclamation marks are made 
 in the ordinary way they might be mistaken for shorthand characters, 
 hence, it is best to use the cross instead of the dot in making them. 
 
 The Dash is made double to avoid its being mistaken for Kay. 
 
28 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 40. Emphasis is indicated by the sign used for capitali- 
 zation or by the usual underscoring sign used in longhand. 
 
 41. Initials of proper names are best written in long 
 hand. If there is not time for this, such characters should be 
 selected as will indicate the common and not the phonetic 
 initial, as Pee not Ef should be used as an initial for Philip. 
 When practicable it is best to write proper names in both short 
 and long hand, especially if the name be an uncommon one. 
 
 The stenographic characters do not indicate the spelling of 
 a name, but what is quite as important, they give its pronun- 
 ciation, which the spelling does not give. Proper names when 
 written in shorthand should be fully vocalized. The following 
 alphabet may be used in reporting when there is not sufficient 
 time to write the initial in longhand : 
 
 . \ )' I : ^.. .. .^ v ./. 
 
 ABCDEF G H IJ 
 
 ,^.r..^._^_. ,_\..-^ .j..~.x;x..-~ ./.)_ 
 
 K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 
 
 42. 6" and R are very likely to be misread, and the char- 
 acter for 6" should invariably be written in longhand. 
 
 43. Importance of the Reading Exercises. Ample 
 attention should be given to the following and all subsequent 
 engraved Reading Exercises, for they are fully as important as 
 the Writing Exercises which follow each lesson. They should 
 not be hurried through but read leisurely and thoroughly, and 
 also transcribed into longhand. No amount of mental quickness 
 will compensate for lack of thorough drill in reading. The 
 following exercise is designed as a drill on the vowels, and 
 the student will remember that when they occur between 
 stems, all first-place vowels belong to or are written after 
 the first stem ; second-place vowels belong to the first stem 
 when they are long, and to the second stem when they are short ; 
 and that all third-place vowels belong to the second stem. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 /\ |. /*C ^ J~ )"> ).(_ ^ _. 
 
 P UPWARD jSTROffE'S _* << X 
 
 5V^" /^" I- I i I* 
 V__ ' F^N _ M>, _ k~\ i 
 
 U 
 
 ?_.CT_.5C-V" ^r 
 
 <?__\_.(__i_\ .. 
 
 s_.. , ____. 
 
 /o 3 L 1 ' a 
 // 
 
 29 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 '--^ 
 
 v 
 
30 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 VOWEL WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 44. In the following and succeeding Writing Exercises 
 the learner must adhere strictly to the rule of position. Words 
 containing first-place vowels must be written above the line; 
 words with second-place vowels on the line ; and words of 
 third-place vowels through the line. If the word contains 
 more than one vowel, then the accented vowel determines the 
 position of the word- 
 
 (a) Tame, fame, team, deep, cage, peak, boom, knave, poke, peach, 
 poach, leap (Lay-Pee), foam, teeth, teach, name, fear, four (Ef-Ar), mar 
 (Em-Ray), doom, leaf (Lay-Ef), cape, pail (Fee-Lay), both, meek, chalk, 
 mole (Em-Lay), leak (Lay-Kay), beam, tape, comb, calm, tar (Tee-Ar), 
 cheap, sheaf, reach, nail (En-El), cheek, choke, Job, coach, cake, coke, 
 game, faith, vogue, sheep, shape, pope, robe (Ray-Bee), joke, daub, 
 gauge, coop, cope, theme, maim. 
 
 (b) Mop, top, cap, tip, shock, cup, vim, neck, thumb, gum, chip, 
 cash, pack, pick, peck, check, path, badge, shook, fag, fig, nap, gem, 
 pop, king, nip, mock, muck, mack, knack, pith, patch, pitch, fetch, 
 thick, fish, gash, ink, tag, tug, tub, touch, dip, dog, dumb, chap, chop, 
 jib, judge, Jack, jug, gig, gang, miff, moth, niche, knock, ship, shop, 
 earl (Ar-Lay). 
 
 (c) Pay, paw, dough, toe, go, caw, eight, edge, law, gnaw, no, shoe, 
 sew, ah, bow, ache, oak, ape, obey, abbey, eddy, eighty, oath, thaw, 
 pshaw, show, eel, ale, awl, aim, woe, woo, yea, hoe, eke. 
 
 (d) Bake, beck; cope, cup; make, muck; nail, knell (En-El) ; poke, 
 puck ; beak, back ; take, tuck ; choke, check. 
 
 (e) Bathe, bath ; boothe, booth ; tooth, toothe. 
 
 (f) Veto, meadow, shaggy, shabby, bevy, funny, haughty, honey, 
 Hannah, boquet, Mattie, mummy, many, copy, Kittie, Cuddy, pity, 
 petty. 
 
 (g) Fathom, anthem, damage, depth, effect, comic, invoke, beneath, 
 fagot, cabbage, Jacob, enigma, topic, vacate, picnic, demagogue, Anthony, 
 Timothy, antique. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 81 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 CIRCLES AND LOOPS. 
 
 45. We have thus far presented an alphabet by which 
 any word in the language may be expressed. Briefer forms 
 are, however, necessary for the requisite speed, and from this 
 point on the learner will deal with successive steps of abbre- 
 viation embodied in circles, loops, hooks, and other devices 
 which afford means for contracting words, and at the same 
 time securing their full expression. Some of these devices 
 are very old. The circle, for instance, is said to have been 
 used for the sound of s by Mason in England in 1703. Most 
 of the hooks have been used for one sound or another for 
 many years, although to Mr. Graham and Mr. Pitman belongs 
 the credit of the present use of the circles and hooks. 
 
 46. The sibilants s and z, and the sounds of st, str and ses, 
 are furnished with the brief signs shown below, joined to the 
 stem Tee. 
 
 ....... I ____ 1 _______ i __________ k_ 
 
 t-s t-st t-str t-ses 
 
 47. The Name of the small circle for s or z is Iss, while 
 the name of the stem sign, it will be remembered, is Es. 
 When joined to a stem the circle may be named in conjunction 
 with the stem ; as Pees instead of Pee-Iss. 
 
 48. The joining of the circle to consonant stems seems 
 such an easy matter as to require no explanation, but certain 
 rules are to be observed to secure accuracy in reading. These 
 rules are as follows : 
 
32 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (a) To straight steins the circle is joined on the right 
 hand side, except to Kay, Gay, Ray and Hay, to which they 
 are written on the upper side. In other words, the circle is 
 joined by a motion from left to right, the same as used in 
 writing the long hand (D. The following illustrations will 
 show the method of joining the circle to straight stems : 
 
 _____ __\B _________ . O o _______ 6 __ _ ___ o/_ _________ C. _________ .--_ ________ 
 
 Specs Skays Iss-Chays Iss-Rays Hays Iss-Hay 
 
 NOTE. This rule must be carefully followed, because the circle has 
 a different signification when written on the other side of straight 
 strokes. 
 
 (b) The circle is joined to curved stems on the inside of 
 the curve, or, in other words, the circle must follow the direc- 
 tion of the curves ; thus, 
 
 Sets Sems Slays Iss-Iths bways 
 
 (c) Between two straight stems, both of which are written 
 ia the same direction, the circle should be joined on the right- 
 hand side, or upper side ; as, 
 
 v h 
 
 Pees-Pee Tees-Tea Kays-Kay Rays-Ray Hays-Hay 
 
 (d) The circle is joined on the outer side of two straight 
 stems that form an angle at their junction ; thus, 
 
 Tees-Kay Pees-Kay Pees-Chay Ef-Stay-Tee Efs-El 
 
 (e) If a circle occurs between a straight and a curved 
 stem, it is joined on the inner side of the curved stem ; thus, 
 
 Tees-Ef Fees-En Tees-En Ems-Pee 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 33 
 
 (f) Between two curved stems the circle is generally 
 turned on the inner side of the first stem ; thus, 
 
 Ems-En Eiis-Em Ems-Vee 
 
 49. Vocalization of Stems With Circles Attached. 
 
 When a circle begins an outline it is read before the vowel or 
 stroke, as in lines i and 2 of the Reading Exercise of this les- 
 son, (b) When a circle ends an outline it is read after the 
 vowel and stroke, as in line 3 of the Reading Exercise. ? 
 
 To illustrate this more fully, take the word cities 
 
 and it will be found that the initial circle is read first, 
 then the vowel before the stem, then the stem, then the 
 vowel after the stem, and lastly the final circle. 
 
 50. A Small Loop is used to represent the sound of 
 st initially, and zd as well as st finally, and is made by length- 
 ening the small circle into a loop extending less than half the 
 length of the stem ; thus, 
 
 : s^_XL .^.wL..A. .. 
 
 step past steam nest haste rest raised 
 
 5 1 . The Name of the small loop is Stey. It may also be 
 named in conjunction with the stem, as Peest instead of Pee- 
 Stey. 
 
 52. The Stey loop should not be used when a vowel 
 comes between s and t ; nor when / is followed by a final 
 vowel, as in 
 
 A ra 
 
 satiny visit receipt bestow musty 
 
 53. The Large Loop, extending about two-thirds the 
 length of the stem, and somewhat wider than the Stey loop, is 
 used to represent the sound of str, when it is a final syllable. 
 
84 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 It may also represent any vowel sound that may occur between 
 the / and r ; thus, 
 
 ^ n ' n 
 
 coaster castor muster roaster Hester Nestor 
 
 54. The Name of the large loop is always formed in con- 
 nection with the stem, as Peester. When this loop is spoken 
 of or referred to among stenographers, or between teachers 
 and pupils, it is entirely unaccented. The first syllable is 
 accented to distinguish it from another combination of sir 
 which is presented later on. This loop is never written initially 
 nor medially, but always finally. 
 
 55. The Large Circle represents ses, sez, zez, zes; as, 
 
 bases losses roses chases hisses possessed 
 
 56. As shown above, the large circle represents the sylla- 
 ble ses with the short sound of e. It may be vocalized for 
 other vowels by writing the vowel sign within the circle ; thus, 
 
 ._ ........ No .......... V. ....... __..a^ .......... ^ ...... _..... 
 
 basis season Sussex schism 
 
 57. The Name of the large circle is Ses. 
 
 NOTE. See Sec. 112 for rules governing the use of Es and Zee. 
 
 58. Iss may follow Stey or Ster or Sez : 
 
 masts casts castors recesses diseases 
 
 59. The following Reading Exercise will render familiar 
 the method of joining the circles and loops : 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 35 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 *$JL& '^^JLSL 
 
 r 
 
 jfUUi .NQ_L.^I__-^ 
 
 ,q- i ^ 
 
 14. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 60. (a) Seat, Stee; such, Iss-Chay; seek, Skay; safe, Sef; save, 
 Tss-Vee; soothe, Iss-Thee; sash, Iss-Ish; lays, lace, I/ays; gnaws, Ens; 
 hose, Hays; amaze, Ems; sashes, Iss-Ish-Iss; suppose, space, Specs; 
 gasp, Gays-Pee ; exceed, Kays-Dee ; visit, Vees-Tee : chasm, Kays-Em ; 
 
36 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 mask, Ems-Kay; deceit, Dees-Tee; beseech, Bees-Chay; Joseph, Jays- 
 Ef; spasms, Spees-Ems; hasten, Hays-En. 
 
 (b) Post, Pee-Stey or Peest ; toast, Teest ; chest, Chayst ; coast, 
 Kayst ; nest, Enst ; mast, Ernst ; lost, L,ayst ; erased, Arst ; stop, Stey- 
 Pee ; state, Stey-Tee ; stitch, Stey-Chey ; stage, Stey-Jay ; steel, Stey- 
 Lay ; star, Stey-Ar ; stem, Stey-Em ; stomach, Stey-Em-Kay. 
 
 (c) Poster, Peester ; Chester, Chayster ; faster, Efster ; vaster, Vees- 
 ter ; lustre, Layster ; muster, Emster ; Hester, Hayster ; roaster, Rayster. 
 
 (d) Pieces, Peeses ; bases, Beeses ; tosses, Teeses ; chases, Chayses ; 
 gazes, Gayses ; faces, Efses ; vases, Veeses ; ceases, Esses ; laces, Layses ; 
 erases, Arses ; Moses, Emses ; nieces, Enses ; hisses, Hayses ; roses, 
 Rayses ; timorous, Tee-Em-Rays. 
 
 (e) Soap, sub, sob, sit, sage, obese, sick, salve, piece, apes, pace, 
 pose, pause, lees, loss, laws, aims, paused, teased, chased, just, casts, 
 honest, most, lists hissed, stoop, stub, steel, stole, steam, stem, pastor, 
 posters, Lester, master, jester, Rochester, coasters, toasters, masters, 
 possess, excesses, molasses. 
 
 (f) Passive, basin, massive, besiege, gossip, testy, pasty, beset, de- 
 ceit, justice, gazette, faucet, gusty, necessity, possessive, excessive, de- 
 sist, Mississippi. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 WORD SIGNS. 
 
 61. Brief and suggestive characters called word signs 
 are employed for all the more common words. They are not 
 arbitrary characters, but abbreviated forms, expressing one or 
 more of the principal sounds of the words they represent, and 
 in most cases that part of the outline is chosen which is sug- 
 gestive of the full word. Before one 'can report he must be 
 able to write every word that he hears without the slightest 
 hesitation. He must be able to write the outline of an un- 
 common word with nearly as much ease as the simplest word 
 sign, and the highest speed in any system is reached only 
 when every word in the language becomes practically a word 
 sign. There is little time to stop to analyze a word, no 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 87 
 
 matter how swift the mental process of analysis may be. It 
 is true this requires a vast amount of labor, but it is a labor 
 which grows more delightful as one proceeds in it. 
 
 Although strictly speaking many forms in the following 
 list are not word signs, but unvocalized outlines, yet they 
 occur so frequently that they are put into a Hst to be learned 
 by rote and perfectly familiarized in connection with the Writ- 
 ing Exercises following. 
 
 62. The Position of the word sign is shown in the fol- 
 lowing list by the dotted line. When no line appears the sign 
 is to be placed in the second position. The rule of position 
 explained in Sec. 36 is'not strictly adhered to in the formation 
 of word signs, as it is sometimes necessary for the sake of dis- 
 tinction between words having the same outline to place one 
 of them out of position. Thus, do is placed on the line to dis- 
 tinguish it from had, both belonging, according to the rule, in 
 the third position. So the sign for which, is placed on the 
 line to distinguish it from each. When position must be thus 
 disregarded, the word with the light vowel, rather than the 
 word with the heavy vowel, is placed out of position, and that 
 with a heavy vowel rather than a word with a diphthong. 
 
 63. Where a hyphen and added letters occur, as thank-ed t 
 it indicates that the same sign stands for both words. 
 
 64. The student may follow his own method of learning 
 the word signs. There is no specially easy way. The con- 
 stant reading and writing of them is indispensable to any 
 method. It is important that they should be thoroughly fixed 
 in the mind, and they are placed thus early in the study that 
 the student may make frequent reviews of them at intervals 
 between the other exercises or in connection with them If 
 the sign with its position is spoken by the student at the same 
 time it is made with the pen, it will help to fix it in the 
 memory; thus, Dee 1 , dollar; Dee 2 , do; Dee 3 , had, etc. 
 
 448464 
 
as 
 i 
 
 -4- 
 
 SIMPLE CONSONANT WORD SIGNS. 
 
 .._.}. \ _ hope, party, happy 
 
 these 
 this 
 
 those, thus 
 
 see, saw 
 
 say. so 
 us, use 
 
 \ \ be, object 
 
 Y 
 
 was 
 ..\ use (verb) 
 
 to be 
 
 subject 
 
 , she, wish 
 J } , shall 
 &f_l issue l_ 
 
 , \ | 
 
 ^f. usual-ly 1 
 
 time 
 take, it 
 took, at, out 
 
 dollar 
 do 
 had 
 
 x- wil1 / / 
 f s~ allow, whole / / 
 
 each 
 which, change 
 
 ~~T 7 
 ^ here, hear, her 
 
 1 ^N arC / 
 
 ) 7\ , our / / 
 
 me, my 
 may, am, Mm 
 /^ % home 
 
 advantage 
 large 
 
 common, kingdom 
 come, country 
 
 In, any, never 
 know, no 
 X s own 
 
 because 
 
 v_3 influence 
 ^5, next 
 
 give-n 
 go, together 
 
 thing 
 ^^ language V^ i 
 ^^s long, along ' \^ 
 
 if 
 i for, fact, 
 V f ew 
 
 1 ->. way V. i 
 
 j ^v away v 
 -^-, 
 
 s- s- your p 
 f 6 yes, yours V 
 
 ever 
 have, 
 Ste_J^_ however 
 
 several 
 
 o is, his / 
 o as, has ^ / 
 
 think 
 ; thank, thousand 
 
 Is his, is as, his is, his has 
 O as his, as has, has his, has as , 
 
 O J? first ( 
 
 (they, them, 
 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 39 
 
 65. When two or more words have the same sign, as hope, 
 party, or is and his, the context will readily enable the writer 
 to distinguish between them. 
 
 66. The plural number and the possessive case of nouns 
 is indicated by adding Iss to the word sign ; as, 
 
 _____________ v 
 
 N 
 
 parties things homes subjects 
 
 67. The third person of the singular number and the 
 perfect participles of verbs are expressed by the addition of 
 Iss, Ses, or Stey ; as, 
 
 _JL_ .......... L _______ ^ ...... ^i*L_ ...... - ........ 
 
 takes thinks influences influenced commonest 
 
 68. Iss and Ses are also used to add self and selves to pro- 
 nouns; as, 
 
 myself himself herself yourselves ourselves 
 
 69. Ses 1 may also represent is as, and his has ; and Ses 2 
 is used for as is, and as his. 
 
 70. Derivatives from the words of this list may be formed 
 by writing the character representing the derivatives, either 
 joined or disjoined to the word signs ; as, 
 
 uncommon commoner commonly happier subjected 
 
 NOTE. Sometimes when words are written in full it is necessary to 
 disjoin a letter to form the suffix, as, cautiously. In phonographic 
 nomenclature the colon is used to indicate that the stems are to be dis- 
 joined. 
 
40 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 71. Word Signs. Advantage, allow, along, am, any, are, as. as 
 has, at, away, be, because, by, charge, charged, come, common, com- 
 monest, commonly, country, do, dollar, each, ever, fact, few, first, for, 
 give, given, had, has, has as, have, hear, her, here, him, his, hope, how- 
 ever, if, in, influence, is, is his, it, its, it is, kingdom, know, language, 
 large, long, may, me, much, my, never, no, our, out, next, own, see, sev- 
 eral, she, shall, so, subject take, time, thank, them, these, they, thing, 
 think, this, those, thousand, thus, to be, together, up, us, use (noun), use 
 (verb), usual, usually, was, way, which, whole, why, will, wish, yes, your. 
 
 Derivatives. Hopes, parties, subjects, times, takes, its, it is, itself, 
 does, advantages, kingdoms, countries, country's, comes, gives, facts, 
 thinks, thanks, thousands, this is, this has, themselves, sees, uses (noun), 
 uses (verb), wishes, hers, herself, ourselves, myself, himself, knows, 
 owns, influences, influenced, language, yours, yourself, yourselves. 
 
 Sentences. i. It may be seen at any time in my niece's home. 2. 
 Several think it will be given away. 3. Why will she use her influence 
 for them in this way? 4. Joseph will this day take the last stage for 
 home. 5. They will come out here together. 6. Her influence will 
 do much for them. 7. Your income will be large. 8. Which are to 
 to be given away? 9. She may think so. lo. Are they home? II. 
 Will they go our way? 12. Why do they buy so many? 13. Will 
 they allow it to be given away? 14. If she is here she will have her 
 own way. 15. Such things are common enough in this country. 16. 
 She uses our language in her own way. 17. It is usual for them to be 
 een together. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 41 
 
 * 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 72. A diphthong is the union in one syllable of two 
 eowels both of which are sounded- There are four diph- 
 thongs in English, and they are found in the words by, oil, 
 bow, few, 
 
 73. In shorthand they are. represented by the following 
 angular marks : v 
 
 t'asin 01 as in owasiu eioasiii 
 time oil owl dew 
 
 74. The placing of these diphthong signs to consonant 
 outlines is governed by the same rules as given for vowels. 
 The direction of these signs, unlike the dash signs for the 
 vowels, is never changed to correspond with the direction of 
 the consonant signs : 
 
 J v _.; .J A 
 
 / ""\ i< 
 
 < 
 
 tie my coy toy mew due 
 
 75. The sound of u immediately preceded by an r, as in 
 rude, bruise, etc., is not properly a diphthong, but a vowel, 
 and the third-place heavy dash is used to represent it. 
 
 76. The sound of uo in buoy may be represented by 
 
 shading the character for ow ; thus, \. _buoy. 
 
 VA 
 
 77. There are a few words in which two vowel signs are 
 required to be written to one stroke, in which case the vowel 
 
42 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 which is sounded next to the consonant should be placed 
 nearer thereto ; as, 
 
 T \ A 
 
 - - ..... c 
 
 idea genii payee Ohio 
 
 78. When convenient the diphthong signs may be 
 joined ; as, 
 
 iota eyed bow cue 
 
 SECOND LIST OF WORD SIGNS. 
 
 79. In the following list a few word signs involving the 
 halving principle are placed out of their logical order that we 
 may avail ourselves of their use in the Reading and Writing 
 Exercises which follow. 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 I, high 
 
 aye how 
 
 he 
 
 new, knew 
 
 now 
 
 ^ 
 
 v/" \P 
 
 - 
 
 ( 
 
 ( - 
 
 I will, highly 
 
 higher highest 
 
 not 
 
 that 
 
 without 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 So 
 
 f 
 
 / 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Saturday 
 
 speak expect-ed-ation special-ty business satisfy-ed suggest-ed-ion 
 
 satisfactory 
 
 single similar some consume United States necessary 
 
 80. I-Tick. A small initial tick in the direction of the 
 Pee, Chay or Ray, joined to the following word, is used to 
 represent the pronoun // thus, 
 
 Z ............ ....1 ....... 
 
 I will I am I do I think 1 know I shall 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 43 
 
 "V 
 
 v^-f 
 
 ^.t:t.&.^.^.^^-% 
 
 ^.^...^..W^..^..^.-^.-^.. 
 
 >> ^ >-* A rxf ' X c tfe ^ >i 
 
 / ^^^ x X .^- | I /* x / I -- , % *^p" y^ ^ 
 
 .. .. C- 1- --^--I-CA > - 
 
44 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 81. (a) Pie, pies, vie, vies, die, dice, sigh, high, alley, arise (Arsj, 
 sign, sky, Silas, styles, cite, sight, side, nice, nicer (Ens- Ray), nicest, 
 ice, eyes, spice, chime, rhyme (Ar-Em), slices, sliced, enticed, piety, lyre 
 (Lay-Ar), abide, desire (Dees-Ar), deny, tyro (Tee-Ray), virus (Vee-Rays), 
 dignify, terrify. 
 
 (d) Boys, coy, poise, toys, toil (Tee-Lay), voyage, enjoys, oil, spoil 
 (Spec-Lay), soil, alloy, decoy, noise, noised, noises, ahoy, hoist, hoists, 
 envoy, joist, voice, voices, Savoy. 
 
 (c) Bow, vow, vows, mouse, sour (Iss-Ar), cow, stout, thou, Dow, 
 owl, cowl (Kay-Lay), vouch, conch, scow, endow, south, house, arouse 
 (Ars), aroused (Ar-Stey), ounce. 
 
 (d) Pews, views, sue, accuse, accused, accuses, yews, Jews, cube, 
 dnpe, fuje, effuse, effuses, effused, fume, lure (Lay-Ar), hue, muse, ruse 
 (Rays), suit, stew, nephew, puny, refuse (Ray-Efs), sinew, venue, ensue, 
 rescue (Rays-Kay), bureau (Bee-Ray), obtuse, Mayhew. 
 
 (e) Unite, Tioga, Cayuga, occupy. 
 
 (/) Tower (Tee-Ar), shower (Ish-Ar), Ohio, idea, iota, ivy. 
 
 (g) Word Signs. Aye, eye, he, highly, how, knew, new, now, that, 
 high, higher, highest, speak, expect, special, suggest, satisfy, Saturday, 
 expected, expectation, satisfied, suggestion, single, United States, neces- 
 sary, similar, business, some, consume. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 PETOID WORD SIQN5. 
 
 82. A Petoid is a quarter length Pee ; Tetoid, a quarter 
 length Tee, and so with the other straight stems. Hence, the 
 following word signs are called Petoids. These names are 
 convenient in referring to these signs; as, Betoid 1 , for instance, 
 is the name of the word sign for all. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 45 
 
 83. They are also called vowel word signs, as they are 
 the vowel signs, written in changed directions, for the respec- 
 tive words. The signs for of and all are in the first position 
 because their vowels are first-place vowels. As the vowel 
 signs, when not written beside a consonant stroke, can be 
 written conveniently in but two positions, all the first-place 
 vowels, when used as word signs, are retained in their proper 
 positions, while the second and third-place vowel signs are 
 written on the line. Hence, the reason for the positions of 
 the word signs composing this group. In actual work these 
 signs are a trifle longer than one-quarter of a stem, but care 
 should be used not to make them too long, as they might be 
 mistaken for half sized characters, explained later on. 
 
 (Third List.) 
 
 VOWEL WORD SIGNS. 
 
 of 
 
 all 
 
 to 
 
 two 
 too 
 
 or 
 
 already 
 awe 
 
 but oh on ought should who-m 
 
 owe 
 
 a-n and the 
 
 84. All the above word signs should be written down- 
 ward with the exception of on and should, which should gen- 
 erally be written upward. 
 
 85. The Tick. The is joined as a final tick, sloping 
 upward or downward in the direction of Pee, Chay, or Ray. 
 It is preferable, however, to select the tick which when joined 
 makes the sharpest angle. It should not be used as an initial 
 tick. When the cannot be conveniently expressed by the tick 
 the dot sign should be used. 
 
46 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 I *-/ /O 
 
 ,-JL ~.. 
 
 which the in the is the it is the may the 
 
 should the who the as the 
 
 (/ . _V 
 
 of the all the but the owe the on the ought the 
 
 86. When this tick follows the Stey loop, it should not 
 cross the stem, but should be made as illustrated below: 
 
 post the cast the master the just the 
 
 87. A-An-And Tick. A small horizontal or perpendic- 
 ular tick is used to express a, an, and: 
 
 ] ^ .t * Z_ T . 
 
 and do and in and is and since a check a boy 
 
 88. For ease and certainty of reading this tick should be 
 made initially only, although it is sometimes used as a final 
 tick, where an initial joining is impracticable, and when used 
 as a final tick, Ketoid should be used rather than Tetoid, as in 
 the phrase, 
 
 Because a stop was necessary. 
 
 Some writers, however, prefer to make it initial only, 
 using the dot sign for a, an, and, when it cannot be joined 
 initially, and this practice we strongly recommend. 
 
 89. When the tick for he stands alone or begins a phrase 
 it must rest on the line, and is generally written downward to 
 distinguish it from should. It is sometimes made final, in 
 which case the context must distinguish it from the. 
 
 The initial tick for / is always in the first position. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 47 
 
 90. These ticks have no position of their own, but take 
 the position of the words to which they are joined, with the 
 exception of and the, and a, which, when standing alone, 
 should have the first stroke rest upon the line of writing. 
 They are thus distinguished from and should, and but, in which 
 phrases the second stroke falls upon the line of writing; as, 
 
 ....... ....-?..... .......... -7. ........ - .......... rt..- ...... - ..... -, ____ .................. _ .......... V .......... Jf ................... f. 
 
 and the and should and but and a and I said he he said I said 
 
 91. Phrasing. The student may learn at this point that 
 simple words are frequently joined into phrases. Not being 
 accustomed to join words in longhand writing, phrasing may 
 seem awkward at first, but the practice soon becomes one of the 
 most fascinating features of shorthand, as it increases both 
 speed and legibility. Something more will be said upon this 
 subject later on ; for the present it is enough to know that 
 only those words which belong to the same grammatical 
 phrase should be joined. In other words, if a pause inter- 
 venes between the words, they should not be phrased. Some- 
 times the same words are joined in a phrase which at other 
 times would be separated. The following will illustrate the 
 method of joining word signs into phrases : 
 
 it may do they in these in this in those 
 
 92. Word signs are sometimes vocalized when phrased to 
 secure very clear distinctions ; as, 
 
 ..... UN ............ U ......... ..U ......... .7^?. ....... 7C. 
 
 it may take me take him give me give him 
 
 93. The circle Iss is often joined to add is, his, as, has 
 or us. Some judgment must be exercised, however, in join- 
 ing the circle to add these words, as they sometimes conflict. 
 
48 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Thus, ~~ ^ may stand for gives, give his or give us- When 
 the context is not likely to determine which is meant, the signs 
 must be disjoined and the stem Es must be used for us. 
 
 94. The first word of a phrase generally determines its 
 position. Thus phrases beginning with / or any first position 
 word sign, must commence above the line. Phrases begin- 
 ning with he must commence on the line. Phrases commenc- 
 ing with how must begin under the line, as will be seen by the 
 accompanying Reading Exercise. 
 
 95. Prefixes and Affixes will be fully treated in a sub- 
 sequent chapter. A few occur so frequently it is deemed 
 best to present them at this point, that we may have a greater 
 variety of words to draw from in the illustration of subsequent 
 principles. CON or COM is expressed by a light dot at the 
 beginning of a word ; as, 
 
 _i ____ 1 __________ \. 
 
 conscious committee compose 
 
 (a) The reporter generally implies con, com or cog by 
 writing the remainder of the word under the preceding 
 word; as, 
 
 I will concede. 
 
 96. Ing is expressed by a light dot at the end of a word ; 
 as, 
 
 doing seeing talking 
 
 97. When it is desirable to distinguish ing from ings the 
 dot may be repeated for ings. There is nothing to prevent the 
 writer from using the stroke for Ings, if he so desires, and, 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 49 
 
 indeed, it should be used when this affix forms part of a noun, 
 or when it follows the iss circle ; thus, 
 
 doings misgivings sayings etchings causing 
 
 98. -ing the. The affix ing and an immediately follow- 
 ing the is expressed by disjoining the tick for the, and writing 
 it in the place of the ing dot ; thus, 
 
 U ^ \ \ r 
 
 / V- / / 
 
 taking the showing the posting the subjecting the selling the 
 
 99. -ing-a-an-and. The affix ing and an immediately 
 following a, an or and is expresssed by disjoining the tick for 
 a-n-d, and writing it in the place of the dot for ing ; thus, 
 
 *-" ( 1 
 
 x__ _ 
 
 singing a-n-d thinking a-u-d giving a-n-d 
 
 100. When / occurs between two words closely related 
 it may be joined by a straight tick, that is, in the direction of 
 Tee or Kay. It will not conflict with the a-tick, but it. must be 
 Ketoid or Tetoid to distinguish it from the he-tick which is 
 always slanting : 
 
 If. If. . CLO of 
 
 1 T~-, 1 T~ 
 
 so I said so he said as I said as he said 
 
 101. In accordance with a principle stated later on, to a 
 may be represented by Tetoid under the line and to the by 
 Petoid under the line. Retoid under the line represents how. 
 
 to the to a how 
 
50 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 9 p \\ 
 
 \ 
 v...^'.'./.'......j 
 
 .I.-.^T. 
 
 i 
 
 i 
 
 ._. ..../_................ /.y? L_/...(...-P _______ .(*_. f>...fT^..f... . 
 
 ,5__ /-TICK. A ....1.._1.4...77._t J. ( ...?..1A..^.^..^ J.. A. 
 
 -i.. +.. *...*. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 51 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 102. (a) Of, all, to, two, too, or, already, but, oh, owe, on, ought, 
 should, who, whom, a, an, and, the. 
 
 (b) Up the, hope, by the, be the, to be the, subject the, take 
 the, time the, at the, it is the, do the, had the, each the, which the, much 
 the, because the, give the, if the, or the, ever the, have the, think the, 
 thank the, that is the, this is the, see the, so the, use the, was the, is the, 
 as the, wish the, shall the, hear the, are the, here is the, may the, in the, 
 know the, own the, influence the, why the. 
 
 (c) Save the, sing the, wishes the, stop the, back the, knows the, 
 post the, stole the. 
 
 (d) And do, and may, and say, andjthink, and several, and give, and 
 of, and or, and already, and but, and owe, and on, and ought, and should, 
 and who, and a, and the, a thing, a way, a book, an hour, an oar, an 
 advantage. 
 
 (e) Doing the, thinking the, showing the, asking the, wishing the, 
 hoping the, composing the, comparing the, committing the, confessing 
 the, buying a, oiling a, seeing a, reaching a, hearing a. 
 
 (f ) It may, which may, they may, each may, much may, she may, 
 will do, will be, will have, will think, give them, give this, give that, 
 give those, give him, give me, give my, take them, take him, own them, 
 see him, charge him, know them, hear me, hear them, in them, by me, 
 by them, it is, it was, shall be, by me, shall have, if they, shall do. 
 
 Commence the following phrases above the line : I hope, I shall, I 
 do, I had, I take, I charge, I come, I give, I think, I thank, I see, I say, 
 I was, I use, I will, I hear, I am, I know, I never. 
 
 Commence on the line of writing : He hopes, he takes, he charges, 
 he conies, he gives, he thinks, he has, he shall, he will, he may, he 
 knows, who may, who will. 
 
 Commence under the line : How it, how do, how much, how easy, 
 how are, how many. 
 
 (g) i. It may be ready (Ray-Dee) in time for the next mail (Em- 
 Say). 2. Give my best wishes to the boys. 3. It was of some advan- 
 tage to us all. 4. I hope you will use your influence for them. 5. I 
 shall take charge of these things for some time to come. 6. This may 
 
52 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 seem to be too large. 7. I hope they will soon take .- ^vantage of it. 
 8. I know it will be given away. 9. I will give them to him in time 
 for the first mail (Em-Lay). 10. The study of this language is new to 
 us and takes up much of our time. n. Now they will see life (Lay-Ef) 
 as it is in a large city. 12. It will be of much advantage to them 13. 
 They will not allow him to go away just now. 14. This is no reason why 
 they should charge so much. 15. It is not so cheap as it seems at first, 
 16. I think it will last a long time. 17. I have seen many changes 
 since I came here last season. 18. I will look (Lay-Kay) for them 
 early (Ar-Lay) in the day. 19. I saw them pass by in a new buggy. 
 20. I have not said all I desire (Dees-Ar) to say on this subject. 21. 
 He may not know how to use them to advantage. 22. I see no reason 
 why you should change your way of thinking. 23. I will allow him so 
 much for his house. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 53 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 THE LETTER H. 
 
 103. The letter h represents only a whispered utterance, 
 a slight blowing or expulsion of the breath, and hence is 
 called an aspirate. To aspirate a vowel is to sound h before it. 
 The sound of h is most frequently represented by writing a 
 light dot before the vowel or diphthong which follows it ; as, 
 
 hate homely hall whist 
 
 NOTE. In the combination wh, this method of representing h is 
 not phonetic, but follows the method of the common orthography. 
 (See Appendix). 
 
 104. Uses of the Hay Stroke. It may be stated as a 
 general rule that Hay is used only when it is necessary to afford 
 a position for a vowel, as in writing the words, hoe, hay, Hugh, 
 etc. Specific rules may be given as follows : 
 
 (a) Use Hay when it is the only consonant stroke in the 
 word, as haw, haste, house. 
 
 (b) Use Hay when h follows an initial vowel, as ahead. 
 
 (c) Use Hay in words of two or more syllables when 
 initial h forms a syllable with a following vowel, as haughty, 
 hasten, but not homely . 
 
 (d) The Name of the h-dot is Heh. 
 
 NOTE. The letter h usually proves troublesome to beginners, 
 especially if they attempt to write general matter before they have 
 learned all the principles, and yet to the practiced writer it is easy of 
 representation. Some writers provide a small tick written in the direc- 
 tion of Chay for the aspirate, but which is generally discarded by the 
 active reporter or the amanuensis. We regard this use of the tick at 
 any time of doubtful utility, as the two methods given above are 
 ample for all purposes. Ticks are so frequently used for such words as 
 /, he, the, and the oid word signs, that it is not well to extend its use to 
 the letter h. Experience and observation will soon teach the student 
 to quickly and surely determine when to use the dot and when the 
 stem. 
 
54 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 ........ 1 .......... a ....... ........ ^ ........ } 
 
 r... 
 
 .<<^3L ^k <tl <i 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 55 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 105. (a) Heap, hope, heat, hate, hitch, hatch, hedge, hath, hash, 
 hush, hail, hall, howl, hire, Horr, hair (Ar), hang, highway, hugely, whiz, 
 whistle, whist, heath, hood, Hoyle, Hudson, hulk (El-Kay), hammock, 
 humility, hymn, Hindoo. 
 
 (b) Hug, hog, hack, hiccough, hawk, hoax, hoggish, hearse, horse, 
 hoarse (Ars). 
 
 (c) Use the stem sign in the following words: Hiss, ahoy, haste, 
 holy, hollow, hilly, hallow (Hay-Lay), hasty, hero, hurry, Harry (Hay- 
 Ray), hyena, honey, heavy, hobby, husky, haughty, house-dog, house- 
 keeping, hubbub, high, huffy, huzzy, hustle (Hays-Lay), hyacinth, hie, 
 harvest, (Hay-Ray-Veest), hassock, hawser (Hays- Ray), hyssop. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 DIFFERENT USES OF AR, RAY, LAY AND EL, 
 
 ALSO ISH, SHAY, Es AND ZEB. 
 
 1 06. It is a general principle that the downward stroke 
 of these stems is used to indicate a preceding vowel, and the 
 upward stroke is used to indicate that the word begins with a 
 consonant and not with a vowel. Thus, air, oar, ark and irregu- 
 lar are written with the downward character, called Ar ; while 
 rye, row, rise, robe and regular are written with the upward 
 character, Ray. The following specific rules are of quite 
 general application and cover most of the words in which 
 these stems occur. They also increase legibility by securing 
 a variety of outlines for words containing the same stems. 
 
 107. General Use of Ar. Use Ar when preceded by an 
 initial vowel, or when r ends a word ; as, 
 
 poor bar 
 
56 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Except, 
 
 I. Always use Ray preceding Tee, Dee, Chay, Jay, Ith, 
 En or Sen; as, 
 
 aright arrayed arch urge arena 
 
 II. Always use Ray following Ith, Em or Ray ; as, 
 
 Thayer mire rare 
 
 III. The sound of final r preceded by iss or ses in the 
 majority of words, is expressed by Ray, because it joins with 
 greater facility ; as, 
 
 answer officer successor possessor 
 
 1 08. General Use of Ray. Use Ray when r begins a 
 word or when it is followed by a final vowel ; as, 
 
 _kL .w \L 
 
 V 
 
 rate rich barry berry 
 
 Except, 
 
 Always use Ar before M ; as, 
 
 arm room 
 
 109. General Use of Lay. L,ay is used at the begin- 
 ning of words whether preceded by a vowel or not ; and at the 
 end of words whether followed by a vowel or not ; as, 
 
 lime allege bell July 
 
 1 10. The following exceptions are made to the foregoing 
 rule for the sake of greater legibility and ease of execution : 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 57 
 
 I. Always use El before and after En or Ing ; as, 
 
 .._c;_._a ........ x _____ .IT... 
 
 lion long nail kingly 
 
 II Use El before Em, Kay or Gay if preceded by a 
 vowel ; as, 
 
 alike alum Allegheny 
 
 III Use El after Ef, Vee or Ray unless followed by a 
 final vowel ; as, 
 
 file folly vale valley royal royally 
 
 NOTE. The above rules are not inflexible, but are subject to such 
 exceptions as may be necessary to avoid inconvenient outlines, which 
 might result if the rules were strictly adhered to. 
 
 USES OF ISH AND SHAY. 
 
 in. The downward stroke Ish, is generally found more 
 convenient, but when it precedes Lay it must be written 
 upward, as in the words shale, shallow, shawl, etc. In other 
 cases the pupil may use whichever is suited to his hand. 
 
 USES OF Es AND ZEE. 
 
 112. The sound of s or z is generally represented by the 
 circles and loops already explained. There is a small class of 
 words, however, in which the stroke signs must be used in 
 order to afford a position for the vowel. The following prin- 
 ciples will indicate clearly when the stem signs should be used 
 instead of the circle : 
 
58 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 m 
 
 I. When Es or Zee is the only stem in the word ; as, 
 
 ^ T 
 
 ace cease seize saw 
 
 II. When a word begins with a vowel followed by ^ or 
 z ; -as, 
 
 ask escape easel 
 
 NOTE. It will be remembered that a vowel cannot be read before 
 an initial circle, and if we should attempt to write ask with a circle we 
 should have _ sack as a result. 
 
 III. When s or z is the last consonant in a word and is 
 followed by a vowel ; as, 
 
 racy rosy Lacey dizzy fallacy pursue 
 
 IV. When two concurrent vowels immediately follow or 
 precede ^ or z the stem should be used, as it furnishes more 
 convenient room for inserting the vowels ; as, 
 
 science chaos Siam pious Suez 
 
 V. When a word begins with the sound of z it must be 
 represented by the stroke Zee ; as, 
 
 * 
 
 zeal zero zenith zest zodiac 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE- 
 
 59 
 
 6 
 
 -' 
 
 ..es,zeE_ ...j.. Jr.). X)'. xO'. L -.'.xf. '" 
 
60 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 113. (a) Ear, ore, air, ere, oar, ire, era, Erie, arm, ark, hark, poor, 
 bar, burr, bore, bear, pair, pier, pore, tear, tore, tar, tire, par, four, fear, 
 fire, boor, veer, jeer, lore, lure, lyre, sore, sear, soar, store, stair, Caesar, 
 saucer. 
 
 (b) Row, rye, row, rue, ray, rose, rise, raise, rote, rate, ride, 
 wrought, rude, raid, right, wrong, reap, rope, robe, rich, wretch, reach, 
 ridge, ready, reason, root, rock, rogue, risk. 
 
 (c) Urge, arch, earth, arrayed, aright, arena, erroneous, vary, 
 Archie, hearth, Thayer, mar, myrrh, mire, rear, rare, roar, answer, officer, 
 successor, possessor, Moor, sorry, sorrow, story, starry, Cicero, Pern,-, 
 parry, berry, fiery, ivory, merry, theory, thorough, narrow, Henry, gory. 
 
 (d) Lame, lime, leap, loop, leaf, leave, live, love, loaf, latch, lodge, 
 lock, like, luck, look, elbow, alibi, olive, allude, appeal, pill, pale, bell, 
 tile, toil, dell, dale, earl, early, holy, hollow, folly, felloe, fellow. 
 
 (e) Lion, Illinois, lesson, listen, kneel, nail, null, inhale, file, vale, 
 royal. 
 
 (f ) Shell, shale, shawl, Shiloh, Ashley. 
 
 (g) Ask, asp, acid, Asa, ace, cease, sue, racy, rosy, cozy, busy, escape, 
 easier, Nassau, hazy, lasso, Jessie, science, essence, ease, zeal, zero, 
 Zouave, zest, zealous. 
 
 LESSON X. 
 BRIEF SIGNS FOR W AND Y. 
 
 114. These signs are provided for the sake of securing 
 greater brevity and avoiding awkward junctions. The brief 
 Way is a small semi-circle opening either to the right or left ; 
 the brief Yay is a small semi-circle opening either upward or 
 downward. The brief Way is called Weh when it opens to 
 the right, and Wuh, when it opens to the left. The brief Yay 
 is called Yeh when it opens upward, and Yuh, when it opens 
 downward ; thus. 
 
 Weh Wuh Yeh Yuh 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND 61 
 
 115. Either brief sign for W (Weh or Wuh) may be 
 joined to any stem except Hay, I,ay, Em, En and Ray. On 
 down strokes Weh will be found more convenient and Wuh 
 will secure the necessary angle on Kay, Gay and Ing, as in 
 the words week, wig, wing, etc. 
 
 116. Yeh or Yuh may be joined to any stem except 
 Hay, always forming the sharpest possible angle with the stem. 
 
 Brief signs are always read before any vowel preceding 
 the stem. The following illustrations will show the manner 
 in which they are joined and read: 
 
 3.. lit ..... ft A.. ..1. ^r. .;.. 
 
 weep wedge week weave yacht yellow yon 
 
 117. On the stems Lay, Em, En and Ray, the brief Way 
 must be joined as a hook ; thus, 
 
 wall wore qualm wine 
 
 1 1 8. The Name of the w-hook is formed in connection 
 with its stem, as follows : Wei, Wer, Wem and Wen. 
 
 "119. The circle Iss may be written within the brief 
 signs for TV; thus, 
 
 1 
 
 sweet Ipswitch swore 
 
 1 20. The brief signs for w and y are sometimes disjoined 
 and written in the vowel places to indicate both the w ory sound 
 and the vowel immediately following ; thus, 
 
 twist dwell squawk quick quota folio 
 
 121. The use of the disjoined characters for w andy, how- 
 ever, is limited to a few words where the brief sign cannot be 
 conveniently joined. 
 
62 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 122. Brief Yay is sometimes used to represent two con- 
 current vowels coalescing very closely, as in the words opiate, 
 curious, atheist, etc. (See line n of Reading Exercise for 
 this lesson.) 
 
 123. When the abbreviated iu stands for a dot vowel, the 
 semicircle opens to the right. In other words, Weh is used 
 to indicate that the vowel following the w is a dot vowel. 
 When the abbreviated w stands for a dash vowel, Wuh is used 
 to so indicate it. The signs may be shaded to indicate the heavy 
 dots and dashes, and made light to indicate the light dots and 
 dashes. This distinction, however, is soon disregarded by the 
 reporter. 
 
 124. The following table will illustrate the method of 
 writing Weh and Wuh, Yeh and Yuh in the vowel places : 
 
 WEH SERIES. 
 
 HEAVY LIGHT 
 
 c we as in weary 
 c ifj as iuwade 
 c wa as waft 
 
 !<( as iu walk 
 3 wo as iu woke 
 ;> woo as iii wooed 
 
 c irf as in wit 
 c we as in wet 
 wa as in wag 
 
 wo as in wot or watch 
 3 wu as in won 
 3 woo as in wood 
 
 YEH SERIES. 
 
 U ye as in yeast 
 
 u l/a as in Yale 
 
 u I/a as in yacht 
 
 n i/a as in yawl 
 
 i/o as in yoke 
 
 n i/oo as in youth 
 
 u i/ as in yit 
 
 o- ye as Iii yet 
 
 u i/a as in yap 
 
 j/oasiiiyon 
 
 n l/u as in young 
 
 j/u as iu yul 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 63 
 
 125. A small right angle is used to indicate the sound of 
 w coalescing with the long sound of z, as in the following 
 words : 
 
 __1 _ X _J 
 
 wide wife white 
 
 THE STEMS WAY AND YAY. 
 
 126. The following rules will determine the correct use 
 of Way and Yay. 
 
 The Stem Way must be used as follows : 
 
 (a) When it is the only consonant stroke in the word, as 
 in woe, etc. 
 
 (b) When initial w is followed by the sound of s; as, 
 
 v.._._x 
 
 waste wisely wasp whisky 
 
 (c) When w follows an initial vowel ; as 
 
 i 
 
 awake awhile await 
 
 127. The stem Yay is used in all words in which Yay is 
 the only consonant stem, and also when it follows an initial 
 vowel; as, >*- /"* 
 
 yea yeast oyer 
 
 (Fourth List.) 
 
 THE WEH WORD SIGNS. 
 128. The following word signs should now be learned: 
 
 D u n 
 _ ?_..., .....V..... n 
 
 we were what would ye yet beyond you 
 
 with year yesterday 
 
64 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 L c^ 
 
 while well we are where aware we may 
 
 we will with our work 
 
 when one 
 
 129. Wem in the first position is also a sign for with me 
 or with my ; and in the second position it is used for with him. 
 When, in phrases, it is necessary to distinguish with me from 
 with him, it may be done by inserting the vowel ; as, 
 
 with me with him 
 
 130. Wen in the first position is a sign for with no or 
 we know, and may be distinguished from when by vocalizing. 
 
 (Fifth List.) 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 131. The student will see the origin of the following 
 signs : 
 
 anything anywhere nowhere wherever whenever forever 
 
 something disadvantage become familiar-ity acknowledge refer 
 
 :L_ ..... _> ........ _JL__._ ..... \ _______ 2} 
 
 represent notwith- neverthe- nothing peculiar-ity irregular-ity 
 standing less 
 
 3 
 
 regular-ity knowledge into unto always also 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 65 
 
 132. Derivatives from the above words are formed by 
 writing the disjoined letter suggesting the derivative near the 
 end of the last stroke of the sign. Thus the disjoined Lay 
 would represent ly in the words regularly, irregularly, newly, 
 peculiarly, familiarly, etc. So, En-Ef-Em would stand for 
 unfamiliar. 
 
 133. The w-hook is used to represent we, were, with in 
 phrases ; as, 
 
 we receive 
 
 Q 
 
 1 
 
 we refer were referred were nowhere 
 
 n n ^ 
 
 we represent 
 we enjoy 
 
 we always 
 
 r 
 
 we also were also were unsatisfactory 
 
 RECAPITULATION. 
 
 134. The following is a synopsis of the uses of the strokes 
 Es, Hay, Way and Yay, and their respective brief signs, Iss, 
 Heh, Weh and Yeh. 
 
 I. From the rules given under each one of the above 
 letters, it is seen that a brief sign is always read before a vowel; 
 thus, - x- M 
 
 _..- __ , _______ ;:l ____ if ____ ! 
 
 sack head while yacht 
 
 II. Hence, when these letters are preceded by a vowel, 
 to read the vowel first, the stroke must be employed ; thus, 
 
 ask ahead awhile oyer 
 
 III. A brief sign being small cannot have three positions 
 for the vowels ; hence, when one of these letters is the only 
 sounded consonant in a word, the stroke must be used ; thus. 
 
 _) _ <<_ ___ >t ____ . 
 
 ace hoe weigh yea 
 
66 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 READING EXERCISE- 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 
 
 __ Sentences ....... _J^_J!!I!jLxfJl-_~;Ba3^^ 
 
 I /i / -T v^ > XT' 
 _ V.^_./J-.-A<,... _ LjzC ____ 1.L 
 
 
 ^^^^ 
 
 -/ / 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 67 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 135- (a) Woe, woo, weighs, wise, west, waist, wasp, wayside. 
 
 (b) Weight, wit, wet, wad, wade, weed, wood, web, witch, watch, 
 wage, wedge, week, wig, wag, wake, woke, wave, weave, waver, weaver, 
 waif, woof, wash, wed, wing, wax, waxed, waxes, waxen ; sweet, Swede, 
 sweat, sweep, swayed, assuage, switch, unswitch, Ipswitch, bewitch, 
 sweetly, sweetest, wettest, Webster. 
 
 (c) Wail, wall, wolf, willow, Welch, William, wallet, walrus, war, 
 wire, wore, weary, wearied, wearisome, worth, worthy, unworthy, worm, 
 warm, worship, win, wine, wane, won, wince, winch, Winchester, 
 Windsor, willow, welladay, wigwam, wamus, swore, swear, swell, swale, 
 swallow, swim, swing, (Iss-Wuh-Ing), window, windy, quince, queen, 
 twine, twain, twin, twinge, Quincy, quench, Edwin. 
 
 (d) Whale, whence, whiff, whilst, whimsy, whirl, whistle, whoop, 
 wheat, wheeze, whig, whim, whine, whist, wheel-barrow,- whip, whim- 
 sical, whinney, whoa, whew. 
 
 (e) Yates, yell, yawl, yellow, young, yawn, yon, yore, yarrow, Yale, 
 yoke, youth, Yankee. 
 
 (f ) Tweak, twitch, quail, quell, squeal, s.quall, twist, quest, inquest, 
 bequest, equipage, maniac, ammonia, opiate, anterior, interior, odium, 
 copious, various, obvious, notorious, serious, piteous, Victoria, Samaria, 
 Tokio, equipoise, acquit, equip, equity, quick, quickest, quake. 
 
 (g) Quiet, quietest, twice, wight, white, wipe, wife, wives. 
 
 (h) I While we are well aware of his familiarity with this science, 
 we think his knowledge lacks thoroughness. 2. The social advantages 
 of large cities are of much use to him who would make the most of life. 
 3. The peace aud quiet of the country are, however, conducive to a life 
 of study. 4. This quiet and peace may be had in a city in an attic room 
 far out of the reach of the noise of daily life. 5. Theory without facts is 
 not science, and knowledge is of no use without the power of thinking 
 and doing. 6. It is said that knowledge is power, but it is not so until 
 our thinking makes it of use to us. 7. Many waste much time in half 
 mastering a language or a science which they will never use. 8. Study 
 is itself of some use, but books should at times give way to society, and 
 society should at times give way to books. 
 
68 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 INITIAL HOOKS. 
 
 136. The sounds of / and r immediately following other 
 consonants (in such words as plea, clay, pray, prow, settle and 
 paper) occur so frequently, and they combine so closely with 
 the immediately preceding consonant that they seem to become 
 a single elementary sound. Such a union of / or r with a 
 foregoing consonant is represented by a small initial hook. 
 
 137. L-Hook. The sound of / immediately following 
 any other consonant than Es, Zee, Ar, Lay, El, Ing, Way and 
 Hay, is indicated by a small initial hook on the circle side of 
 the consonant which it follows. The hook is made large on 
 Em, En and Ray, to distinguish it from the w-hook heretofore 
 explained. 
 
 The following illustration shows all the 1-hook stems : 
 
 pi 
 
 138. Shl is always written upward and never stands 
 alone, in order that it may not conflict with s/ien, to be subse- 
 quently explained. It has its hook at the bottom, and is thus 
 distinguished from shr. 
 
 139. Observe that though the hooks are made first, they 
 are read after the stems to which they are attached. 
 
 140 Obviousl}' there is no advantage to be gained from 
 the use of the 1-hook on Es, Zee, Ar, Lay, El, Ing, Way and 
 
 bl 
 
 tl dl 
 
 C 
 
 chl 
 
 C 
 
 jl 
 J 
 
 kl 
 
 Kl 
 
 fl 
 
 vl 
 
 
 thl 
 
 thl 
 
 shl 
 
 ml 
 
 nl 
 
 rl 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 69 
 
 Hay, as the combination is either of rare occurrence, or it may 
 be more easily expressed otherwise ; as, 
 
 ...r.. .......... _l_r^ ..... eiilrC ; 
 
 sale Carlyle kingly wail hill 
 
 141. R=Hook. The close combination of r with a pre- 
 ceding consonant is indicated by reversing the 1-hook sign. 
 In other words, the r-hook is written on the lower and left 
 hand side of stems in the following manner : 
 
 & ...... :\__JL_.l ...... I ..... ;_._.__. _.<-. ..^._.!^......1_J_ 
 
 pr br tr dr chr jr kr gir fr vr thr thr 
 
 shr zhr mr nr 
 
 142. Ray and Yay, and the consonants which do not 
 take the 1-hook are exempt also from the use of the r-hook. 
 Mer and Ner are shaded to distinguish them from Wem and 
 Wen. No confusion will result from shading Mer and Ner, as 
 Ing does not take an initial hook : 
 
 Mer Ner Wem Wen Ing-Ar Ing-El 
 
 143. In order to preserve analogy of form and utilize all 
 the stenographic material to the best advantage, the stems Es, 
 Zee, Ar and Way do not take the r-hook ; the brief and more 
 facile form for these letters being preferable for their expres- 
 sion in conjunction with a following r. Hence, fr, vr, thr and 
 thr cannot be mistaken for Ar, Way, Es and Zee with a hook 
 attached. These stems do not take initial hooks ; thus, 
 
 J c -r- p l ^s 
 
 ' 
 
 loafej mover author clothier error worthy razor 
 
 baser 
 
70 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 144. The 1 and r-hook signs, when used initially, are 
 intended to represent the close connection of L or R with a 
 preceding consonant ; and when used finally, to represent the 
 same combinations with an obscure vowel intervening. These 
 double consonants are vocalized in the same manner as simple 
 strokes, the vowel being read before or after both ; thus, 
 
 play able frame evil table labor eager 
 
 145. Names. The 1 and r-hook signs are called Pel, 
 Bel, Tel, Chel ; Per, Ber, Ter, Der, Cher, etc. By these names 
 they are distinguished from Pee-Lay, Bee-L,ay, etc., when the 
 consonant stroke for each letter must be written in full. 
 
 146. The joining of certain consonants to the 1 and 
 r-hook signs renders it impossible to make a perfect hook. 
 In such cases the hook is implied by slightly retracing the 
 stroke by which the 1 or r-hook is joined ; thus, 
 
 Baker reply joker couple cudgel 
 
 147 In some cases the two strokes are better than the 
 hooked stems ; as, 
 
 ..rather than. . ^ ... 
 
 dimmer tamer farmer dimmer tamer farmer 
 
 148. The student must not continue until the following 
 list of word-signs has been thoroughly memorized : 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (Sixth List.) 
 
 71 
 
 INITIAL HOOK WORD SIGNS. 
 
 comply 
 people 
 apply 
 
 belong 
 believe 
 
 J) 
 
 either 
 
 their, there, they are 
 other 
 
 -through 
 
 \ 
 
 _ 
 
 it will. tell, till 
 at all, until 
 
 call, equal-ly 
 
 difflcult-y 
 
 calculate-d-ion 
 
 appear, proper 
 
 principal, principle - 
 practice, practical 
 
 liberty 
 
 J 
 
 pleasure 
 measure 
 
 -sure-ly 
 
 Mr., mere, remark 
 
 more 
 humor 
 
 near, nor, in our 
 
 manner 
 
 * brother, number-ed 
 
 1 n 
 internal 
 
 < = ' owi 
 
 V o feel, fill, follow 
 V. fail, for all 
 
 attract 
 
 n doctor 
 1 direct-ed, dear 
 
 f 
 
 during 
 
 ^> t \ surprise 
 .y.-:\_.. express 
 x> suppress 
 
 / y danger 
 77" larger 
 
 correct 
 
 only 
 
 ^_^/ annual 
 t-' s/ real-ly 
 
 rule 
 
 accuracy 
 ' \ form-ed 
 
 ^j 
 
 influential 
 
 \ 
 \ probable, probability 
 
 Ov 
 
 ' \ ^ over 
 )... A. every, very 
 favor 
 
72 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 SPECIAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 149. One of the most important principles in shorthand 
 writing is obtained from the use of the hooks to add words 
 which frequently occur, and which are generally spoken 
 rapidly. 
 
 (a) The 1-hook is made use of to add all and will ; thus, 
 
 by all to all of all it will who will which will they will 
 
 (b) The r-hook adds are or our to simple consonant 
 word signs ; thus, 
 
 at our of our to our In our or our which are much are 
 
 (c) Were may be added to a straight stem word sign by 
 the r-hook, but when so added the sign is placed in the third 
 position; as, 
 
 it were which were but were who were 
 
 150. Derivations from the above list are formed by add- 
 ing the consonant representing the derivative. For peopled, 
 write a disjoined Dee close to the sign for people. Endanger is 
 expressed by joining the stem En to the word sign for danger; 
 careless, by joining L,ays ; remarkable, by adding Bel ; fully, 
 by vocalizing Fel, etc. 
 
 NOTE. The same sign is used for till as until. Till is a colloquial- 
 ism though sometimes used by good writers. The student should not be 
 encouraged in its use. If the business man inadvertently uses the word 
 " till," he desires to see it written out " until." This same remark will 
 apply to many other words as " don't," etc. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 73 
 
74 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 151. (a) Plea, please, pleased, pleases, applause, apples, blaze, 
 blows, huddle, addle, idle, evil, fly, flow, flew, Ethel, clay, glee, eagle, 
 ogle, cloy, try, tree, utter, outer, attar, Troy, prows, prim, prime, trim, 
 drum, dream, tram, break, brick, broke, bridge, trick, trip, track, trap, 
 tribe, grim, group, groom, grime, crawl, grudge, grace, praised, braced, 
 priest, grazed, graced, plume, plum, bloom, bleak, black, clique, clock, 
 clack, flame, gleam, claim, blithe, fluid, flag, cling, frame, freely, thrill, 
 thresh. 
 
 (b) Table, dapple, dabble, tipple, pedal, employ, imply, maple, noble, 
 cable, couple, goggle, chapel, payable, humble, bible, regal, likely, lable, 
 liable, Biddle, bottle, battle, oracle, feeble, allowable, total, title, bevel, 
 labor, leper, lodger, ledger, rigor, vigor, vigorous, paper, pauper, piper, 
 pepper, dipper, deeper, dapper, degree, sugar, (Shay-Ger) shaker, 
 quicker, tinner, tenner, dinner, Tucker, editor, angry, hungry, Hum- 
 phrey, Schaffer, fisher, fishery, leisure, roomer, (Rav-Mer) rumor, armor, 
 minor, tenor, lover, lever. 
 
 (c) Penal, kennel, tunnel, channel, rural, spiral, floral, final, finally, 
 animal, enamel, camel, relic, relax, relapse, unlatch, unlock, unlike. 
 
 (d) Briber, bridger, Blakely, blackly, bluishly, freshly, freckle, 
 prickly, plural, flannel, broker, grammar, treasure, bribery, overdraw, 
 overflow; blacker, frugal, travel, agreeable. 
 
 (e) Word Signs. Comply, people, apply, belong, believe, feel, 
 tell, till, until, call, equal, equally, difficult, difficulty, proper, principle, 
 principal, practice, surprise, express, liberty, remember, member, num- 
 ber, brother, doctor, dear, during, danger, carry, care, accuracy, form, 
 from, over, every, very, favor, either, their, there, other, through, sure, 
 pleasure, measure, Mr. mere, remark, more, near, nor, manner, capable, 
 influential, probable, probability, only, annual, real, really, relate, re- 
 lated, rule. 
 
 (f ) By all, at all, each will, which will, much will, if all, for all, of 
 all, all will, or all, already all, but all, owe all, on all, ought all, should 
 all, who will \, by our, at our, which are, of our, all our, to our, or our, 
 already our, but our, owe our, on our, ought our, should our, who are ; 
 to ours, by ours, to ourselves, by ourselves ; it were, which were, who 
 were. 
 
 Books. Some one has said that a real love for study is given to the 
 few not to the many. Most people, however, have a love for books and 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 75 
 
 a desire for knowledge, but not a love of study. We all of us waste 
 much time on worthless books. They should be few and well chosen ; 
 the more select the more enjoyable. Consider what you have in the 
 smallest chosen library ; a company of the wise and witty of all ages and 
 all countries. " The fish decays first at the head," is a common saying 
 among those who live by the Sea of Azov. It is so with those who read 
 too much or too fast. How to read is a heavier task (than) many take it 
 to be. Books should be read slowly and with care, never hurriedly. We 
 should read only those books which will teach us to think for ourselves. 
 We should not allow the author to do all our thinking for us. The 
 trouble with most of us is that we do not stop to think. The power of 
 thinking will be of immense advantage to us in all our work through 
 life. Of course it is utterly wrong to read a book merely for the sake of 
 saying we have read it. The first step is to have an earnest desire to 
 know what lies in a book. Books are a guide in youth and a solace in 
 age. When we are weary of the living we may repair to them, for they 
 have no deceit, no design. They make us heirs of the life of past ages. 
 It was said a thousand years ago that " they are life's best business. He 
 who would rob me of my books would take away all the joy of my life, 
 nay, I will say all desire of living." They are messages from large souls 
 whom we have never seen, and who, perhaps, live thousands of miles 
 away. They are always ready to teach or to amuse us. They are the win- 
 dows, says Beecher, out of which the soul looks. They are the masters 
 who teach us without rods or ferules, and expose our weaknesses with- 
 out shaming us. They never laugh at our mistakes. They teach us how 
 to live and how to die. Some talk of past times ; others of the present ; 
 and others of the life to come. For all these services they ask nothing 
 but a small corner where they may repose in peace. 
 
 LESSON Xll. 
 SPECIAL VOCALIZATION. 
 
 152. To avoid long and inconvenient outlines a peculiar 
 scheme of vocalization is resorted to in order to indicate a dis- 
 tinct vowel coming between the 1 or r-hook and the stroke 
 to which it is attached. In most cases the word is sufficiently 
 legible without vocalization, but where it is desired to indicate 
 the vowel, it is done as follows ; 
 
76 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 153. The dot vowels are indicated by a small circle written 
 before the stroke if the vowel is long, and after the stroke if 
 the vowel is short ; thus, 
 
 dark feel fill term 
 
 154. When a dash vowel occurs between the stem and 
 the hook, it is indicated by striking the dash through the 
 stroke ; thus, 
 
 3* V-H _ c ij^ 
 
 V 
 false course fool Inform 
 
 155. When a diphthong intervenes, it may be written 
 through or at the end of the stroke ; as, 
 
 cure require trefoil qualify 
 
 REMARKS ON SPECIAL VOCALIZATION. 
 156. The student must not use this principle indiscrimi- 
 nately. It applies to comparatively few words, the general rule 
 being to use the stroke for L or R when a vowel intervenes 
 between it and the preceding consonant, especially in small 
 words; as in 
 
 bell toil chill mail vail mar veer 
 
 (a) The stroke must be used when L or R is the last con- 
 sonant in a word and immediately preceded and followed by 
 vowels. Also when two vowels intervene between L or R and 
 a preceding consonant; as in, 
 
 pillow borrow tallow tower jewel vial 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 77 
 
 (b) It may be stated as a principle of wide though not 
 universal application that when the accent falls upon a vowel 
 occurring between the sound of a consonant and the sound of 
 / or r, the sound of the latter should be represented by a 
 stroke rather than a hook, unless the resulting outline would 
 be inconveniently long or difficult ; as, 
 
 bulk barrack America 
 
 CIRCLES AND HOOKS COMBINED. 
 
 157. When the sound of s immediately precedes an 
 1-hook sign, it is indicated by writing the circle distinctly 
 within the hook. When thus written within an 1-hook it 
 presents the appearance of an ellipse or slightly flattened cip 
 cle. The student need not endeavor to make it round. 
 
 -P 
 
 I ____ _. /? 
 
 sable settle saddle satchel civil classical 
 
 158. The Names of these triple consonants thus formed 
 are Iss-Pel, Iss-Bel, etc. As a group they are called the Iss- 
 Pel series. 
 
 NOTE. The loops for si and str and the large circle ses are never 
 prefixed to an 1-hook sign, as it is plainly impracticable. 
 
 159. The circle is prefixed to an r-hook stem by turning 
 the hook into a small circle. In other words, if the circle is 
 made on the r-hook side of a straight stem, it implies the 
 presence of the r-hook; thus, 
 
 spray stream scream seeker 
 
78 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 N 
 
 1 60. If preceded by no other stroke, Stey may be pre- 
 fixed to the straight r-hook stems by writing the loop on the 
 left or r-hook side ; thus, 
 
 \ 
 
 2a .-.-^___ 
 
 stupor stutter stitcher stagger 
 
 va) Many stenographers prefer to use two stems for the 
 
 above class of words, writing Stee-Per for stupor instead of 
 
 Steyper. 
 
 (b) In a few instances the large circle is prefixed to an 
 
 r-hook stem ; as, 
 
 1 
 
 sister disaster 
 
 1 6 1 . When the Sper stems are preceded by strokes in the 
 same direction, it is only necessary to turn the circle on the 
 left or under side to indicate the addition of the r-hook ; 
 thus, 
 
 prosper destroy execrable 
 
 162. When Iss-Ker or Iss-Ger is preceded by any 
 other straight stroke the circle is turned on the right side of 
 the preceding stroke, and the Kay or Gay continued from the 
 point where the circle is completed. This is a peculiar joining, 
 but as there is no other way to indicate the r-hook in this 
 connection, it must be made use of for this purpose ; as in 
 
 U- t- 
 
 subscribe descry disagree 
 
 (a) This plan is also used for the expression of Sper, fol- 
 lowing j, as in / Jasper. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND, 79 
 
 (b) The expression of r may safely be omitted from this 
 class of words, thus securing an easier outline ; as, 
 
 subscribe prescribe disgrace 
 
 163. In all other cases when Iss preceding an r-hook 
 sign occurs in the middle of a word, it must be written dis- 
 tinctly within the hook ; as in 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 extra lisper pastry gastric 
 
 164. The iss circle is not prefixed to any of the curved 
 r-hook combinations except Ner when used initially ; thus, 
 
 saner summer safer 
 
 (a) When these combinations are preceded by other 
 strokes, it is allowable to write the circle within the hook ; as, 
 
 hemisphere passover 
 
 165. T may be omitted in such words as boastful, trust- 
 ful, as is further shown in Section 297. 
 
80 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 READING EXERCISE- 
 
 L. i b-^- 
 
 " - i_-- -- o--- 
 
 <V xG) > r <V 
 
 .7- -^^ - -^ - - ^K . - .1- \ 
 
 /7 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 81 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 166. (a) Dark, jar, sharp, park, charm, barber, marvel, cheerless, 
 appear, paralyze, pioneer, engineer, volume, prevail, car, cigar, Abagail, 
 feel, fill, fail, fell, aver, term, germ, fall, full, fool, follow, core, course' 
 miracle, church, require, cure, epicure, procure, perjury, cull, door, 
 chore, burst, courage, recourse, quality, qualify, trefoil, journal, colonel, 
 neuralgia, railroad, portray. 
 
 () Supple, supply, sapling, sable, settle, subtle, saddle, satchel, 
 cycle, sickle, sickly, civil, civilly, unsocial, peaceable, possible, display, 
 disable, plausibly, classically, gracefully, noticeable, physical, taxat'e, 
 tricycle, bicycle, phthisical, disclose, disclaim. 
 
 (c) Spray, supper, sober, saber, stray, straw, strew, suitor, beeker, 
 succor, stream, stroke, strike, struck, cedar, cider, sadder, sister, sup- 
 press, cypress, supreme, sprawl, spring, spray, suburb, secrecy, strip, 
 strap, scribe, scrub, scratch, screech, subscribe, screw, prisoner, pois- 
 oner, dishonor, struggle, pastry, sooner, saner, signer, destroy, pros- 
 per, dissuader, distress, outstretch. 
 
 (d) The Ethics of Good Manners. It is a rule of good manners, 
 says Ralph Waldo Emerson, to avoid extremes. A lady loses as soon as 
 s!ie admires too easily and too much. The face and the person lose 
 power when they are on the stretch to express praise, or surprise, 01 
 pleasure. A person makes his inferiors his superiors by heat Why 
 must you, who are not a gossip, talk as a gossip, and tell eagerly what 
 the neighbors or the journals say. State what you think without apol- 
 ogy. When people come to see us we foolishly prattle lest we appear 
 churlish. Things said for the sake of talk are chalk eggs ; they produce 
 nothing. What you are will show through any and all your talk. A 
 lady once said to me : "I do not care so much for what they say as I do 
 for what makes them say it. " As to the table its law is quietness a 
 respect to the common soul of all the guests. Good manners are made 
 up of petty sacrifices. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 ENLARGED L AND R HOOKS. 
 
 167. The 1-hook may be enlarged to add r, as follows : 
 
82 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 abler tattler traveler Blair 
 
 1 68. The r-hook may be enlarged to add /; thus, 
 
 April mackerel liberal corporal 
 
 169. The added letter is always read last. In other 
 words, when a vowel precedes one of these enlarged hook 
 stems, it is read first, as in the word April given above ; when 
 a vowel is placed after the stem, it is read immediately before 
 the added letter ; as, 
 
 clear trials clergy moral 
 
 (a) This principle cannot be applied to Mel, Nel and Rel, 
 as their hooks are already large. 
 
 170. The Name of the enlarged 1-hook is formed natur- 
 ally, as Pier, Bier, Tier, etc. The name of the enlarged r-hook 
 is Prel, Brel, Trel, etc. As a group they are called the Pier 
 and Prel series. 
 
 THE BACKWARD "!N" HOOK. 
 
 171. The syllable in, en or un at the beginning of an 
 iss-Per sign and occasionally preceding an iss-Pel sign is 
 expressed by a small backward hook ; thus, 
 
 ensober insecure unstring unsettle 
 
 172. This hook may also be used at the beginning or 
 end of words to prevent the circle coming on the convex or 
 outside of Kn ; thus, 
 
 unseemly unceremonious uuswayable Thompson mason arsenal 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 88 
 
 v 
 
 *i 
 
 |. 
 
 c+o_ IC^.. 
 
 V ? 
 
 /~\ *~\ . \ 
 
 ZZ. _ -1- 
 
 i_f 
 
 6 IN-HOOK.. 
 
 ...in 
 
 LJL.:!b^^ 
 
 
 8 SENTENCE 
 
 _ 
 
 M -\ 
 
 .-..5_ A ...>,.^.^ 
 
 ^ /. 
 
 t 
 
 fc W- 
 
84 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 173. (a) Trial, control, trail, abler, Blair, teller, settler, sabler, sad- 
 dler, tattler, babbler, bibler, clear, color, choler, collar, scholar, liberal, 
 illiberal, Charles, jocular, juggler, straggler, quibbler, jumbler, implore, 
 deplore, shiugler, scrambler, fuller, valor, April, pastoral, corporal, 
 flourish, mackerel, pickerel, pectoral, cobbler, nibbler, stickler, toler- 
 able, immoral. 
 
 (b) Unstriug, unstrung, unsprung, itisuppressible, inseparable, 
 insuperable, unscrew, unsecure, unscrupulous, inscribe, unceremonious, 
 unsurmised, unseemly, unsolicitous, unsalable, insular, insoluble, unset- 
 tle, unsaddle, uncivil, Jamieson, eleemosynary, Thompson, arsenic, 
 masonic, Williamson, Wilson. 
 
 (c) At least one million young people of this country who are 
 going to the common schools are at this hour seeking or wishing for 
 the advantages of the higher schools. Many of them, says Horace 
 Greeley, write me on the subject, asking me to show them the way 
 whereby they may accomplish their purpose. Some desire to pursue a 
 college course, and are willing to go in debt for a thousand dollars or 
 more wherewith to pay their way. I cannot but think that this is a mis- 
 take. True, they may win, but the odds are not in their favor. One 
 does not feel like working with energy while paying for a dead horse. 
 But what shall he do ? In the first place he must choose that pursuit 
 for which he has the most liking, and master all its processes. If he 
 has a taste for commercial life he should try that, first possessing him- 
 self of some knowledge of bookkeeping. If he likes farming he should 
 go at that, giving all his spare hours to its (careful) study. Successful 
 farming requires as (careful) study as any other business. In any pursuit 
 he should always have access to good books. They may be had iu 
 nearly every neighborhood in the United States. If he is unable to 
 borrow them from the village preacher or doctor or lawyer, he will have 
 to purchase a few choice works, but a few dollars per year will be an 
 ample outlay. A course of reading for the sake of knowledge will com- 
 mence with the sciences chemistry, geology, etc. and should engross 
 the spare hours of a full year at least. Read slowly and (carefully) from 
 the title page to the close. When the author is not clear, or you fail to 
 follow him, stop and give an hour to a page, or until you are sure of the 
 author's sense. Geography will require far less time. When these 
 sciences are fully rnaster(ed) you will see the knowledge thus won will 
 be a key to unlock quickly and easily the treasures of the other sciences. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 85 
 
 The studious youth will easily select other works. It is a difficult task 
 to make out a list of books suitable for young people, with all their 
 varying tastes and capacities, but one good book will always lead to 
 another. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 TERMINAL HOOKS. 
 
 1 74. The primary consonants are still further modified 
 bv the addition of small terminal hooks to indicate a following 
 f, v or n. These hooks may be used to advantage in the 
 middle of words as well as at the end. 
 
 175. The F or V-Hook. A small final hook on the 1-hook 
 side of straight stems indicates an added f or v . The follow- 
 ing will illustrate all the f-hook stems and their names : 
 
 Pef Bef TefDefChef Jef Kef Gef Ref Hef 
 
 (a) This hook is attached only to the straight stems. 
 
 176. When the sound of s immediately follows forv 
 and is represented by the circle, it must be written distinctly 
 within the hook ; as, 
 
 puffs heaves arrives staves drives 
 
 (a) It is obvious that the loops Stey and Ster and tfye 
 large circle cannot be written with or joined to the f-hook. 
 
 NOTE. No embarrassment will result from the employment of this 
 'hook for both f and v, as the connected sense will determine whether 
 for v is meant. Some teachers advise the shading of the hook to dis- 
 tinguish f from v, but this is wholly unneccessary in actual practice. 
 This hook is also used by some writers on the curved stems by making 
 it long and narrow, as in writing the word thief t but the occasion for its 
 use is very rare. 
 
80 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 THE N-HooK. 
 
 177. A small final hook on the r-hook side of any straight 
 stroke, or on the concave side of a curved stroke, indicates an 
 added n. All stems take the n-hook without exception. The 
 following illustrations will show the n-hook stems and their 
 names : 
 
 _!_-* JL J ^ J/~ --r=>-..'__^._. 
 
 Pen Ben Ten Den Chen Jen Ken Gen Fen Ven 
 
 (i (j si_ V- _! $/. (^- _ s) s~~^.... ^ * 
 
 Then Then Esen Zen Shen Zhen Len Arn Men Nen 
 
 Ingn Wayn Yayn Hayn Ren 
 
 178. The f and n-hooks are read after the strokes to 
 which they are attached, or any vowel written beside the 
 stroke ; as, 
 
 c^ 1 V 
 
 brief clean drive refrain cliff finish 
 
 179 The circles and loops are written on the n-hook side 
 of straight stems to indicate the addition of ns, nst, nstr, and 
 nses; as, 
 
 chains turns chanced glanced chances glances 
 
 1 80. Iss or ses combined with the n-hook on straight 
 strokes must be considered as final. The addition of another 
 stem nullifies the n-hook. 
 
 _______________ J ....... _ ______________ I.. ....... _JL ______ i _________ ^ _____ 
 
 Dens Dees-Ter Tens Tees-Kay Pens<is Peeses-Ray 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 87 
 
 181. When Iss follows an n-hook attached to curves, it 
 must be written distinctly within the hook ; as, 
 
 fines mines lines swoons 
 
 182. The Iss circle is written inside the n-hook on curves 
 principally to form the plural. When the word ends with 
 " nee" the stroke En with the circle attached should be used, 
 as the plurals of such words require the En stroke. Whether 
 to use the En stroke or the n-hook after a curved consonant 
 may be determined as follows : When the syllable has the 
 sound of z, as in fans, use the n-hook ; when the sound of s 
 occurs after a curved consonant, as lance, use the stem Ens. 
 In the following and similar words the hook is used : vines, 
 means, Athens, Aarons, nuns, urns, lines. The following 
 words are written with Ens : fence, offence, affiance, alliance, 
 convince, conveyance, assurance, allowance, evince, denounce, 
 lance, renounce, romance, penance, pronounce. 
 
 183. When/, v or n is the last consonant in a word, 
 and followed by a final vowel, the stroke must be used ; as in 
 
 ----------- -% ....... U ....... -U -L ..... k- 
 
 bravo deny avenue honey defy review 
 
 184. When two vowels precede a final n, the stroke 
 must be used ; as, \ v x^ 
 
 Zion lion ruin 
 
 185. Fen, Ven. When these phonographic syllables 
 are preceded by any other straight stroke than Ray, it is pre- 
 ferable to express them by the f-hook and the stroke En ; as in 
 
 W-^ \v .; 
 
 divine profane juvenile spavin 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 1 86. Ner. This syllable is properly expressed by the 
 stem Ner, except in derivatives, when the outline usually con- 
 forms to that of the primitive ; thus, 
 
 spin spinner mine miner fine finer 
 
 187. Per, Ver. These terminations occurring after 
 straight strokes, ar? best expressed by the f-hook and Ray ; as, 
 
 paver 
 
 river 
 
 discover 
 
 driver 
 
 behavior 
 
 (Seventh List.) 
 
 FINAL, HOOK WORD SIGNS. 
 
 1 88. The student must make himself thoroughly familiar 
 with each of the following word signs : 
 
 c 
 
 (, I have 
 
 who have 
 
 differeut-ence 
 
 r 
 
 \ 
 
 ~ 
 ) -y 
 
 perfect 
 proof 
 
 approve 
 
 contrive 
 
 truthful -ly 
 attractive 
 
 often 
 
 even-ing 
 
 within 
 then 
 than 
 
 alone, learn 
 
 men 
 man 
 
 human 
 
 opinion 
 none 
 
 no one 
 
 .can, question 
 
 again 
 
 gaye 
 
 general-ly 
 imagine 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 89 
 
 
 ?. \ ^^^ 
 
 ..... V<r~r- ........ r """ ...... 
 
 8 \ \ J- , I, ^/ / / I 
 
 ..... /.did: ^rsfor- 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 W 1U 
 
 j/..v..,:>_ <ciS..^.iAr"!::j 
 
 . h". ..V-T. n^.^VJ.^.\/?/...JB. o_T?_.x . 
 
 v/v^^- 
 
 ..j...r-.^i- v\ ^ 
 
 n 
 
WORD SIGNS 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 91 
 
 .......... \ ..... LJi_A_!\L.A ...... L_l ..... -.1. .</.. Y ..... 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 189. (a) Tiff, deaf, chaff, chief, rough, hoof, calf, puff, beef, bluff, 
 belief, brief, wharf, staff, serf, surf, skiff, scarf; Dave, achieve, concave, 
 arrive, hive, prove, believe, brave, contrive, drive, relieve, cleave, crave. 
 grave, strive, strove, stove. 
 
 (b) Contrives, dives, drives, achieves, coughs, craves, cleaves, raves, 
 roofs, paves, braves, bluffs. 
 
 (c) Tan, town, tune, contain, atone, done, dine, din, dawn, Eden, chain, 
 chin, June, gin, join, run, Rhine, rain, Hayne, hone, keen, cone, coin, 
 gone, gain, gun, open, pin, happen, pain, bane, bin, bone, boon, serene, 
 scan, skein, stone, stun, satin, sudden, Soudan, spine, Spain, spoon, span, 
 fan, fine, even, vine, van, thin, thine, main, mean, mine, noon, nun, nine, 
 union, alone, align, lean, lone, line, assign, ozone, ocean, shun, shine, 
 ashen, commission, earn, urn, iron, swoon, soften, seven, saloon, slain, 
 seamen, salmon, concern, session. 
 
 (d) Complain, spleen, plan, Elaine, blown, clan, glen, flown, Akron, 
 crown, grain, grin, train, strain, drawn, drain, drown, prone, sprain, 
 brown, brain, weapon, worn, sworn, wagon, weaken, widen, woolen, 
 women. 
 
 (e) Contains, tunes, instance, dines, drains, chance, chins, joins, rinse, 
 runs, hones, canes, clans, guns, glance, opens, prance, bones, brains ; 
 confines, vines, lines, means, nuns, assigns ; tenses, condenses, 
 chances, rinses, cleanses, glances, pounces, bounces ; instanced, danced, 
 chanced, cleansed, glanced, rinsed, dispensed, bounced, punsters. 
 
 (f ) Cover, giver, toughen, revile, heaver, advance, defence, provoke, 
 defame, proffer, perfume, typhoid, David, arrival, divinity, profanity, 
 equivoke, engraver, telephone, Delevan, province, grievance, preferable, 
 contrivance, discover, traffic. 
 
 (g) Currency, occupancy, stanza, paganish, organic, economy, frenzy, 
 brownish, bunch, planet, drainage, laconic, coiner, Athenian, convener, 
 financier, cabinet, bounty, bonnet, vainly, finely, panic, complainer, 
 
92 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 retainer, detonate, Dante, French, burner, diurnal, plain-dealer, extenu- 
 ate, retrench, branch, bunch, estrange, monopoly, disseminate, eliminate, 
 seamanship, pusillanimous. 
 
 (h) Kitchen, cabin, regain, pagan, liken, token, talon, detain, redden, 
 demean, eleven, renown, machine, maiden, famine, awaken, shaken, 
 ravine, rapine, enjoin, remain, Michigan, restrain, aspen, obtain, born, 
 train, recline, violin, disclaim, foreign, margin, pardon, environ, swollen, 
 sunshine, sermon, spoken, Solomon, unclean, chairman, outline, decline, 
 abstain, muslin, silken, discern, Norman, incline. 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 TERMINAL HOOKS FOR SHUN AND TIVE. 
 
 190. The Shun Hook. The phonetic syllable "shun," 
 which in common orthography is represented by the various 
 terminations tion (emotion), sion (effusion), Han (Egyptian), 
 dan (Grecian), is expressed by a large hook on the circle 
 side of straight stems, and the concave side of curved stems; 
 thus, 
 
 addition passion Egyptian Grecian 
 
 191 . The Name of this hook is Shun. 
 
 (a) The Shun hook is never used in words of one syllable, 
 nor when it is preceded by an initial vowel, nor when Iss 
 ONLY precedes it ; as in 
 
 _.&/>_ ............ c-A ..... . ..... .} ............. ^.....tttrt-.-.u'-. ___ 
 
 shun shone ashen session 
 
 (b) When Shun is preceded by two vowels, the stroke Ish 
 with the n-hook is used for its expression ; this is to distin- 
 guish between such words as, 
 
 -L,, ............. U ..... , .......... L,.- -U- 
 
 continuation contention ' attenuation attention 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 93 
 
 (c) The Shun hook should not be used in derivatives of 
 words ending in sh ; as, 
 
 admonition diminution 
 
 192. The Tive Hook. The syllable live occurring after 
 straight strokes is represented by a large hook on the n-hook 
 side ; as, 
 
 ' 
 
 active sedative receptive speculative 
 
 193. When the syllable live follows a curved stem, it is 
 best represented by the stroke Tee with the f-hook ; as, 
 
 native motive votive 
 
 194. The Name of this hook is Tive. 
 
 195. Shun and Tive may be used in the middle of 
 
 words ; as, 
 
 activity auctioneer comparatively visionary 
 
 196. Iss and Stey may be added to Shun and Tive hooks 
 by writing the circle or loop distinctly within the hook ; as, 
 
 \- 
 
 missions lotions captives prohibitionist 
 
94 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 
 '' -' _ ^ _ }_ _^ 
 
 v^"" 
 
 b-r-^ r/?- 
 
 < } 
 * 
 
 16 ^ 
 
 ^* 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 95 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 X 97- ( a ) Nation, notion, mission, motion, emotion, lotion, oration, 
 potion, passion, option, compassion, tuition, commutation, edition, 
 addition, condition, sedition, action, auction, caution, connection, con- 
 cussion, cushion, ration, Russian, station, section, version, aversion, 
 collision, completion, oppression, creation, abrasion. 
 
 (b) Adoption, petition, optician, education, occupation, caption, 
 quotation, fiction, affection, affliction, location, election, eruption, inac- 
 tion, attraction, illustration, mansion, friction, deception, veneration, 
 discussion, co-operation, stationary, optional, auctioneer, occasional, 
 educational, visionary. 
 
 (c) Ovations, confessions, allusions, notions, suppressions, revis- 
 ions, prohibitionist, elocutionist, abolitionist. 
 
 (d) Ocean, commission, session, ashen, extenuation. 
 
 THE POWER OF APPLICATION AND ATTENTION. 
 
 (e) It was said of Mary Lyon that she surpassed all women of her 
 time not in superior mental faculties, but in her power to bring all her 
 powers to work together. The books tell us of Dr. Johnson, whose 
 mental concentration while reading was shown by the contortions of his 
 face, and that his power of acquiring knowledge was proportioned to 
 his power of attention. Dr. Livingston learned to study among the 
 clang of looms and the noise of machinery. He had such a power of 
 concentration that he could keep his attention on any subject he chose 
 while the yells of savages and the roar of lions were in his ears, these 
 are, it is true, extreme cases, but we may all increase our power of atten- 
 tion by a little planning and controlling. If we try to think of one 
 subject five minutes, we perceive ourselves running off on to a dozen 
 that we do not wish to think of. The boy in his study of geography 
 mingles cities and rivers with base balls and hoops in a grotesque and 
 comical confusion, as would appear if his inner consciousness could be 
 laid open to view. The girl as she pores over her grammar mingles 
 nouns and verbs with dresses and bonnets. How many of us can keep 
 our thoughts on one subject for a half hour. We waste half our time 
 and strength in bringing our rambling thoughts back to their work. Is 
 there a way to break ourselves of this useless roaming of the mind ? Is 
 it possible for any person with an average strength of will to become 
 master of his own reasoning powers. Let him sit down to some study 
 that requires a full play of the powers of abstraction and attention. The 
 
96 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 first time he finds himself roving he should say to his erratic mind, 
 " Back to your place." He should bring his eyes and ears into subjec- 
 tion to this one purpose of controlling his mind. The hasty reading of 
 too many works of imagination is almost sure to weaken our power of 
 fixing the attention, and the same may be said of the careless reading of 
 weighty authors. The power of earnest thought and severe study is 
 soon lost without unceasing drill. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 THE ESHUN HOOK. 
 
 198. The phonetic syllable "shun" occurring after the 
 sound of s is expressed by continuing the circle into a small 
 hook on the opposite side of the stroke ; thus, 
 
 recision incision condensation compensation 
 
 199. The Name of this device is the Eshun hook. 
 
 200. The Eshun hook is vocalized by writing first place 
 vowels before the hook, and second-place vowels after the 
 hook. This makes sufficient distinction, as third-place vowels 
 never occur before the Eshon hook. 
 
 (a) It will be noted that if the circle, as in such words as 
 condensation and compensation given above, is turned on the 
 n side, the sound of n is added, but the position for the vowels 
 remains the same. 
 
 20 1. To an f-hook the syllable shun may be added by 
 repeating the hook ; thus, 
 
 _ !V C 
 
 U7i - W 
 
 devotion diffusion profusion revision 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 97 
 
 (a) This expedient, however, is rarely used, as it is 
 
 generally preferable to use the stroke Kf or Vee with the 
 large hook ; thus, 
 
 devotion diffusion profusion revision 
 
 202. This repetition of the hook for shun may be vocal- 
 ized only by placing the vowel after the hook as in the 
 examples given on the opposite page. 
 
 203. The derivatives may be written thus : 
 
 devotional professional conversational transitional 
 
 204. The circle Iss may be added also to the Eshun hook ; 
 as, 
 
 accusations physicians possessions 
 
 (Eighth List) 
 
 THK ESHUN HOOK WORD SIGNS. 
 
 205. The following word signs must now be learned: 
 
 \ opposition o 
 JL..V...y.. ^Session "> specification 
 
 _e acquisition i 
 
 accession -.Nf> investigation 
 
 _ -t . . ----- accusation 
 
 / / justification \ \ 
 
 - - ------ generalization ------- ^ ------ objection, objective 
 
 --------- -N^ -------- civilization ------ \t.-.o ------ subjection, subjective 
 
 _ /\ /\ representation 
 
 realization --- X_V>_/1O_ representative 
 
98 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 r7..X-*--V. < . 
 
 *....IUk.|...:WX 
 
 \ 
 
 l^j^/Xi.o^.i/ll. I -C | J-...f..(/.. 
 :\:.J...r-V:):\, ... c ..-z..(.r>./.7|.:^.. 
 
 / ' SJ ^^v ' '' ' 
 
 x^,.^... .A.,^...^..Vl., 
 
 f ^ J? 0-^/-"\ ^ 
 
 >. '. _?-_<' \.. \Xl.. /..../. . - _.-Hi-<. 
 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 99 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 206. (a) Apposition, supposition, decision, transition, procession, 
 precision, persuasion, compensation, condensation, causation, excision, 
 accession, accusation, recision, succession, physician, incision, authoriza 
 tion, conversation, associations, decisions, depositions, relaxation, inde- 
 cision, moralization, polarization, crystallization, dispensation, transi- 
 tional, conversational. 
 
 (b) Word Signs. Opposition, position, possession, acquisition, 
 accession, accusation, generalization, justification, civilization, realiza- 
 tion, specification, objection, objective, subjective, representation, rep 
 resentative. 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 THE SHADED EM. 
 
 207. The stem Km may be shaded to indicate the addition 
 of p or b; thus, 
 
 hemp stamp impugn embarrass ambition 
 
 208. The shaded Em is called Emp when it represents mp, 
 and Emb, when it represents mb. It never takes an initial 
 hook, and hence, it cannot be mistaken for Mer. It may take 
 a final hook as illustrated above. 
 
 209. The mp or mb represented by this stem cannot be 
 separated by a vowel. A vowel placed beside it must be read 
 before or after the two consonants according as it is written 
 before or after the stem. 
 
 210. P may be omitted when it occurs before the sound 
 of /, sh or k, as this class of words is legible without the ex- 
 pression of p. (See line 7 of the Reading Exercise.) 
 
 211. The use of Emp secures a distinction between cer- 
 tain words which otherwise would have the same outline, as 
 
100 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 embarrass (Emb-Rays) and embrace (Em-Bers); imply (Em-Pel) 
 and impale 
 
 (Ninth List.) 
 
 IMP WORD SIGNS. 
 
 212. Let the student improvise sentences containing the 
 following and preceding word signs, for practice : 
 
 important improvement impossible simple 
 
 somebody example may have been 
 
 213. Derivatives from the above list are formed in the 
 usual way. Simpler may be written, Iss-Emp-Ray, and 
 simplest Iss-Emp-Stey. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 ^A.U---U;.- U -A, ^--^ 
 
 101 
 
 6 
 
 V* 
 
 7 ^ 
 
 9 f 
 t.t 
 
 n 
 
 ' 
 
 /7 
 
 . r 
 
 - v 
 x, 
 
 .v. 
 
102 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 214. (a) Imp, stamp, hump, pump, pomp, pompous, bump, 
 dump, damp, champ, jump, camp, scamp, vamp, thump, shampoo, limp, 
 lamp, lump, romp, ramp, swamp, empire, umpire, impost, imposed, 
 impish , clamp, cramp, plump, primp, trump, tramp, shrimp, sympathy, 
 glimpse, wampum, stampede, slump, campaign, imperial (Emp-Rel), 
 impetus, impious, imposition, imposing, dampen, lampoon. 
 
 (b) Imbue, emboss, embossed, Jumbo, gumbo, ambush, limbo, ambi- 
 tious, ambulance, ambuscade, embellish, embezzle, embalm, embody > 
 embank, humbug. 
 
 (c) Fee is omitted in the following words acccording to section 210. 
 Assumption, exemption, co-emption, pre-emption, presumption, Hamp- 
 ton, Hampshire, symptom, empty, temptation, Simpson, Sampson, 
 gumption. 
 
 (d) Word Signs. Important, improvement, impossible, simple, 
 simplicity, rimpler, simplest, somebody, example, may have been. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 215. [Lengthening any curved stroke (except Ing and 
 Emp) adds the syllable ter, der or ther ; as, 
 
 center feeder smoother later 
 
 2 1 6. Lengthening Ing adds the sound of ker or ger ; 
 thus, 
 
 anchor drinker winker 
 
 217. Lengthening Emp or Emb adds er ; thus, 
 
 timber jumper ember 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 103 
 
 2 1 8. Vocalization. Vowels are written by the side of 
 lengthened characters precisely the same as if they were single 
 lengths, and they are read before the added syllable ter, der 
 ther or er, as will be seen by the preceding examples. 
 
 219. The added syllable is read after all vowels, but 
 before a final hook, circle or loop ; as, 
 
 modern enters lantern 
 
 2 20. The lengthening principle must not be used when 
 the word ends with a final vowel, but an r-hook sign must be 
 used instead ; as, 
 
 angry entry sundries watery leathery 
 
 221. Straight stems, when preceded by any other stroke, 
 may be lengthened to add ter; thus, 
 
 liberator conductor quarter lubricator 
 
 222. The Names of the lengthened strokes are formed 
 by adding ter, der, ther or er to the name of the single stem, 
 as Peether, Beether, Efter, L,ayter, Ember, Inger, etc. 
 
 223. Shelter, unlike Shel, may be written standing alone 
 for the words shelter and shoulder. 
 
 224. Special Vocalization. A vowel or diphthong occur- 
 ring in the added syllable may be expressed by writing it 
 through the stem, or by the special use of the small circle 
 explained in Section 153. 
 
 entire adventure 
 
104 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 225. Any word sign or outline ending without a hook or 
 circle may be lengthened to add the word there, their or they 
 
 are; as, 
 
 by their may there will there value their back there 
 
 (Tenth List.) 
 
 DOUBLE LENGTH WORD SIGNS. 
 
 226. Practice the following word signs until they are 
 thoroughly learned : 
 
 neither 
 entire 
 
 i 
 another 
 
 matter 
 
 rather further 
 
 farther 
 
 whether 
 
 longer 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 105 
 
 77. 
 
106 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 227. (a) Fighter, fetter, fatter, fitter, voter, invader, theatre, aster, 
 Esther, caster, shouter, shatter, shutter ; fodder, feeder, gender, engender, 
 tender, ladder, Leider, candor, gander, render, squander, moulder ; father, 
 feather, mother, Mather, panther, neither, loiter, elder, Luther, alder, 
 Arthur, rather, water, highwater, diameter, cylinder, surrender, insu- 
 lator, legislator, northerly, stockholder, disorder, fender, lantern, 
 smoother, dissenter, yonder, sunder, central, eccentric, swelter. 
 
 (b) Simper, ember, chamber, Sumpter, timber, bumper, tamper, 
 dumper, stamper, romper, primper, plumper, limber, lumber, pumper, 
 hamper, scamper, slumber, somber, Chamberlain. 
 
 (c) Injector, alligator, quarter, educator, lubricator, supporter (Spee- 
 Rayter), elector, inspector, Jupiter, proprietor, liberator, typewriter. 
 
 (d) Word Signs. Another, entire, farther, longer, matter, rather, 
 whether, up there, hope their, by their, be there, to be there, subject 
 their, do their, had, there, come there, if there, for there, ever there, 
 have their, however there, think their, thank their, though their, see 
 their, so there, use their, was there, wish their, shall there, will there, 
 hear their, may there, in there, know their, why their, away there, sing 
 their, fill their, value their, over there, wherever there, whenever there, 
 through their, when they are, think there is, when there is, ask their 
 right there. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 228. We now come to the last general principle of con- 
 traction used in shorthand, and it is a most interesting and 
 important one. The letters / and d recur with such fre- 
 quency as to require some other and briefer expedient for their 
 expression than the stroke. Of the stenographic material yet 
 invented there still remains the device of making stems half 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 107 
 
 their ordinary length. This expedient is utilized for the pur- 
 pose of expressing t or d, and it may be used at the begin- 
 ning, middle, or end of words, as illustrated below. By this 
 means short and easy outlines are afforded for a vast number of 
 words, which otherwise would be written with long and 
 ungainly outlines. 
 
 229. Halving any stem with or without an initial or final 
 hook, adds / or d; thus, 
 
 -* * v vrrr "VC Cr... 
 
 fate plate plant aptly remotely left 
 
 230. The context must be largely depended upon in 
 determining whether t or whether d is added. This is not dim- 
 cult, however, as the intelligent pupil will readily understand 
 that, " This is a colt day," is intended for " This is a cold day." 
 
 231. With the four liquids, /, m, n, and r a distinction 
 may be made by shading the halved characters to add d and 
 writing them light to add /. As Way, Yay, Ing and Emp 
 without a hook are never halved, there will be no conflict with 
 these stems ; thus, 
 
 o j-' *~* ^ f~* 
 -->- 3 "** .- 
 
 art hard might made night need light lied 
 
 (a) The shortened characters shaded to add d, take 
 neither initial nor final hooks, hence we have derived from the 
 stems Mer, Ner, Way, Yay, Ing and Emp the following char- 
 acters : 
 
 e^. . *^ ~"b r, -2. .. ... . .^ _ 
 
 Mert Nert Waynd Yeld Ingnd Empend 
 
 (b) The foregoing do not conflict with the followin char 
 icters which are made light to express t or d: 
 
 ,._ <^ ^ ~i. . . .. (7 ,O>. ....... /o 
 
 Wemt-d Went-d Arnt-d Lent-d Nent-d Ment-d 
 
108 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 232. Half lengths are read precisely the same as full 
 lengths with respect to vowels and hooks ; the / or d denoted 
 by halving is read after final hooks, but before a final circle or 
 loop ; as, 
 
 \ t j- 
 
 bright contrived contents cautioned 
 
 233. The Names of the half lengths are formed by add- 
 ing the syllables et or ed to the sound of the full length, or by 
 adding / or d to the name of the full length. The names of 
 the shortened characters should be thoroughly learned. No 
 difficulty will be experienced in this direction if the student 
 associates the name of the full length with t or d. Thus, 
 the half length of Tee is Tet, of Dee is Det, of Es is Est, of 
 Pel is Pelt or Plet, of Spel is Splet, of Blen is Blent or Blend. 
 In the naming of consonant outlines a single syllable indicates 
 a single stem, and each and every syllable indicates a separate 
 and distinct stem whether hooked or plain, half or full sized. 
 Thus, Grent is the name of the outline for grant ; while the 
 two syllables Ger-Net is the name which correctly represents 
 the word garnet ; and the three syllables Ger- En-Tee is the 
 name of the outline for guarantee. 
 
 234. If the context is not a sufficient distinction to deter- 
 mine whether t or d is added, as might happen in rare 
 instances, absolute accuracy may be secured by writing a long- 
 hand t or d as the case requires under the halved character. 
 Thus, pate may be distinguished from paid by writing a long- 
 hand t under Pet for the former word and d under Pet for the 
 latter word. It is no discredit to a stenographer to see an 
 occasional longhand t or d scattered through his notes for 
 this purpose. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 109 
 
 SOME USES OF THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 235. The termination n/ preceded by Kay, Gay, Ef, Vee 
 or Lay should be expressed by Ret instead of Ard in order to 
 secure a more distinct junction, and thus render the two stems 
 perfectly legible. 
 
 :;-^ ____ ^ ....... C ........ ;. : jy ........ ^ 
 
 card geared fired veered lard 
 
 236. The ed of the past tense of regular verbs should, 
 when the present tense is represented by a full length, be 
 expressed by halving ; thus, 
 
 ......... , .......... <-. ........ Z ......... v- ......... j ..... 
 
 valued cared cheered provoked cited 
 
 237. It is often advantageous to disjoin the stroke Dee to 
 express this syllable, especially following perpendicular strokes 
 and to form the past tense of certain word signs ; as, 
 
 -- T I ......... \ ........ -i .......... 'i .......... V 
 
 treated dreaded astonished established subjected 
 
 It is, however, only occasionally necessary to make any 
 distinction between the present and past tense and perfect par- 
 ticiple of regular verbs as the words are made sufficiently legi- 
 ble by using the present tense ; as, 
 
 regard-ed demand-ed controll-ed resent-ed 
 
 238. The terminations tary, tory are generally expressed 
 by the consonants Tee-Ray, the Tee being usually indicated 
 by halving the preceding stroke ; thus, 
 
 j/ _____________ !/ ........ ; ........... r_ ________ 
 
 territory directory secretary Inventory 
 
110 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 239. The terminations tel, del when preceded by the 
 straight stroke Kay or Gay, or any of the curved consonants, 
 are best expressed by the halving principle, followed by Lay 
 or El ; thus, 
 
 * T. ^ * f 
 
 ...... / 
 
 middle needle cattle fatal vital 
 
 (a) When the terminations tel and del are preceded by 
 any of the straight strokes except Kay and Gay, as in the fol- 
 lowing words, use Tee or Dee with an 1-hook : Bottle, battle, 
 beadle, puddle, paddle, total, title, chattel, etc. 
 
 240. It is allowable in a few instances, where it would be 
 inconvenient to use any other form, to strike Est upwards ; as, 
 
 visionist excursionist opinionist 
 
 * 
 
 (a) According to Sec. 196, the Stey loop may be written 
 
 within the Shun hook to add the syllable est in preference 
 to the form given above. 
 
 (b) Following an n-hook Est should be written down- 
 ward rather than upward, that it may not conflict with Isht, as 
 the following comparison will show : 
 
 finest finished vainest vanished 
 
 241. The terminations ten, den may be expressed by the 
 use of the halving principle and the stroke En, or by the stroke 
 Tee or Dee with the n-hook. The latter is preferable for the 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. Ill 
 
 expression of den, (as golden, gladden, Sheldon, Dry den, redden, 
 etc); the former for the expression o>iten; thus, 
 
 flatten fountain forgotten maintain 
 
 (a) After Pee, Bee, Tee, Dee and Em, ten and den must 
 be expressed by the strokes Tee and Dee with the n-hook in 
 accordance with Sec. 243 f. 
 
 242. When the sound of / or d occurs in such a connec- 
 tion that a stroke cannot be conveniently shortened and joined, 
 the following stroke may be disjoined in order to show the 
 half length; as, 
 
 critic emphatic escheat aptness 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO THE USE OF THE HALVING PRINCIPLE. 
 
 243. There are certain almost obvious restrictions in the 
 use of the halving principle, and in some cases t and d must 
 be expressed by the stroke, as in the following cases : 
 
 (a) When / or d is followed by a final vowel ; as, 
 
 pity window flighty entry 
 
 (b) When two concurrent vowels intervene between / or 
 d and a preceding consonant ; as, 
 
 poet quiet fluid duet 
 
112 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (c) When Ray is the only consonant preceding final / 
 or d; as, 
 
 right ride rate raid 
 
 (d) When a vowel intervenes between final / or d and a 
 consonant which is preceded by an initial vowel ; as in 
 
 n -i 
 
 unite allowed acute abed 
 
 (e) When a vowel precedes and follows I/ay, En or Ray 
 the halving principle must not be used to indicate a final d. 
 The object of this rule is to distinguish between such word as, 
 
 married marred solid sold renewed ruined 
 
 (f) A consonant stroke joined to another without a dis- 
 tinct angle should not be shortened ; as, 
 
 effect liked divide kicked donate 
 
 244. The following word signs are perhaps more difficult 
 than any heretofore presented. They are, however, invalua- 
 ble and the student must not shirk the labor of thoroughly 
 memorizing them : 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (Eleventh List.) 
 
 HALF LENGTH WORD SIGNS. 
 
 118 
 
 put, about 
 
 immediate-ly 
 ^ > made 
 
 _<rr . great 
 
 quite 
 
 c ^ somewhat 
 
 authority 
 
 nr. could 
 
 *- sometime 
 
 5 throughout 
 
 _ God 
 
 not 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^^ good 
 
 1 nature 
 
 in order 
 
 if it 
 
 
 
 alter 
 
 v^ naturally 
 
 J did not 
 ._..J j _.. do not 
 
 s, ^ future 
 
 ~Y ~~** - 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 had not 
 
 C thought 
 ( , think it 
 
 is not 
 
 / gentlemen 
 
 
 **--' as not, has not 
 
 ' ""- gentleman 
 
 ^ astonish-ed- 
 
 
 
 \ ment 
 /. , establish-ed- 
 
 ^ need 
 >-*_under, hund- 
 
 cannot, kind 
 account 
 
 meiit 
 
 red-th 
 
 
 ) is it 
 /A has it, as it 
 
 -* ^ want 
 
 r* 
 
 will not 
 
 
 ~^* went 
 
 
 used 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 f* 
 
 wished 
 
 Q told, till it 
 
 we will not 
 
 C little 
 
 
 
 J2^ let 
 
 \ toward 
 
 "^ are not 
 
 ~ world 
 
 called, equalled 
 
 t/* we are not 
 iS?. were not 
 
 f* concealed 
 
 valued 
 
 mind 
 
 r.. seldom 
 
 *~"~"VT "* 
 
 xrs_. t am n ot, may not 
 
 v read, Lord 
 
 
 
 -^ heard 
 
 _ particular-ly 
 
 we may not 
 
 hard 
 
 ^" opportunity 
 
 
 k/ word 
 
 <\ 
 .0, spirit 
 -^ separate-d 
 
 it will not 
 
 
 c _ according-ly 
 
 xj 
 
 might 
 
 s~\ 
 
 cared 
 
 we are not 
 
 met 
 
 
 
114 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 acknowledged afterward forward inconsistent indiscriminate-ion 
 
 Ji 7 y_. 
 
 indispensable intelligence intelligent intelligible interest 
 
 _1 
 
 onward practicable-ility transcript understand understood 
 
 245. Derivatives from the foregoing word signs are 
 expressed by joining or disjoining the necessary stroke, as Lay 
 disjoined for intelligently, inconsistently, indiscriminately. Spir- 
 itualism is written Sprets-Km ; Spiritualist, Spret-Stey ; 
 Spiritualistic, Sprets-Kay ; and in analogy with the foregoing 
 the student will easily learn to make the derivative forms of 
 other words. 
 
 246. Did not, do not and had not, when joined in phrases 
 beginning with / or you, may be distinguished when neces- 
 sary by inserting the vowel ; but usually they are written as 
 follows : 
 
 1 
 
 I did not 
 * 
 
 I do not 
 
 I had not 
 
 you did not you do not you had not 
 
 247. For the sake of unmistakable distinction between 
 can and cannot, which sometimes conflict in phrases, write can 
 unusually long and cannot unusually short. Especial atten- 
 tion and practice should be given these words. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 115 
 
 248. The young writer must not forget that a word sign 
 should be vocalized in obscure phrases, or when used in 
 unwonted connections ; as, 
 
 If this Kind be 'rue If this account be trae 
 
 249. Every writer will instinctively fall into methods of 
 his own of making nice distinctions whenever he thinks it 
 necessary, such for instance, as writing Net- El for natural, and 
 Net with disjoined Lay for naturally. While in all such cases 
 the grammatical construction with the context will determine 
 which is meant, yet nice differences may be made by varying 
 the outline to secure ease and prompt reading. 
 
 250. Skillful writers make use of the halving principle to 
 a very great extent to indicate the addition of it, had, would. 
 and other words explained hereafter: 
 
 I / ._, y. ,yi 
 
 It had they had she had which had such had 
 
 it would they would she would which would such would 
 
 251. An n-hook may be attached to a character thus 
 halved to add not ; as, 
 
 _ / / \|0 
 
 It had not they had not she had not which had not such had not 
 It would not they would not she would not which would not such would not 
 
 (a) When it is added by halving, the shortened character 
 is retained in its position. 
 
116 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 X" \' \ 1' f / v - <. 
 
 4 D \ _ . v . I-. ... .. 
 
 f J' J" J *J L" i- ^ r 3 ^ v 
 
 " Vi A I" 'T*- "/*- V " 
 
 X 
 
 s 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 *) ' 
 
 . 1-.. ..<.... .<* 
 
 117 
 
 1$. 
 SO 
 
 k. 
 
 T n- 
 
 . ,. 
 
 ^ r- ~ 
 
 .X: -- ft 
 
118 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 252. (a) Cut, caught, ached, cat, act, Kate, cute, coat, kite, quit, quote, 
 quoit, gate, goat, gout, get, got, cheat, chat, etched, jut, jot, jute, dot, 
 dote, doubt, debt, date, tight, taught, toot, taut, butt, boot, bight, 
 boat, bought, habit, bet, bait, beat, pat, pit, pate, apt, aped, pout, fight, 
 fate, aft, fought, feet, vat, vote, thought, iced, oust, shut, sheet, shout, 
 shot, shoot. 
 
 (b) Pad, paid, pod, pied, pawed, bid, bad, bode, Boyd, bouyed, 
 bud, bowed, tied, tweed, towed, deed, died, Dowd, dead, chide, chewed, 
 joyed, aged, edged, Jude, keyed, kid, code, cud, guyed, goad, feed, fed, 
 fade, fad, vied, void, viewed, thawed, thud, eased, oozed, shod, showed, 
 shade. 
 
 (c) Light, lied ; lit, lid ; oiled, hilt ; halt, hauled ; late, laid ; Holt, 
 hold ; hurt, herd ; heart, hard ; art, erred ; meat, mead ; mit, mid ; 
 tnate, made ; moat, mode ; neat, need ; naught, gnawed ; night, hind ; 
 mute, mewed ; note, node ; aunt, hand ; slit, slide ; salt, sold ; sort, 
 seared ; smote, seemed ; sent, send ; snout, sound ; knit, end. 
 
 (d) Sipped, sapped, supped, spot, spite, spout, sobbed, cited, stout, 
 stayed, sect, sacked, soft, sift, saved, seethed, soothed, seized, pits, pates, 
 pouts, beads, buds, Todd's, tides, chides, Jude's, codes, cuds, fights, fates, 
 fades, shouts, shades. 
 
 (e) Willed, walled, wailed, wilt, welt, wart, wired, warred, went, 
 wont, wind, wind, wild, wield. 
 
 (f ) Plot, plight, plied, played, plods, plowed, bleeds, blights, hob- 
 bled, huddled, addled, idled, cloyed, Clyde, cleat, glade, glad, gloat, glut, 
 fleet, flight, float, flood, field, failed, fooled, flute, athlete, prate, prod, 
 prude, bright, brought, bride, broad, board, bird, treat, trod, tread, 
 dread, dared, dried, drought, creed, court, curt, cart, greet, grit, great, 
 grade, freed, fried, fraught, freight, fret, throat, thread. 
 
 (g) Pinned, pined, pound, pond, happened, compound, point, pant, 
 pint, bent, bunt, bind, combined, tint, tent, taint, contend, con- 
 tent, tinned, toned, tuned, dined, dunned, dint, dent, daunt, chant, 
 jaunt, chained, joined, cant, canned, Kent, coined, gained, faint, font, 
 fount, find, found, fund, vent, vaunt, thinned, assigned, assent, shunned, 
 offend, commissioned, lend, lint, land, island, highland, arraigned, blind, 
 bland, blunt, grind, grand, craned, cleaned, cleft, ground, pruned, brunt, 
 brand, print, aground, surround, around. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 119 
 
 (h) Cautioned, cushioned, conditioned, occasioned, fashioned, 
 motioned, sanctioned, stationed, quotient, ancient, patient 
 
 (i) Splits, supplied, seclude, secret, spread, sobered, stride, street, 
 strides, second, summoned, concerned, sprained, secrets, separates, rifts, 
 rafts, clouds, creeds, screeds, sacred, cements, consonant. 
 
 (j) Aptly, optic, potash, potato, deadly, detach, beautify, butler, 
 bitter, batter, bottom, cotton, cattle, cuttle, cottage, fatal, agitate, 
 indicate, notify. 
 
 (k) Cured, marred, moored, feared, afford, lard, lured, lowered, 
 geared, paged, baked, backed, packed, appetite, pitched, poached, 
 touched, attached, matched, armed, rigid, orbit (Ar-Bet), robbed, (Ray- 
 Bed), limit, loved, left, lived, refute, rushed, budged,, bathed, bullet, 
 ballot, billet, ticket, ditched, tucked, tempt, debate, daubed, dodged, 
 checked, chipped, Egypt, mocked, nagged, method, mild, mold, mart, 
 invert, insured, slurred, immured, defraud, retreat, repent, pyramid, 
 radical, periodical, remotely, indicter, president, precedent. 
 
 (1) Ascertained, legitimate, fortified, rectitude, fortunate, captured, 
 detached, deduct, detect, abdicate, abduct, actuated, affidavit, evident, 
 estimate, esteemed, ultimate, latitude, redeemed, retained, modified, 
 mitigate, midnight, sentiment, verdict, gratitude, gratified, cultivate, 
 intend, intent, indent, chartered, protect, indicate. 
 
 (m) Treated, dated, deeded, freighted, situated, doubted, founded, 
 dreaded, fainted, attended, sounded, rested, requested, vested, slighted, 
 slatted, sledded. 
 
 (n) Territory, auditory, predatory, laboratory, voluntary, secondary, 
 directory, delatory, dedicatory, supplicatory, expiatory, adulatory, mid- 
 dle, metal, fatal, needle, cuttle, cattle, muddle, vital, scuttle, fiddle ; 
 preparatory, elementary, derogatory, defamitory, hereditary, observa- 
 tory, salutatory, respiratory, refractory, dormitory, inventory, nugatory, 
 peremptory, lavatory, finest, vainest, thinnest, meanest, leanest, van- 
 ished, varnished, finished; elocutionist, fashionist, visionist, flatten, 
 maintain, curtain, shorten, wanton, emphatic, methodic, critic, olden, 
 escheat, attitude, awaited. 
 
 (o) Pity, duty, body, needy, windy, equity, gaiety, cruet, poet, riot, 
 quiet, triad, Jewett ; rod, red, wrought, Reid, wrote, rood, rude, allayed, 
 arrayed, allowed, married, marred, tarried, tarred, select, afflict, vacate, 
 locked, deflect, locate, aggregate, affect. 
 
120 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (p) Word Signs and Phrases. About, according, according^ 
 account, after, am not, are not, is it, as not, astonished, astonish, 
 astonishment, called, cannot, cared, could, did not, do not, equaled, 
 established, establishment, gentleman, gentlemen, God, good, great, 
 had not, has it, has not, heard, if it, immediately, in order, is it, is not, 
 it will not, kind, let, let us, Lord, made, may not, might, mind, nature, 
 naturally, not, opportunity, particularly, put, quite, read, somewhat, 
 spirit, that, thought, throughout, till it, told, toward, under, used, val- 
 ued, want we are not, we will not, were not; will not, wished, without, 
 word, world. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 PREFIX SIGNS. 
 
 253. A few prefix signs have already been presented. 
 A more complete list is now given, most of which are sug- 
 gestive of the prefix and easy of application, but will 
 require considerable study and practice. The student is 
 reminded that study and practice should go hand in hand ; 
 both should be carried on simultaneously. The Reading Exer- 
 cises should be dwelt upon until every word is familiar, and 
 they should be carefully copied if necessary to impress the 
 forms upon the mind. The Writing Exercises should be each 
 written over several times. A thorough review should be 
 taken from time to time, especially if anything has been 
 slighted or omitted. 
 
 254. Con, Com, Cog, are best represented by writing 
 the latter part of the word under or clos to the preceding 
 word; thus, 
 
 In this connection they compose give control their cognomen 
 
 255. When it is not convenient to so indicate the prefix by 
 writing the latter part of the word under the preceding word, 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 121 
 
 it may be expressed by a dot written at the beginning of the 
 remainder of the word ; as, 
 
 V \ . L 
 
 compile compare comment cognate conduct 
 
 (a) When a line of writing begins with a prefix it is nec- 
 cessary to use the con-dot, unless the writer uses the device 
 adopted by some reporters of writing the latter part of the 
 word very close to the left hand marginal line to indicate the 
 prefix. If there is no marginal line, then very close to the 
 left edge of the paper. The dot should be used for thz 
 expression of con, com, cog, only in cases where it is very 
 convenient, as where a word is isolated, and there is no 
 convenient preceding outline to indicate it by proximity. 
 
 (b) When the, a or / is the next word immediately pre- 
 ceding one beginning with a con-dot, the ticks may be dis- 
 joined and written in place of the con-dot ; as, 
 
 JL jL 
 
 and contained the contents I concede 
 
 256. When con, com, cog, or accom occurs in the middle 
 of a word it is implied by writing the latter part of the word 
 under or very close to the first syllable ; as, 
 
 _J \0 _b\ V 
 
 J '< 
 
 decompose discontent misconstrue recognize reconcile 
 
 (a) The prefix may safely be omitted in many words, 
 such as inconsistent, incomplete, inconvenience, inconsequence, 
 misconduct. It may also be omitted without loss of legibility, 
 when a word begins with a backward In-hook, as, inconsidera- 
 tion, inconsolable, unconcern, etc. 
 
 (b) COM, in the following words is expressed by Kay- 
 Em: Comity, commissary, commiserate, commotion, comrade. 
 
122 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Conrad may be written Ken-Ray-Dee, and commerce Kay-Mers. 
 Conic should be written Ken- Kay. 
 
 (c) Concern, occurring in concomitant and concomitance 
 is written with two light dots, one above the other, at the 
 beginning of the remainder of the word ; thus, 
 
 1 1 
 
 concomitant concomitance 
 
 257. Accom is expressed by the stroke Kay disjoined ; 
 thus, 
 
 JbL. I^.._ 
 
 accommodation accompany accomplish 
 
 258. Contra, Contro, Contri, Counter, are expressed by 
 a small tick written before the remainder of the word ; as, 
 
 _JL _ ^ .V .1 
 
 contradict controvert contribution counterfeit 
 
 259. For, fore is expressed by Ef, either joined or dis- 
 joined : 
 
 forward foreseen forewarn foreswear 
 
 (a) In the following words the prefix should be repre- 
 sented by Per : forget, forgot-ten, forgive-n, foretell, forgave, 
 forego. 
 
 (b) The word forenoon should be written Ef-Ray-Nen, to 
 more surely distinguish it from afternoon. 
 
 260. Intro, Inter, Enter, Anti, Ante are expressed by 
 Net, either joined or disjoined ; as, 
 
 1 _.^ J' _^ .Jl_ 
 
 U 
 
 introduce intercourse entertain interpret anticipate 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 123 
 
 261 . Magna, Magne, Magni are expressed by Em written 
 over the remainder of the word ; as, 
 
 magnitude maguauimious magnesia magnetism 
 
 262. Circum, Self are expressed by a small circle written 
 before the remainder of the word ; as, 
 
 Circumscribe self-improvement self-made 
 
 263. Self-Con, Self-Contra are expressed by writing the 
 small circle in the place of the con-dot ; as, 
 
 O 
 
 r_ L 
 
 self-conceit self-contradict 
 
 264. When any one of the above prefixes is preceded by 
 a syllable, as in, en or un, such syllable may be expressed by 
 the proper letter or letters joined to or written near the pre- 
 fix ; as, 
 
 L,. ^L 
 
 \ -> 
 
 disencumber uncontradict unaccomplished 
 
 (a) The advanced writer may safely join many prefixes, 
 but When joined they should be placed on the line ; as, 
 
 self-sacrifice unselfish 
 
 265. Inre, Unre are expressed by Ner ; thus, 
 
 unrecompense in response in receipt 
 
124 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 266. Word signs are sometimes used as prefix signs ; thus, 
 
 N^ 
 
 _ I _ s* ..^^.. 
 
 almost undertake understand afterward 
 
 267. With, when a prefix, is expressed by the stem Thee 
 joined to the remainder of the word ; thus, 
 
 V i 
 
 I 
 
 withdraw withheld withstand 
 
 268. Trans is expressed by Ters, the n being omitted ; 
 thus, 
 
 3 Lv f I 
 
 transpose transcribe . translate transport 
 
 Other prefixes found in the language are expressed by 
 the proper phonographic outline. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 125 
 
 \. 
 
 J 
 
 v , c V. V c- ~ 
 
 
126 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 269. (a) In conversation, in construction, in comparison, in contribu- 
 ting, in reconciling, was content, was composed, it contained, 
 may conduce, will compel, will comprise, will consecrate, they 
 combat, a new contrivance, I am conscious, your committee, will con- 
 cede, it may consume, we will confer, this conception, their concern, in 
 concert, her consent, this conclave, do you commence, my commission, 
 was condemned, it was continued, I will confess, it will conflict, it 
 should conform, we shall confront, do not confuse, will you concede, I 
 will consent, did he confess, you will confer, it will consume, a little 
 conceit , in that confederation, we congratulate, the present configura- 
 tion, they will conciliate, he was convicted, this is condensed, I 
 will compare, take the communion, he was compassionate, easily con- 
 geals, very combative, this commission, somewhat cumbersome; com- 
 pile, cognate, cognizant, cognomen, concede, conceit, concentrate, con- 
 ceal, confederation, convicted, condensed, compare, commune, compas- 
 sionate, congeal, combative, cumbersome, concord, concur, concussion, 
 condensation, condolence, concoct. 
 
 (b) Decompose, misconduct, discomfit, disconnection, incommode, 
 incompressible, irreconciliation, recognition, reconsider, recommit, 
 misconstrue, noncontagious, noncommission, unconquerable, recum- 
 bent, accommodation, accomplish, preconceived, unconcerned. 
 
 (c) Contradiction, controvert, contribution, contraband, contradis- 
 tinction, contribute, controversy, counterfeit, counterpane, countersign, 
 countermand, counterpoise. 
 
 (d) Forewarn, foreseen, foreswear, foreknowledge, forecast, fore- 
 close, forefather, forefinger, forego, forehead, foreland, foresee, fore- 
 sight, forebode. 
 
 Use Per for the prefix in the following words : forget, forgive, 
 foretell. 
 
 (e) Intercede, interlard, interlink, interlude, intermeddle, intermit, 
 intermingle, intermittant, interpreter, interrogate, introduce, inter- 
 course, entertain, intervene, interrupt. 
 
 (f ) Magnetism, Magna Charta, magnitude, magnetic, magnificent 
 magnify. 
 
 (g) Circumvention, circumspect, circumnavigate, circumference, 
 circumscribe ; selfish, self-improvement, self-knowledge, self-made, 
 eelf-important, self-conceit, self-contradict, self-denial, self-esteem, self- 
 evident, self-same. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND 12? 
 
 (h) Unrecompensed, in response, in receipt, in reply, in writing, in 
 reference, in regard, unreasonable, in respect. 
 
 (i) Almost, undertake, afterward, understood, after- thought, there- 
 after, therefore, overcharge, overhaste, overreach, overdraw, overcloud, 
 overdo. 
 
 (j) Withdraw, withstand, withhold, withheld. 
 
 (k) Transfer, transpose, translate, transcend. 
 
 MR. L/EiyAND B. CASE, 
 
 Detroit, Michigan. 
 
 DEAR SIR : Can you recommend to me some young man capable 
 of doing light reporting, etc., who is also a good typewriter operator ? 
 I have a class of work that I desire such a person for, viz : Justice 
 Court, Police Court, dictation, testimony before commissioners, and 
 such work. He must be of correct habits, steady, and not lazy. If you 
 can recommend such a person please put him in communication with 
 me and oblige. I have no terms to offer I will say what I will pay 
 when I see my man, or know what he is capable of doing. My present 
 force consists of two assistants Mr. Atkinson, who reports in one of 
 my courts, and Miss Johnson (whom you have met) , who does my copy- 
 ing and general office reporting. 
 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 HENRY F. WALCH. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 270. Ble, Bly, are expressed by a joined Bee, when Bel 
 cannot be conveniently used ; thus, 
 
 I. 
 _ \j . __ > ___ 
 
 \ \ 
 
 sensibly attainable accountable 
 
 271. Bleness, Fulness, Someness are expressed by a 
 small circle at the end of the preceding part or the word; thus, 
 
 feebleness carefulness irksomeness 
 
128 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 272. Lessness is denoted by a large circle written at the 
 end of the preceding part of the word ; thus, 
 
 carelessness thoughtlessness 
 
 _73 Fore, Far, terminating a word is expressed by a 
 joined Ef ; thus, 
 
 v <v 
 
 -^r 
 
 therefore wherefore so far as far as 
 
 274. Ing is expressed by a light dot at the end of the 
 word, and sometimes by the stroke Ing ; as, 
 
 testing losing meeting writing saying 
 
 275. Ing ther is expressed by turning the dot into a 
 heavy disjoined tick ; thus, 
 
 doing their giving their showing their going there 
 
 276. Ing his, Ing us may be expressed by a small cir- 
 cle written in the place of the Ing dot ; as, 
 
 do'nghis giving us 
 
 277. When not convenient to use the stroke for ings, it 
 is best expressed by two light dots ; thus, 
 
 doings proceedings misgivings 
 
 278. Ingly is expressed by a heavy disjoined tick ; thus, 
 
 ^-j-g v ,\ j 
 
 ___ 
 
 amazingly knowingly charmingly 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 129 
 
 279. Alogy, Ology is expressed by Jay, either joined 
 or disjoined ; thus, 
 
 physiology theology zoology mineralogy 
 
 (a) Derivatives from this class of words, are formed by 
 adding the necessary outline; as, Efs-Jayst for physiologist ; 
 Em-Ner-Jayst for mineralogist ; Tet-Jayst (disjoined) for tau- 
 tologist. 
 
 280. Ship is denoted by Ish, either joined or disjoined ; 
 as, 
 
 ___,_ ...... y 
 
 friendship ownership hardship partnership 
 
 281. Tial when it cannot be conveniently expressed by 
 Shel may be denoted by Ish ; thus, 
 
 potential prudential substantial presidential 
 
 282. Soever is expressed by Iss-Vee joined, or by Iss 
 disjoined; thus, 
 
 wheresoever whensoever whosoever whithersoever 
 
 283. Mental, Mentality is expressed by Ment disjoined 
 thus, 
 
 instrumental-ity fundamental 
 
130 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 284. Lity, Rity may be expressed by disjoining the 
 last consonant of the preceding part of the word ; thus, 
 
 Instability disparity popularity prosperity 
 
 (a) In analogy with this principle we write the following 
 and similar words by disjoining the last stroke : Verbosity, 
 urbanity, Christianity. 
 
 285. A word sign is often used as an affix sign ; thus, 
 
 ...1 4 9 "A- ^ 
 
 c \ \ 
 
 thereafter thereto thereof whenever reform 
 
 (a) Where of and to conflict, the sign for of is disjoined. 
 
 286. Full, Fully are expressed by the f-hook and some- 
 times by the stem Ef ; thus, 
 
 careful deceitful graceful painful 
 
 287. Ever is sometimes expressed by the f-hook, but 
 more generally by the stem Vee ; as, 
 
 whichever whoever whenever wherever 
 
 288. On is sometimes added by the n-hook ; thus, 
 
 looker-on thereon right on go on 
 
 289. With, as an affix, is expressed by Weh and some- 
 times by Thee ; as, 
 
 herewith wherewith forthwith therewith 
 
READING EXERCISE. 
 
 .^....c/X ; ._^ 
 
 o o 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^f \. 
 
 ^N T 
 
 ..;A\._...U 
 
 J ... 
 
 - 
 
 
132 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 290. (a) Sensible, accountable, attainable, forcible, profitable, insur- 
 mountable, feasible, lovable, questionable, comfortably. 
 
 (b) Feebleness, thoughtfulness, carefulness, troublesomeness, art- 
 fulness, awfulness, bashfulness, fearfuluess, forgetfulness, fretfulness, 
 hopefulness, irksomeness, joyfulness, fulsomeuess, lawfulness, teacha- 
 bleness, gladsomeness, mirthfulness, youthfulness, spitefulness, restful- 
 ness, slothfulness, thankfulness, sorrowfulness, watchfulness, wistful- 
 ness. 
 
 (c) Carelessness, thoughtlessness, heedlessness, lawlessness, art- 
 Kssness, blamelessness, endlessness, fruitlessuess, harmlessness, heart- 
 ^essness, joylessness, lifelessuess, matchlessness, uselessness, worthless- 
 ness, restlessness. 
 
 (d) Therefore, wherefore, so far, as far as. 
 
 (e) Doing, thinking, making, committing, undertaking, doings, 
 sayings. 
 
 (f) Knowingly, amazingly, charmingly, strikingly, provokingly, 
 laughingly, lovingly, seemingly, bewitchiugly, soothingly, searchingly, 
 trippingly. 
 
 (g) Etomology, physiology, zoology, phrenology, theology, mineral- 
 ogy, tautology, chronology, osteology, physiologist, zoologist, theolo- 
 gian. 
 
 (h) Friendship, lordship, ownership, partnership, wardship, hard- 
 ship, township, courtship, fellowship, rivalship, mayorship, sheriffship. 
 
 (i) Potential, prudeutial, substantial. 
 
 ( j) Wheresoever, whensoever, whosoever, whithersoever. 
 
 (k) Instrumental, fundamental, ornamental, supplemental, elemen- 
 tal, experimental. 
 
 (1) Accessibility, adaptability, advisability, durability, admissibility, 
 capability, compatibility, sensibility, affability, instability, account- 
 ability, disability, destructibility, divisibility, feasibility, immo- 
 bility, fusibility, availability, debility, liability, nobility, credibility, 
 plausibility, legality, disparity, prosperity, posterity, popularity, vul- 
 garity, verbosity, urbanity, Christianity. 
 
 (m) Thereto, hereto, whereto, thereof, hereof, whereof, thereafter, 
 vvheuever, wherever, thereon, reform, transform, perform, deform. 
 
 (n) Careful, hateful, deceitful, mournful, painful, graceful ; which- 
 ever, whoever; looker-on, thereon, right on, set on; herewith, where- 
 with, forthwith. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 133 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 ENLARGED WEH AND YEH. 
 
 291. Enlarging a brief Way word sign adds any othei 
 brief Way word sign ; as, 
 
 c O 
 
 we were were we what we would we 
 
 we would what would 
 
 292. Enlarging a brief Way word sign and inclining the 
 same in the direction of Ray or Chay adds you ; thus, 
 
 with you were you what you would you 
 
 293. In analogy with Sec. 291 we have the following 
 forms : 
 
 you would beyond you 
 
 294. A hook may be written within any of these en- 
 larged forms to add have, of, to have ; as, 
 
 were we to have what we have would we have 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 295. The following beautiful story is engraved in the 
 simplest style of shorthand, and is designed as a stepping 
 stone to the more complex style used in rapid reporting. It 
 illustrates what may be done without the use of phrasing, and 
 should be carefully studied. 
 
134 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 The Story of Narcissus 
 
 C.. 
 
 \ -\ CV 
 =Hr-\-- 
 
 r^H-H 
 
 
 , 
 
 ~ r 
 
 W'--l UX 1 1 / r 
 
 
 A /: 
 
 \ 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 135 
 
 L2..y^...^A.rL:^.^^ 
 
 "^ I J ^ 
 
 p I \^_ r p \ c ^ - 
 
 - /T --** 1 iJ"*".j ^"^ 
 
 ^_^a Hj ^i_l4JL^X T 
 
 VrV^v^---V-^ 
 
 x \ -/_ i \o _) O -CQ ^ xS y_/. _ 
 
 V^A v. I x^. 
 
 n ""^-^ \ ~1 " ^-^A ^-1 "\ I. /" 
 
 ....x^..^...........c).....^.....^._l:/_. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 296. i. We-were with-you when-you-were on your way to the sea- 
 shore. 
 
 2. We agree with-you, that this is an important matter and should 
 receive attention at once. 
 
 3. Do what you will you cannot change the opinion of your friends 
 across the way. 
 
136 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 4. We-would be pleased to have you visit us some time before the 
 summer is over. 
 
 5. Would-you have the kindness to bring with-you the volumes of 
 which you were speaking. 
 
 6. We-were at a loss to know what-you had to do in the matter. 
 
 7. Were-you ever in the City of Paris during a holiday ? 
 
 8. Do what-you think best in the matter and we shall not complain. 
 
 9. We-were quite sure you-would not be pleased with them, even if 
 they were here. 
 
 10. We-were to have them by the first of April, but they have not 
 yet come. 
 
 11. The poor ye have always with-you, but Me ye have not always. 
 
 12. We-would-have you co-operate in this matter if you-would 
 remain. 
 
 13. You will remember what-we-have already said upon this sub- 
 iecL 
 
 14. If we-would have their sympathy we must not give aid to their 
 enemies. 
 
 15. We-were-of your company when you-were crossing the plains. 
 
 LESSON XXIi 
 
 OMISSION OF CERTAIN CONSONANTS. 
 
 297. Consonants are frequently omitted when their 
 expression would cause an inconvenient outline, or when they 
 are not necessary to legibility, as in the following instances : 
 
 (a) T following s is often omitted for the sake of joining 
 a following stem : 
 
 mystic costly postage must be obstacle 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 187 
 
 (b) A' is frequently omitted after Ing and before Shun; 
 
 as, 
 
 <J. 
 
 anxiety bank sanction destruction infraction 
 
 (c) P is omitted when preceded by m and followed by /, 
 k, or shun ; as, 
 
 _U> .<j~} -J^ _ Vj 
 
 tempt consumption assumption prompt Thompson 
 
 (d) R is omitted in scribe and similar syllables where its 
 expression would involve an awkward outline ; as, 
 
 subscribe manuscript obscure 
 
 (e) TVis omitted when it would have to be expressed by 
 an n-hook followed by a stem that cannot be conveniently 
 joined ; as, 
 
 assignment identical passenger demonstrate 
 
 (f) L is omitted in a few words to avoid an inconvenient 
 outline; as, 
 
 L i 
 
 ..... ^ ...... \ 
 
 devolve develop indulge Intellect 
 
 (g) H is omitted in a few words for a similar reason ; as, 
 
 adhesion adhesive 
 
138 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 OMISSION OP VOWELS. 
 
 298. As the student grows familiar with phonographic 
 outlines, he will learn that the great majority of words have 
 distinct outlines of their own, and require no vocalization. 
 All vowels, however, must not be omitted. There are many 
 words which for prompt and positive reading require the 
 insertion of the accented vowel. Words having the same out- 
 line and the same position can be distinguished in no other 
 way than by insertihg the vowel, except by the context, which 
 can generally be relied upon in determining the proper word. 
 A little experience in reading and writing shorthand notes 
 soon teaches one when to vocalize and when not to vocalize. 
 A few hints are given below as a stepping-stone to the read- 
 ing of unvocalized phonography. Students will begin to omit 
 
 vowels in the following cases : 
 
 I 
 
 (a) Unaccented vowels ; as in 
 
 cubical votary topic dialogue 
 
 (b) When the form of a word implies an initial vowel, as 
 in the words, assign, ask, awake, alum, argue. When the 
 words have the same outline they are generally distinguished 
 by difference of position, as Es 1 -Ens for science, Es 2 -Ens for 
 essence. 
 
 (c) When the form of a word implies a final vowel as in 
 penny, bevy, pity, mighty, angry, needy. 
 
 (d) When the name of the outline suggests the word; as, 
 Ray-Dee for ready; Lay-Dee, lady; Dred, dread; Ink-Kay, 
 ink; etc. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 139 
 
 INSERTION OF VOWELS. 
 
 299. Vowels are sometimes essential to legibility, and 
 the young writer will continue to insert them in the following 
 cases : 
 
 (a) When a word is used in a peculiar connection or 
 when the construction is so faulty or involved that the mean- 
 ing is obscure. 
 
 (b) When the same outline stands for several words the 
 accented or distinguishing vowel should be inserted ; as, excis- 
 ion, causation, suction, section, employment, implement. 
 
 (c) Words beginning with a vowel should generally be 
 vocalized with the initial vowel, especially if the word contains 
 but one stem ; as, ebb, eke, eel, acre, hawk, upper, outer, etc. 
 If the word has but one stem and has a vowel both before and 
 after it, it is well to insert both vowels, but if owing to the 
 pressure of speed only one can be inserted, the initial vowel 
 will generally afford the best guide in determining the proper 
 word. 
 
 (d) A diphthong or a brief Way should generally be 
 inserted, as in quake, twig, boil, jewel, etc. They are rarely 
 omitted. 
 
 (e) Uncommon words, especially when they occur in 
 unusual connections, should be vocalized ; as, glebe, uncanny, 
 gnome, etc. 
 
140 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING EXERCISE. 
 
 1 - -V - - 
 V 7/ 
 
 // 
 
 \j*,v^.v^n.!L. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 141 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 300. (a) I/astly, mostly, costly, restless, listless, postal, postage, post- 
 office, obstacle, must be, mistrustful, domestic, custom, vastly, justly, 
 postpone, postpaid, boastful, tasteful, trustful, breastplate, I trust you 
 will, distrustful, caustic, justify, testify, mistify, destitute, trustworthy. 
 
 (b) Anxiety, anxious, unction, sanction, function, destruction, in- 
 fraction, friction, production, protraction, subtraction, rejection, de- 
 flection. 
 
 (c) Tempt, consumption, presumption, assumption, exception, co- 
 emption, pre-emption, Simpkins, Tomkins, pump. 
 
 (d) Prescribe, proscribe, subscribe, describe, transcribe, obscure, 
 manuscript, discursive, discourse. 
 
 (e) Demonstrate, assignment, stranger, identical, passenger, mes- 
 senger, attainment, appointment. 
 
 (f) Devolve, develop, indulge, intelligent, intellect, intelligible, 
 intelligence. 
 
 (g) Critic, lymphatic, pathetic, escheat, athletic, badness. 
 
 (h) Cubical, topic, admirer, enigma, variety, miscellaneous, domi 
 nant. 
 
 (i) Ask, awake, alum, early, essence, science, penny, money, finny 
 ready, lady, ink. 
 
 ( j) Excision, causation, occasion, connection, chosen, chasten. 
 
 (k) Accrued, ebb, open, utter. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 RECAPITULATION OF SPECIAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 301. The student is now fitted for a more thorough com- 
 prehension of the various special principles and expedients 
 which have been given in their logical order throughout the 
 previous chapters of this book, and we now gather them in 
 one chapter for special study and review. The student should 
 strenuously endeavor to adopt these principles as early as pos- 
 sible. They should be assimilated and made use of as fast as 
 
142 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 learned, so that the writer will have no fear of not being able 
 to read them. The constant use of them in copying and dic- 
 tation, though it may impede speed at first, soon establishes 
 them in the mind and they form a part of stenographic capital 
 from which the learner may draw to obtain speed and accuracy. 
 
 302. Is, His, As, Has or Us may be added to a word sign 
 or outline by a small circle : 
 
 i_ ...... / ____ /L ______ i _____ k ________ i 
 
 in bis which is such as it has for us see us 
 (a) If the outline terminates with a circle it may be en- 
 larged to add one of the above words; thus, 
 
 this is has some is seen as soon takes his is his 
 
 (b) Us must be represented by the stem sign when there 
 is a danger of its conflicting with the s-form of a verb; as, 
 
 I \\ ~ ~\ <...)-.. 
 
 ' ~ )"" ..... T~ ..... \ w 
 
 takes take us gives give us puts put us 
 
 303. Stair or Store may be added by the Stey loop ; as, 
 
 in store up stairs 
 
 304. All or Will may be added by the 1-hook ; thus, 
 
 1 ___________ L ______________ ................ i ...... ____ /*. _______ ....... L 
 
 if all for all though all of all which will they will 
 
 305. Are or Our may be added by the r-hook; thus, 
 
 which are each are by our but are from all during all 
 
 306. Have, of or if may be added by the f-hook ; thus, 
 
 each of which have allot and if they have but if 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 143 
 
 307. Not may be expressed by halving certain word 
 signs and adding the n-hook. The n-hook on but and or adds 
 
 not : 
 
 J I ,-rs 
 
 J 
 but not or not it would not may not cannot will not 
 
 308. Own may be added by the n-hook when the sign 
 En 3 is not more convenient ; thus, 
 
 u ^- ^ 
 
 by our own in our own in their own at our own by their own 
 
 309. One may be added by the n-hook ; thus, 
 
 _!^ ______________ ^2 _______ ........... <rz. ...... ________ ............ I ............. ________ .v*. __ <??. 
 
 in one for one some one at one another one 
 
 310. The n-hook is used to add on; as, 
 
 go on right on 
 
 311. Session. The eshon-hook may be utilized to add 
 the word session. 
 
 this session last session night session 
 
 312. In, In-the. The backward hook is utilized on a 
 few words to add in or in the; thus, 
 
 in consideration in the experience in summer in a similar way 
 
 313. Their, There, They Are. When v these words 
 cannot be conveniently expressed by the lengthening principle 
 or by the word sign, they may be denoted by a heavy tick 
 written in the direction of Bee or Jay ; thus, 
 
 D ..... S_/._ 
 
 ~~ V \ 
 
 because there would there can there sent there 
 
144 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (a) This tick is called Ther tick. 
 
 (b) The f-hook or the circle may be added to the Ther- 
 \ 4/ / tick to add fore, ever, his, is, etc., according to principles 
 
 heretofore stated : 
 
 4 M_ 
 
 it is therefore since there Is 
 
 314. Ing thr is expressed by a heavy disjoined dash; 
 thus, 
 
 doing their having their going there wishing their 
 315. Ing the may be expressed by a disjoined The-tick. 
 Ing a-an, by a disjoined a-tick. 
 
 I 
 
 \---__ 
 
 hoping the giving the signing a doing a 
 
 316. To me may be distinguished from to him by phras- 
 ing in its proper position the latter, and placing the former in 
 the fourth position : 
 
 to me to him 
 
 317. It, Ought. Halving a word sign and retaining its 
 position, adds it ; placing the shortened character in the first 
 position, adds ought; as, 
 
 I <^ c/ 
 
 it ought when It where ought 
 
 318. Had, Would. Halving a word sign and placing or 
 retaining the same in the third position adds, had or would; as, 
 
 - ( i 
 
 v r 
 
 they would had had 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 145 
 
 319. You. When the word sign for you is attached to 
 certain stems it presents the appearance of an r-hook, and may 
 be distinguished therefrom by writing the sign on the line 
 when it is intended for you and a little above the line when it 
 is meant for an r-hook outline in the third position ; thus, 
 
 ^r\ n 
 
 ) J 
 
 you do you say you shall 
 
 320. Other may sometimes be added by lengthening a 
 word sign ; as, 
 
 some other no other among other any other 
 
 321. You and Were are sometimes reversed to secure a 
 
 phrase ; as, 
 
 <^_^i ji-^j f\ 
 
 when you come I send you there were 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 IMPLICATION OF WORDS. 
 
 322. Generally speaking, it is allowable to omit any 
 common word which the connection will readily supply, as 
 will be seen from the following examples. This principle can- 
 not be used indiscriminately ; the connection must be close, and 
 the sense must unmistakably suggest the missing word ; and 
 it is well for the student to use at first, only the examples 
 given in the writing exercises herewith, which should be thor- 
 oughly memorized and practiced. 
 
H6 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (a) And is omitted in phrases like the following, and the 
 adjacent words joined ; thus, 
 
 again and again more and more through and through over and over 
 
 (b) Or is omitted in similar phrases and the adjacent 
 
 words joined : 
 
 /~ 
 
 Sr^rA _ V\ / ^ 
 
 1 ~ a ^- 
 
 moreorless one or two two or three large or small early or late 
 
 (c) The is omitted under similar circumstances ; thus, 
 
 in the world on the contrary In the interests for the place 
 
 (d) Have should be omitted before been and done when it 
 cannot be more conveniently expressed by the f-hook ; thus, 
 
 ... ......... J ___________ 5 _____ ; ______ , ........... L. 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 shall have been we have done I have been they have been 
 
 (e) To. When have is expressed by the f-hook to pre- 
 ceding it may be omitted. 
 
 said to have was to have ought to have 
 
 323. Words Implied. Of, of the. When of or of the 
 between words cannot be conveniently expressed by their 
 signs, they may be omitted and intimated by w r riting the 
 adjacent words in close proximity, and sometimes the adja- 
 cent words are joined; thus, 
 
 waste of time close of the subject oue of the greatest 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 14V 
 
 (a) It is often necessary to preserve the exact words of 
 the speaker, and the reporter must exercise his judgment in 
 implying words by juxtaposition. For instance, when the 
 connected sense would not determine whether the speaker 
 said : "In some of the paper," or "In some paper," the of the 
 should be inserted. 
 
 324. To or To the may be implied by writing the follow- 
 ing word under the line. If, however, the following word 
 commences with an up-stroke it is better to write the sign for 
 to and join the up-stroke ; thus, 
 
 ..... ......... . ................. _ 
 
 ) 
 
 to do to say to me to whom to solve to report 
 
 (a) To may be implied where it is followed by the, by 
 writing Petoid under the line ; as, 
 
 to the right to the left to the river to the court 
 
 325. From to may be omitted in such phrases ; as, 
 
 from time to time from hour to hour from year to year from place to place 
 
 326. After may be implied in similar phrases by writing 
 one of the contiguous words below another ; as, 
 
 day after day year after year place after place week after week 
 
 327. Were is implied by adding an r-hook and placing in 
 the third position ; as, 
 
 ____ ___ 
 
 ? 
 
 whlchwere who were such were as it were 
 
148 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 OPTIONAL PRINCIPLES. 
 
 328. It is frequent practice of some reporters to halve a 
 word-sign and place it in the first position to indicate the 
 addition of did; thus, 
 
 it did when did where did 
 
 329. The small circle is used to indicate house, when it 
 occurs frequently; as, 
 
 publishing house this house in the house 
 
 330. Some writers change the circle into Stey to add it; as, 
 
 .L. _L 
 
 does it makes it tries it thiuks it says it 
 
 331. The small circle may be changed into Ster to add 
 there, their, they are; as, 
 
 goes there takes their does there 
 
 332. Ster may be used in the first position for Is there ; 
 in the second position for as there, as they are. 
 
 333. Writing a word-sign in the third position to indicate 
 the addition of you; as, 
 
 will you state have you any knowledge do you know the plaintiff 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 149 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 PHRASING. 
 
 334. No very precise rules can be laid down for phrasing. While 
 no two stenographers would make all phrases in the same manner, nor 
 any one stenographer make exactly the same phrases the second time, 
 yet all stenographers do phrase more or less, and many phrases are 
 always made in the same manner, and there is no doubt of the great 
 advantage gained by the practice of phrasing. Young writers are apt to 
 overrate the value of phrasing, and think if they could join a whole dis- 
 course into one continuous phrase, reporting would be an easy matter. 
 There is a point beyond which it cannot be carried to advantage. The 
 following suggestions as to the limitations and resources of this branch 
 of the science may guide the student in determining the principles upon 
 which phrasing is based, and which are impossible, owing to the many 
 exceptions, to formulate into words. 
 
 To be of value phrasing must be done spontaneously and without 
 the least effort of the mind, otherwise it will hamper the free movement 
 of the hand and cause hesitation. Phrasing may be carried to any 
 extent that does not cause confusion of mind, or awkward or difficult 
 joinings, and the length of a phrase varies from two to six words. 
 There must be no mental effort in phrasing it must be involuntary 
 and automatic. How much a writer may phrase depends largely upon 
 his familiarity with the peculiar diction of the subject matter, or the 
 frequency with which certain combinations of words occur. A stenog- 
 rapher who is familiar with the technical language used in large elec- 
 trical manufacturing establishments would make phrases which would 
 not be allowable for a writer familiar only with the vernacular of a law 
 office ; or a reporter accustomed day after day to report the testimony 
 of sailors in an admiralty court will naturally phrase more in that line 
 than one who is accustomed only to reporting in a criminal court. 
 
 Phrases should not be so long as to break up the rythm of move- 
 ment of the hand, as they would if run too far below the line. A little 
 practice soon determines how long phrases can be conveniently made. 
 
150 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 A long phrase and then a succession of no phrases at all would be apt 
 to cause a momentary hesitation which might be fatal to speed. 
 
 We have already cautioned the student not to join words which are 
 separated by a pause, either rhetorical or grammatical, but this rule is of 
 little value after all in actual work, and the only invariable rules seem 
 to be facility of joining and ease of reading. The best methods of 
 phrasing will suggest themselves to the student as he grows in practice 
 and experience, and he will naturally form more phrases than can be 
 put in any collected list. We have presented only enough to guide the 
 student at the outset. The mind will naturally receive the words in 
 such groups as the hand will cast into a convenient phrase, but the 
 habit of phrasing will not come without some cultivation. Indeed, per- 
 sistent practice is necessary. The habit of practicing on isolated 
 phrases is helpful, especially when one meets a phrase which seems 
 particularly difficult. The young writer should not reject it because he 
 cannot make it with proper ease and accuracy, for it may be a phrase 
 quite desirable to use in order to gain both speed and legibility, and it 
 should be practiced upon until it can be made with ease and precision. 
 The phrases, " it-could-not, " " isn't-it, " " wasn't-it, " belong to this class 
 of phrases. Some will find it difficult to make auch a phrase as " and- 
 these-are," for in rapid execution one is likely to get an unintentional 
 hook on the upward stroke and make it look like " in-this-work. " Such 
 phrases should be practiced upon until they can be made with pre- 
 cision. 
 
 335. The first word of a phrase generally determines the position 
 of the whole phrase. There are some words, however, which require 
 to be placed in their own position in order to be legible, and when these 
 are the second words of phrases, the other words must accommodate 
 themselves to that one, as in " as-these, " " as-this, " " as-those, " 
 "as-little," "as-long." 
 
 336. Since in such phrases as "by-a, " " be-a, " etc., Ketoid might 
 resemble Retoid, and therefore be mistaken for the The-tick, always 
 express the article in such phrases by an initial tick joined to the 
 following word. The pronoun / may be joined between two words 
 by making it either horizontal or perpendicular. It is not likely to 
 conflict with the tick for a-an-and. 
 
 337. When / begins a phrase use Tetoid or Retoid, first posi- 
 tion, according to the ease of joining, and if any other of these signs 
 join readily to the following word, use Tetoid first position. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 151 
 
 338. We or were is always joined to the four liquids, /, m, n and 
 r, by the hook ; thus, 
 
 n 
 
 we always we also were also were unsatisfactory we enjoy 
 
 339. As the I-tiek may be written in two different directions, it is 
 well to have a uniform practice with reference to its use on such phrases 
 as I can, I am, I go, etc. 
 
 340. The beginner will use great caution in phrasing the signs for 
 or and but, as they sometimes conflict with the tick for a-an-and, 
 and the context is not always a safe guide. " Or whether " and " or give " 
 might be read for "and whether" or " and give. " So, too, "but can" 
 may be interpreted " and can. " It is well for the beginner to make it a 
 rule never to phrase the signs for or and but. 
 
 341. The ticks will prove troublesome to beginners unless clear 
 ideas are formed from the start of their correct use. The following will 
 illustrate some distinctions which are necessary to be formed: 
 
 X 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 as to 
 
 as to the 
 
 as the 
 
 on his 
 
 he is 
 
 is the 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 _,, 
 
 L, 
 
 
 N 
 
 ind what 
 
 or what 
 
 and would 
 
 but would 
 
 of what 
 
 to what 
 
 342. The tick for he, when beginning a phrase, must rest on the 
 line, and it is generally written downward, though it may be written 
 ipward to secure a better phrase : 
 
 as he thinks as he was as he knows 
 
152 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 READING KXERCISE. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 158 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 PHRASE LIST. 
 
 343. The following is a list of frequently recurring 
 phrases, some of which are specially contracted, but most 
 of which are formed in accordance with the regular 
 principles. They should be practiced upon until they 
 can be written without the least hesitation. For the sake of 
 review we append a statement of the principles underlying 
 the formation of most of these phrases : 
 
 1. The 1-hook adds all, will. 
 
 2. The r-hook adds are, our. 
 
 3. Special phrases are formed with it, which, such, she, 
 they, there, by the following principles : 
 
 (a) Halving any of these words and placing in the first 
 position adds ought ; as, Tet 1 , it ought. 
 
 (b) Halving and placing in the third position adds had 
 or would; as, Tet 3 , it had, it would. 
 
 (c) Attaching an f-hook to any of the above mentioned 
 words and placing in the first position adds ought to have ; as, 
 Tef J , it ought to have. 
 
 (d) Attaching an f-hook and placing in the third position 
 adds would have; as, Tef 3 , it would have. 
 
 (e) Halving and placing in the first position with an n- 
 hook attached adds ought not ; as, Tent 1 , it ought not. 
 
 (f ) Halving these forms and placing in third position 
 with ann-hook attached adds, would not or had not; as, Tent 3 , 
 it would not, it had not. 
 
 (g) Halving, with an f-hook attached, and placing in first 
 position adds, ought to have had; as, Teft 1 , it ought to have 
 had. 
 
154 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (h) Halving, with an f-hook attached, and placing in the 
 third position, adds would have had; as Teft 3 , it would have 
 had. 
 
 4. Were is sometimes indicated by adding an r-hook 
 and placing in the third position; as, Cher 3 , which were; 
 Jertoid 3 , who were. 
 
 5 Ing is omitted to secure a joining in such compound 
 words as, drawing-room, dining-room, dining-table, etc. 
 
 6. What is sometimes indicated by halving a word sign 
 and placing in the first position ; as, Pent, 1 upon what ; Fet 1 , 
 
 for what. 
 
 7. One is added by the n-hook. 
 
 8. To is often omitted to secure a phrase; as, Iss-Dee- 2 
 Yuh, said to you. 
 
 Bee 3 -Slet- 
 
 Able to Bled 2 
 able to have Blef 2 
 absolutely necessary 
 
 Enses 
 according to Kret 1 
 according to them Kret J Thee 
 again and again Gen 2 -Gen 
 along side of Ing 3 -Iss-Def 
 although there is Bedoid'-Thee- 
 
 thers 
 
 a !l f \Beftoid' 
 all have j 
 
 all would Bentoid 1 
 
 and all Kletoid 2 
 
 and are, and our Kretoid 2 
 
 and our own Krentoid 2 
 
 another one Enthern 2 
 
 anything else En 1 -Ing-Els 
 
 anything less En l -Ing-L,ays 
 
 as far as Iss 2 -Efs 
 
 as good as Iss-Geds 2 
 
 as great as Iss-Grets 2 
 
 as it were Ster 3 
 
 as it ought Stet 1 
 
 as it had \ Qf , 3 
 
 as it would j & 
 
 as little Slet 1 
 
 as it Zet 2 
 
 as a Sketoid 2 
 
 as the Iss 2 -Chetoid 
 
 as to Iss-Petoid 2 
 
 as to a Iss 2 -Tetoid 
 
 as to the Iss 2 -Petoid 
 
 as well as Slays 2 
 
 at all events Tlef 3 -Nets 
 
 at any rate Tee 3 -Nert 
 
 at hand Tent 3 
 
 at a time Tee 3 -Ketoid-Tee 
 
 at any time Tee 3 -En-Tee 
 
 at one time Ten s -Tee 
 
 at some time Tee 3 -Smet 
 
 at the same time Tee 3 -Smet (Voc) 
 
 at last Tee 3 -Layst 
 
 at least Telst 3 
 
 at the time Tee s -Retoid-Tee 
 
 at one Ten 3 
 
 at once ' Tens 3 
 
 at or about Ter 3 -Bet 
 
 at first Teest 3 
 
 at length Tien 3 
 
 at our own Tren 3 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 155 
 
 Before it Beft 2 
 before you Bef 2 -Yeh 
 better not Bet 2 -Rent 
 better than Bet 2 -Ren 
 but are not Trentoid 2 
 but if, but of Teftoid 2 
 but not Tentoid 2 
 by all Bel 1 
 by it Bet 1 
 by our Ber 1 
 by way of Bee 1 -Way f 
 
 Call forth Kief 1 
 
 can there Kayther 2 or Ken 2 -Bedoid 
 Counsel for defense Kay-Def 2 
 Counsel for the defendant Kay- 
 Dee 2 
 
 Counsel for the plaintiff Kay- 
 Plent 2 
 
 D 
 
 Day or two Dred 2 
 day or two after Dreft 2 
 do I know Dee 2 -Ketoid-En 
 during the latter part Der 3 -Layter 
 
 Pret 
 dwelling house Dee 2 -Lay-Hays 
 
 Each are Cher 1 
 each one of them Chen 1 -Thee 
 every one Vren 2 
 everywhere Ver 2 -Ar 
 
 Fler* 
 
 For all Pel 
 
 for all are \ 
 
 for all our / ' 
 
 for it Fet 2 
 
 for what Fet 1 
 
 for one Fen 2 
 
 for our Fer 3 
 
 from all Frel 2 
 
 from one Fren 2 
 
 from it Fer 2 -Met 
 
 for instance Ef 2 -Stens 
 
 for the plaintiff Ef 2 -Plent 
 
 for the defendant Ef 2 -Dee 
 
 for the first time Ef*-Stey-Tee 
 for the most part Ef 2 -Ems-Pret 
 for the sake of Efs 2 -Kef 
 for the purpose Ef 2 -Pee 
 
 Q 
 
 Gave it Geft 2 
 
 go on Gen 2 
 
 go on and state to the jury 
 
 Gen 2 -Stet-Jer 
 good deal Ged 2 -Dee 
 great deal Gret^-Dee 
 gentlemen of the jury Jet 2 -Jer 
 General Manager Jay 2 -Em-Jer 
 
 H 
 
 Had been Den 3 
 
 Habeas Corpus proceedings Hay 2 - 
 
 Ker-Pers-Dee 
 had had Ded 3 
 has known Suen 2 
 had not Dent 3 
 has there Zeether 3 
 have-ing been Ven 2 
 have not Vent 2 
 hope to have Pef 3 
 how long have you lived Retoid 3 - 
 
 Ing-Lay-Ved 
 how long have you known Re- 
 
 toid 3 -Ing-Nen 
 
 I 
 
 I am inclined Petoid^Em-En- 
 
 Klent 
 I am in receipt of your letter 
 
 Petoid-Em-Ner-Stee 2 -L,aytcr 
 if all Fel 1 
 if all are \ F1 i 
 if all our f* 
 if our Fer 1 
 
 in the meantime En 1 Men-Tee 
 in the words of my text En 1 - 
 
 Werds-Teest 
 in all Nel 1 
 in it \ N tl 
 
 in what ( N 
 in one Nen 1 
 is said to have Ses-Def 2 
 in consequence En-Skens 1 
 
156 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 T . 8 
 1 
 
 in consideration Ins-Dershun 2 
 
 iu order Nert 1 
 
 in point of fact Ei^-Pent-Ef 
 
 in response Ner^Spens 
 
 in the next place En'-Ens-Pees 
 
 in the world En 1 -Eld 
 
 in reference Ner-Ef 2 
 
 in regard Ner J -Gerd 
 
 in our Ner 1 
 
 in some way In-Sem 2 -Weh 
 
 in the first place En-Steh-Pee 2 
 
 in the second place Eu^Skent- 
 
 Pee 
 
 iu. writing - Nert 1 
 In your handwriting En J -Nert- 
 
 Ing dot 
 
 is there Zeether 1 
 it ought Tet 1 
 it had 
 it would 
 
 it ought not Tent 1 
 it had not \ ^> . 3 
 it would not / x 
 it ought to have Tef 1 
 it would have Tef 3 
 it ought to have had Teft 1 
 it would have had Teft 3 
 it will have Telf 2 
 
 Joint stock Jed^Stee-Kay 
 
 just as Jayses 2 
 
 iust at present. Jays 2 -Tee-Pers 
 
 just after Jays 2 -Fet 
 
 just before Jays 2 -Bef 
 
 just now Jays 2 -En-Petoid 
 
 Last day L,ays 3 -Dee 
 
 last night L,ays 3 -Net 
 
 last will and testament Lays*-I/ay- 
 
 Tees-Ment 
 last hour L,ays 3 -Ar 
 learned counsel Len 2 -Kay 
 less than Lays-In 2 
 
 May be Enib 2 
 may have been 
 
 n 
 
 Emben 1 
 
 might there Emther 1 
 much will Chel 3 
 must be true Ems 2 -Bee-Ter 
 more and more Mer 2 -Mer 
 more or less Mer 2 -I/ays 
 more than once Meru 2 -Ens 
 Mr. President Mer'-Pers 
 My dear Sir Emders^Ray 
 
 N 
 
 Next day Eus 2 -Dee 
 no, sir Ens 2 
 no other Enther 3 
 nor will Nerl 1 
 no less Nels 12 
 no one Nen 3 
 nothing else En-Ith 2 -Els 
 nothing less En-Ith 2 Lays 
 nothing less than En-Ith^-Lays-In 
 
 o 
 
 Of all Pletoid 1 
 
 of our Pretoid 1 
 
 of it Vet 1 
 
 of their Veether 1 
 
 of what Pentoid 1 
 
 on all Cheltoid 1 
 
 on our Chertoid 1 
 
 on either hand Thrend 1 
 
 on the other hand Thrend 2 
 
 on the one hand Wenend 2 
 
 on every hand Vrend 2 
 
 on his part Retoid'-Spret 
 
 once or twice Wens 2 -Tees 
 
 or not Tentoid 1 
 
 ought to have Jeftoid 1 
 
 over it Vert 1 
 
 our own Arn 3 
 
 Please state to the jury Pels 2 -Stet- 
 
 Jer 
 point of view Pent^Vee 
 
 R 
 
 Right of way Ray l -Tef- Way 
 right side of Ray^Iss-Def 
 right or wrong Ret^Ray-Ing 
 real estate ReP-Stet 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 157 
 
 Say to you Es 2 -Yuh 
 
 said to you Iss-Des 2 -Yuh 
 
 Sec. of State Skret 2 -Stet 
 
 Sec. of War Skret 2 -Wer 
 
 seem to be Semb 1 
 
 set off Iss-Tef 1 
 
 set forth Iss-Tef 2 
 
 shall have been Ish 2 -Ben 
 
 shall it 1st 2 
 
 shall not Ish 2 -Net 
 
 so far Es 2 -Ef 
 
 some time Smet 1 
 
 southeastern quarter Iss-Thes 2 - 
 
 Kayter 
 
 so far as you know Es 2 -Efs-En 
 step by step Steh-Pee 2 -Steh 
 such a one Iss-Chen 2 
 such are Iss-Cher 2 
 such ought to have Iss-Chef 1 
 such have Iss-Chef 2 
 such would have Iss-Chef 3 
 such ought to have had Iss-Cheft 1 
 such have had Iss Cheft 2 
 such would have had Iss-Cheft* 
 such were Iss-Cher 3 
 such would not Iss-Chent 3 
 
 Take it Tee 2 -Ket 
 
 that there Theether 1 
 
 they have. Thef 2 
 
 they have had Thef 2 -Dee 
 
 they ought Thet 1 
 
 they would Thet 3 
 
 they ought not Thent 1 
 
 they would not Thent" 
 
 they ought to have had Theft 1 
 
 they would have had Theft 3 
 
 they are all to have Threlf 2 
 
 there ought Thret 1 
 
 there would Thert 3 
 
 there will have Threlf - 
 
 the other Theether 2 
 
 the other one Theethern 2 
 
 to become Bee 3 -Kay 
 
 to be done Ben 3 
 
 to have Peftoid 2 
 
 to all Pletoid- 
 
 to our Pretoid 2 
 
 to ourselves Pretoid 2 -Ses 
 
 u 
 
 Upon it Pent 2 
 
 upon what Pent 1 
 
 up there Peether 2 
 
 upon there Pen 2 -Ther (tick) 
 
 up stairs Peesters 2 
 
 w 
 
 Was there Zeether 2 
 
 we are of Werf x 
 
 we can Klen 1 
 
 we cannot Klent 1 
 
 we could Klet 1 
 
 we gave Weh-Gef 1 
 
 we know Wen 1 
 
 we may be Wemb 1 
 
 we may have been Wemben 1 
 
 we mean Wemen 1 
 
 we meant Wement 1 
 
 we might Wemt 1 
 
 we were ) -^ , 
 
 we would } Enlarged weh 1 
 
 were we Enlarged weh 2 
 
 what we Enlarged wuh 1 
 
 would we Enlarged wuh 2 
 
 which are Cher 2 
 
 which are had Chert 3 
 
 which were Cher 3 
 
 which ought Chet 1 
 
 which it Chet 2 
 
 which would Chet 3 
 
 which ought to have Chef 1 
 
 which have Chef 2 
 
 which would have Chef 3 
 
 which ought not Chent 1 
 
 which would not Chent 3 
 
 which ought to have had Cheft 1 
 
 which would have had Cheft 3 
 
158 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 WRITING EXERCISE. 
 
 344. After all, as early as possible, as long as, as large as, as mucb 
 as, of all, all of, about as much, about as difficult, it will not be, it is the, 
 it is a, and it is the, and it is a, it is your, it is that, it is that which, it is 
 his, it is not, it is not that, it can, it cannot, it cannot be, it can be, it may, 
 it may have, it must, it must be, it must not, it must not be, it can 
 have, it cannot have. 
 
 (b) Which is, which is your, which is that, which can, which can- 
 not, which must, which must be, which must not be, and which was, and 
 which was not, which cannot give, which can give, which you, which 
 you may, which you will, which you can, which must probably, which 
 may probably, and which must have been, which is not, which the, 
 which he did, which should be, which should not be ; do you, do you 
 know, do you not know, do you not know that, do you think, do you 
 think, do you have, do you go, do you remember, do you make, do you 
 mean, does your, does it, do they, does not it; they may, they may 
 have, they may have been, they must, they must be, they must not be, 
 they must have been, and they must not be. 
 
 (c) They have, they have not, they have not been, they should 
 not have, they should not have been, they have not, they have not 
 become, and they have been, they have not done ; there was, there was 
 not, and there was not, there has never been, there can never be, there is, 
 there is nothing, and there cannot be, and there could not be, and there 
 could not have been ; this is, this is the, this is the way, this is 
 the best, this is the best way ; this was, this was not, this cannot be, 
 this could not be, was it, wasn't it, was done, wasn't done, wasn't your, 
 isn't your, did you, did you come, did you go, did you think, did you 
 know, did you know them, did you know that, did you know that they, 
 did you have, did they, did your, did you understand. 
 
 (d) You will, you will be, you will do, you will have, you will 
 probably, you will be there, you will not be, you will never be, you 
 should, you should not, you should not be, you should never be, you 
 are, you are doing, you may, you may have, you may think, you must, 
 you must be, you must not, you may not, you may not be, you cannot 
 be ; we are, we are very, we are very sure, we are probably, we are doing, 
 we are thinking, we are having, we are sure, we are pleased, we are cer- 
 tain, we are certain that you will, we shall, we shall be, we shall have, we 
 shall not have, we shall go, we shall do, we shall ask ; we will, we will 
 be, we will have, we will have your, we will have them, we will have 
 that, we will forward, we will forward them, we will ship, we will ship 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 159 
 
 them, we will ask, we will do, we limit, we always, we also, we mean, we 
 learn, we laugh, we must, we must not, we must be, we refer, we receive, 
 we render, we rejoice, we reply, we mean to be, we must also, we must 
 consider, we never, we knew, we require, we recommend, we resolved, we 
 will observe, we are well aware. 
 
 (e) What are, what are you, what are you going, what can be, what 
 will, what will it, when we think, when they were, I am, I may, I may 
 have, I may come, I must, I must be, I must not be, I will, I will do, I will 
 have, I will think, I will write, I will write you, I will write him, 
 I will ask, I will ask them, I can, I can be, I can have, I shall, 
 I shall not, I shall not be, I shall never be, I was, I was not, I was not 
 thinking, I didn't, I didn't think, I did not do, I did not have, I don't, 
 I don't know, I don't know that, I don't know them, I don't object, 
 I think, I think it is, I think it likely, I think so, I think that, I thank,! 
 thank you, I should think, I should not think, I should judge, I 
 should not judge, I became, I should become, I suppose, I take pleas- 
 ure, I take your, I say you are, I shall be there, I remember, I said, I 
 received, I ought, I ought not, I ought to have. 
 
 (f ) He may, he can, he must, he must be, he must not, he may, he 
 had not, he did not, he would not, he said, he took, he believed, he could 
 not, he cannot, he can, he referred, he represented, he gave, he was, he 
 became, he expected, he hoped, he tiled. 
 
 (g) And the, and he, and but. and they, and should, and I, and 
 ought, but he, but he became, but he did, but the payment, or you, and 
 you, and would, and what, or what, of \vhat, to what, as to, as to the, as 
 the, as he, as he thinks. 
 
 (h) We were, we would, were we, what we, what would, would we, 
 with you, were you, what you, would you, you would, you were 
 you were not, you were in, you would be, you were to be, we \\ere doing, 
 we were having, we were thinking. 
 
 (i) Estimated cost, distinguished citizens, District of Columbia, 
 very important, maintain your part, City of New York, National Bank, 
 Secretary of War, Secretary of State, step by step, ten thousand dol- 
 lars, one million, in all probability, there is certainly, by his own state- 
 ments, it appears to me, a near as you can. 
 
 ( j) From time to timt, from hour to hour, from day to day, from 
 year to year, year after year, day after day, over and above, farther and 
 farther, better and betl at wider and wider. 
 
160 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 REPORTING LIST. 
 
 345. The following list of word signs contains nearly all the more 
 common words of the language which require a special sign: They 
 occur frequently in any kind of literature, and the forms given to them 
 are brief and easy, while the full outlines of many of them would be 
 awkward and cumbersome. Their careful study will furnish an invalu- 
 able shorthand discipline, enabling the writer to reach a much greater 
 speed with them than without, and they render notes more legible by 
 furnishing absolute distinctions between words which would otherwise 
 conflict. Another great value in their study lies in the ability which it 
 gives the student to form, in analogy with them, short forms for many 
 similiar words. 
 
 We have preferred to use the nomenclature rather than the engraved 
 outlines in the following list, because there is a positive advantage to 
 be gained from the use of it which is not compensated for by having the 
 engraved form before the eye. When a student learns a list by con- 
 tinued copying from the engraved outline, he is apt to do so mechani- 
 cally and thoughtlessly, while if he had only the name of the outline 
 before him, he must make a mental image of the character and then 
 transfer it to paper. This slight mental effort will tend to fix the 
 character in the nrnd much more surely than the thoughtless copying 
 of engraved forms. We now speak only with reference to learning word- 
 signs, for the copying of engraved matter will tend to fix accuracy, and 
 establish a legible hand as nothing else will. There is a difference 
 between unthinking, mechanical copying and a wise and thoughtful 
 imitation of a perfect copy. He should practice unremittingly on each 
 outline until it can be made automatically and without the slightest 
 effort at recalling. 
 
 They are not difficult to learn when proceeded with properly, 
 although they may seem difficult at first. A few should be taken at a 
 time and perfectly learned by copying each form over and over again, 
 and practicing on them in short improvised sentences until the student 
 is familiar with their appearance in connected reading, and until they 
 can be read without stumbling. The practice of composing short 
 sentences in which they occur, and the reading and re-reading of these 
 sentences is of great benefit. It is well to analyze phcnographically the 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND, 
 
 161 
 
 word to determine what the full outline is, and then observe what part 
 of the full outline is taken to form the contraction. The contraction 
 will generally be found to be the accented syllable of the word, or some 
 part of the outline which is suggestive of the word. 
 
 The making of an outline over and over again, repeating its name 
 aloud as it is made, is one of the surest and most satisfactory ways of 
 growing familiar with phonographic outlines. Take, for instance, the 
 word agitate; to the average student the sound of this word suggests no 
 outline whatever, but after it is practiced upon for a short time 
 only, the sound of the word will instantly suggest the outline, Jet-Tec. 
 The memory, when drilled in a particular line, will improve very rap- 
 idly, and after a short discipline in the study of this list the student will 
 be surprised himself at the ease and facility with which he retains 
 phonographic outlines, for he will be able to remember any outline after 
 seeing it once only. 
 
 The figures i, 2, 3 denote the respective positions of the character 
 The figure 4 is used sometimes to indicate the position of a word placed 
 under a line to imply a preceding to. The colon is used to indicate that 
 the following stem is to be disjoined. The dagger is used to indicate that 
 one outline intersects another as in the word sign for notwithstanding. 
 
 The position of the derivative word generally follows that of the 
 primitive, no matter what may be the accented vowel; as, repute, 
 reputation; active, activity. 
 
 Absurd-ity Bees 2 -Ard 
 abuudant-ce Bend 2 
 abrupt Bee 2 -Ray-Pet 
 abstract Bees 3 -Ter 
 accept-ed-ation Iss-Pet 3 
 acceptable Iss-Pet 3 -Bel 
 accident-al Iss-Dent 2 
 accurate Kret 3 
 accuracy Ker 3 
 acquaint-ed-auce Kay 2 -Net 
 adjouru-ment Jern 3 
 addition-al Deeshun" 
 administer Dees 3 -Ter 
 adjust-ed-ment Jayst 2 
 admit-ed-ance Dee 1 -Met 
 admonish-ed-tion Dee '-Men 
 advance-ed Def 3 
 advancement Dees 3 -Ment 
 
 adventure Def 3 -Enter 
 advertise-d Dee 3 
 advertisement Dee 3 -Ment 
 advice Vees l 
 advise Vees ' 
 affect-ed Ef 3 
 affection-ate Efshun 3 
 agent Jay 2 -Net 
 agency Jay 2 -Es 
 aggregate-d-ion Ger 2 -Gay 
 agriculture Ger 2 -Kel 
 ah Hay 2 
 along Ing 3 
 America Em 2 -Kay 
 American Em 2 -Ken 
 amouut-ed Ment 2 
 angel Jel 2 
 angelic Jel 2 -Kay 
 annihilate En l -JCet 
 anniversary Vers 2 -Ray 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 annual Nel 3 
 anterior Net 3 
 anticipate-d Euts 1 -Pet 
 anticipation Euts-Pee 1 
 appear Per 1 
 appearance Prens 1 
 appliance Pleus 3 
 applicable Pel 3 -Bel 
 applicant Plent 3 
 application Pelshuu 3 
 apply Pel 3 
 apprehend Prend 3 
 apprehension -ive Pren 3 
 approve-al Pref 3 
 approximate-ed-ion Per 1 -Kays- 
 Met 
 
 arbitrary- ation Ar 3 -Bet 
 architect-ure-ural Ar 2 -Ket 
 aristocracy-crat Ars ;! -Tee 
 arrive-d Ref 1 
 artificial Ret : -Ef 
 assignment Es : -Ment 
 assist-ed-auce Es 2 -Stey 
 attain Ten 3 
 attainment Tee 3 -Merit 
 atonement Tee 2 -Ment 
 attract-ed Ter 3 
 attraction Tershun* 
 attractive Tref 8 
 auspicious Es^Pee 
 authority- tative Thret 1 
 average Vee 3 -Jay 
 averse Vers* 
 aversion Vershun 3 
 avert-ed Vert 3 
 avocation Veeshuu 3 
 avoid-ed-ance Ved 1 
 awful Deftoid 1 
 
 B 
 
 Bachelor Chler* 
 bauk-rupt Bee 3 -Ing 
 baptize-ist-isui Bee 2 -Pee 
 beauty-iful Bet 2 
 began Gen 3 
 begin Gen 1 
 begun Gen 2 
 behalf Bee 2 -Ef 
 behind Bend 1 
 belief Blef 2 
 
 believe-d Bel 2 
 belong-ed Bel 1 
 bounty-iful Bent 3 
 brethren Bren 3 
 build.built Belt 1 
 
 Calculate-ed Kel 3 
 California Clef 1 -Ray 
 Catholic Kay-Ith 2 
 certain-ty Iss-Ret 2 
 certificate Iss-Ret 2 -F 
 chair Cher 2 
 challenge-d Chel 2 -Jay 
 chamber Chay 2 -Ber 
 change-d Chay 2 
 chapter Chay 3 -Pet 
 character Ker 2 -Kay 
 characteristic Ker 2 -Kay-Stey 
 charge-d Chay 3 
 charity-able Chert 3 
 cheer-ed Cher 1 
 cheerful-ly Cherf l 
 child Cheld 1 
 children Chel 2 
 Christian Kren 1 
 circumstauce-tial Iss-Tens 3 
 citizen Iss-Ten 1 
 clerk, color Kler 2 
 collateral Kay 2 -Later 
 collect-or-tion Kel 2 -Kay 
 combine-ation Ben 1 
 commence-d-ment Ens 2 
 commercial Kay 2 -Mer 
 complete-d Plet 1 
 completion Pelshun 1 
 comply Pel 1 
 comprehend-ed Prend 2 
 comprehension-sive-ible Pren 2 
 conditiou-al Deeshun 2 
 couserve-ative Iss-Ref 2 
 consist-ed Ses-Tee 1 
 consistency Ses-Ten 1 
 conspicuous Iss-Pee^Kays 
 constituent Stey-Tent 1 
 constitute-d Stey-Tet 1 
 construct-ed Iss-Ter 2 
 construction Stershuu 2 
 contract-ed Ter 2 -Ket 
 contraction Tershun 2 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 168 
 
 contractive Tref 2 
 correct-ed-ion Ker 1 
 couut-ed-enauce Kent 3 
 cover-ing Kef 2 
 
 cross-examiue-tion Kers 2 -Men 
 curious Kers 3 
 
 D 
 
 Danger Jer 2 
 dangerous Jers 2 
 dark Der 3 
 darken Dren 3 
 darkness Drens 3 
 December Dees 2 -Em 
 defendant Dee 2 
 defense Def 2 
 deficieut-cy Dee 2 -Shay 
 deform-ity Dee 2 -Fer 
 degree Ger 1 
 delight-ed Diet 1 
 deliuquent-cy Dleu 1 
 deliver-ed Del 2 
 designate-d-tiou Dees 2 -Gay 
 demoralize Dee 2 -Em-Lays 
 demoralization Dee 2 -Em-Lays- 
 
 Eshun 
 
 denomiuate-d-tion Den 1 
 depravity Dee 3 -Pref 
 derivation Dref * 
 derivative Dref 1 
 derive Dref 1 
 describe-d Iss-Ker 1 
 description Iss-Kershun 1 
 determine-ation Dee 2 -Treu 
 detest-ed-ation Det 2 -Stee 
 develope-d-meut Def 2 -Pee 
 direct-ed Der 2 
 direction Dershun 2 
 director Der 2 -Ter 
 directory Der 2 -Ter 
 distinct-ion Dee^Stey 
 distinctiye Dee 2 -Stey-Vee 
 distinguish-ed Dee 2 -Stey-Ing 
 diguity-fied Dee 2 -Gay 
 dilapidate-d-tion Del 2 -Pet 
 disinterested Dees 2 -Nets-Tet 
 distribute-d-ion Dee'-Ster 
 district Dees 1 
 
 District of Columbia Dees'-Kel 
 divine-inity Def l 
 
 devolve-d Def 2 -Vee 
 doctor Der 1 
 dollar Dee 1 
 duration Dershun 3 
 dyspepsia-tic Dees 2 -Pee-Pee 
 
 Effect-ed Ef 2 -Kay 
 efficient-cy Ef 2 -Shay 
 electric-ity El 2 -Kay 
 England Ingend 1 
 English Ing 1 
 Englishman Ingen 1 
 entertainment Net-Tee 2 -Meut 
 enthusiasm-tic Eu-ith 3 -Ses 
 envelope-d En-Vee 2 -Pee 
 equivalent Kef 1 
 especial-ly Es 2 -Pee 
 eternal-ity Tren 2 
 evening Veil 1 
 evidence Ved 2 
 exact-ly-ness Sket 3 
 exaction Skayshun 3 
 exaggerate Iss-jert 2 
 exaggeratory Iss-jert 2 -Ray 
 exaggeration Iss-Jershun 2 
 examine-ation Iss-Men 2 
 examined Iss-Mend 2 
 example Iss-Emp 3 
 exasperate-d-ation Ses-Pee 3 
 exceeding-ly Iss-Dee 1 
 except-ed Iss-Pet 2 
 exception-al Iss-Peeshun 2 
 exclude-d Iss-Klet 2 
 exclusive Skels : Vee 2 
 exclusion Skelshun 2 
 excuse-able Skays 3 
 executor Kay 2 -Iss-Kayter 
 executrix Kays 2 -Kay 
 exhibit-ed Iss-Bet 1 
 exhibition Iss-Beeshun 1 
 exist-ed Ses-Tee 2 
 existence Ses-Tens 2 
 expand-ed Spend 3 
 expanse Speus 3 
 expansion-ive Spen 3 
 expect-ed-tation Iss-Pee 2 
 expedient Spet 1 
 expedition Kays-Pet 1 
 expense Speus 2 
 
164 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 expensive Spen 2 
 experience Sprens 2 
 experienced Spreust 2 
 explain-ed Splen a 
 explanatory Splen 2 -Tee-Ray 
 explicit Spels * 
 explore-d-ion Spier 2 
 express Spers 2 
 expressed Sper 2 -Stey 
 expression Spershun 2 
 exquisite Skays 1 
 extend-ed Stend 2 
 extension-ive Sten 1 
 external Iss-Tren 1 
 extinction Kay-Iss-Tee 2 
 extract Iss-Ter 3 
 extraction Iss-Tershun 3 
 extractive Iss-Tref 3 
 extraordinary Iss-Ter 2 -Ard 
 extravagant Stref 3 
 extreme Iss-Ter 2 
 extremity Iss-Ter 2 -Tee 
 
 Fact Ef 2 
 
 fail Pel 2 
 
 failed Feld 2 
 
 failure Fler 1 
 
 fall Fel 1 
 
 false Fels l 
 
 falsification Fels 1 -Eshun 
 
 family Mel 3 
 
 fashion Efshun 3 
 
 favorite Ef 2 -Vert 
 
 feature Fet 1 
 
 February Ef 2 -Bee 
 
 feel Fel 1 
 
 fiction Efshuu 1 
 
 fill Fell 
 
 finance-ial Fen 2 -En 
 
 follow Fel 1 
 
 follower Fler 1 
 
 fool Fel 3 
 
 forge Ef 2 -Jay 
 
 forger Ef 2 -Jer 
 
 forui-ed Fer 1 
 conform Con-dotiFer 1 
 deform Dee 1 -Fer 
 inform En 1 -Fer 
 perform Per 2 -Fer 
 
 reform Rayi-Fer 
 transform Ters 2 -Fer 
 uniform En-Fer 3 
 
 formal Fer 1 -Lay 
 
 formation Fershun 1 
 
 former-ly Fer J -Ar 
 
 formless Fer 1 -Lays 
 
 fortune-ate Fret 1 
 
 forth Ef 2 -Ith 
 
 found-ed-ation Fend 3 
 
 fraction Fershun :l 
 
 frank Fer 3 -Kay 
 
 Franklin Fer 3 -Klen 
 
 frantic Fret 3 -Kay 
 
 free Fer 2 
 
 frequency Frent 1 
 
 fuller Fler 2 
 
 fruition Fershun 3 
 
 furnish-ed-iture Fren 2 
 
 future-ity Fet 3 
 
 G 
 
 Generalize Jens 2 
 generalized Jeu 2 -Stey 
 generalization jens 2 -Eshuu 
 gentile Jet 2 -El 
 gentile Jay 2 -Net 
 generation jayshuu 2 
 geography Jay 2 -Ger 
 glory Gel 2 
 
 glorification Gel 2 -Efshun 
 glorious Gels 2 
 govern-ed-meut Gef 2 
 governor Gef 2 -Ray 
 gracious Ger 2 -Ish 
 grand-eur Grend 3 
 gravity-ate-iou Ger 2 -Vet 
 Great Britain Gret 2 -Bret 
 guilt-y Glet 1 
 
 H 
 
 Half Ef 3 
 halve Vee 3 
 handwriting Nert 3 
 happy Pee 3 
 happiest Pee 3 -Stey 
 happiness Pens 3 
 hazard-ed-ous Zee 2 -Ard 
 henceforth Ens 2 -Ef 
 hereafter Reft- 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND 
 
 165 
 
 heretofore Ret 2 -Ef 
 hesitate-d-ion Zed 2 
 history-leal Est'-Ray 
 holy Hay 3 
 horticulture Art^Kel 
 hundred-th End 2 
 hypocrisy Pee 1 -Ker 
 hypocrite-ical Pee J -Kret 
 
 I 
 
 Idle-ness Del 1 
 identical Ded 2 -Kel 
 identification Dent 2 -Efshun 
 ignorance Nerns 1 
 illegal-ity El 2 -Gel 
 imagine-ary-ation Jen 3 
 immoral Merl 1 
 immortal -ity Mert 1 
 impassioned Emp 3 -Shund 
 impatient Emp 2 -Shunt 
 impenetrable-ility Empent 2 
 iincompetent En-Pent- 
 indefatigable End-Fet 2 
 indenmify-ity Ned 1 -Em 
 indenture End 2 -Ent 
 iudependent-ce End-Pend 2 
 indiguant-ion-ity End'-Gay 
 individual Ned^Ved 
 individuality End J :Ved 
 indulge End-Jay 2 
 infer En-Ef 2 
 inference En-Efs 2 
 inferior-ity En-Ef 1 
 infinite Neft 1 
 infinitude Neft^Dee 
 information Enshun 1 
 inhabit-ed-ant En-Bet 2 
 inquiry En^Wer 
 insecurity In-Scret 3 
 insignificant Ens J -Gay 
 integrity Net 2 -Gret 
 intellect-ual-ality Net 1 -Ket 
 iustinct-ive Enst 1 
 intelligible Net-jay 2 
 intemperate Net J -Emp 
 instruct-ive Ins-Ter 2 
 instruction Ins-Tershun 2 
 instructor Ins-Ter 2 -Ter 
 intercession Nets 2 -Eshun 
 interior Net 1 
 
 internal Ter 1 
 interpret-ed-ion Net-Pret 2 
 intrinsic Entern 1 
 introduction Net-Deeshun 2 
 irrelevancy Ar 2 -Lay-Ven 
 irresistible Ar 2 -Ses-Tee 
 irresponsible Ar 2 -Spen 
 
 January Jay 2 -En 
 Jehovah Jef 1 
 judicial Jed 1 -Ish 
 judiciary Jed^Sher 
 judicious jed^Shay 
 junior jer 3 
 
 jurisdiction jers 2 -Eshun 
 jury Jer 3 
 justice Jay 2 -Stey 
 justify-iable Jays 2 -Ef 
 justification Jays 2 -Eshun 
 
 Large Jay 3 
 larger Jer 3 
 largest Jayst 3 
 length Ing 3 
 lengthy Ing 3 -Ith 
 lengthen Ingen 3 
 lengthened Ingend 3 
 liberty Ber 1 
 little Let 1 
 long Ing 3 
 longer Inger 3 
 
 M 
 
 Magnificent-cy Em 1 -Gay 
 market Mert 2 
 majority Etn^Jert 
 malicious Mel-Ish 1 
 malignant-ce Mel 1 -Gay 
 manager Em-jer 3 
 madufacture-ed-ory Em-En-Ef 2 
 Massachusetts Ems 3 -Chay 
 meanwhile Em 1 -Nel 
 Mediterranean Med-Tren 2 
 memory-andum Eni-Eni 2 
 measure Zher 3 
 mental-ity Ment 2 
 mention Emshun 2 
 
166 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 mentioned Emshund 
 mercy-fill Mer 2 
 messenger Em-Iss-Jer 2 
 million Mel 1 
 minute Ment 1 
 moral-ity Merl 2 
 mortal-ity Mert 2 
 metropolitan Emter-Pel 2 
 minority Em-Nert 1 
 misfortune Ems-Fret 1 
 mortgage Mer-Gay 1 
 mortgagee Mer-Gay-Jay 2 
 movement Ment 3 
 
 N 
 
 Necessary En-Ses 2 
 neglect-ful En-Gay 2 
 negligent-ce En-Gel 2 
 New Jersey En-Jay 2 
 New York En 2 -Yay 
 New York City En 2 -Yays 
 New York State Eu 2 -Yay-Stev 
 north Ner 1 
 northern Nern 1 
 North America Ner '-Em 
 nothing En-Ith- 
 November En-Vee 2 
 
 o 
 
 Obligation Belshun 2 
 obligatory Bel 2 -Get 
 observe-d-ation Bees 2 -Ray 
 omnipotent-ce Men-Pee - 
 only Nel 2 
 
 opposition Pees^Eshun 
 oppression Pershun 3 
 order-ed Arder 1 
 ordinary Ard 1 
 organ Gen 1 
 organic Gen 1 -Kay 
 organism Gey ' -Sem 
 organization Gens'-Eshun 
 organize Gens 1 
 organized Genst 1 
 original Ray '-Jen 
 overwhelm-ed Ver 2 -El 
 owner Ner 3 
 
 Parallel Prel 2 
 parliament Prel 3 
 parliamentarian prelen* 
 party Pee 3 
 patent Pet 3 
 patentable Pet 3 -Bel 
 passenger Pee 3 -Iss-Jer 
 pecuniary-ily Pee 2 -Ken 
 Pennsylvania Pees 2 -Vee 
 perfect Pref 1 
 perfected Pref l Ket 
 perfection Pershun 
 perform-ed-ance Per 2 -Fer 
 permanent-ance Per 2 -Meu 
 pernicious Pren 1 
 perpendicular-ly Per 2 -Pen 
 perpetual-ate-iou Pee 2 -Ray-Pet 
 philanthropy-ic-ist FeP-Euter 
 Philadelphia Flet 2 -Ef 
 plaintiff Plent* 
 platform Plet 2 -Fer 
 plenty-iful Plent 2 
 popular-ity Pee 1 -Pee 
 position Pees^Eshun 
 possess-ed Pee-Ses- 
 possession Pees 3 -1C shun 
 possible- ity Pees l 
 possibilities Pee-Ses 1 
 poverty Pef l 
 power Pee 3 -Ray 
 powerful Pee 3 -Ref 
 practicable-ility Per 3 -Ket 
 practice-ical Per 3 
 practiced Per 3 -Stey 
 predominate-ed-ioii-auce Pred 1 - 
 
 Men 
 
 prejudice-d-cial Per 2 -Jed 
 preliminary Prel 1 
 prepare-ed-ation-itory Per 2 -Pee- 
 
 Ray 
 
 present Pers 2 
 present-ed-ation Pers 2 -Net 
 pretentiou Per 2 -Ten 
 pretty Pret 2 
 prodigious Pred'-Jay 
 product Per 2 -Dee 
 production Per 2 -Deeshun 
 professor Pref 2 
 proficient-cy Per 2 -Ef-Shay 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 167 
 
 profit-ed-able Preft 1 
 prominent-ce Per 1 -Men 
 promulgate-d-ion Mel 2 
 proof Pref 2 
 proper Per 1 
 property Per 1 -Pee 
 proportion-ed Per 2 -Peeshuu 
 propriety Per 1 (voc. with I) 
 prospect-ed-ous Pers 1 -Pee 
 prove Pref 2 
 providen t-ce Preft 1 
 public-ish-ation Pee 2 -Bee 
 pulpit Pel 2 :Pet 
 punctual-ity Pee 3 -Ing 
 punish-ed-meut Pen 2 
 
 Quality Klet 1 
 qualification Kel-Efshun a 
 question-ed Ken 2 
 questionable Ken 2 -Bee 
 questioner Ken 2 -Ar 
 
 Rational Rayshun 3 
 
 rapid-ity Ray 2 -Pet 
 
 ratification Ret 2 -Efshun 
 
 real-ity Rel 1 
 
 realize Rels 1 
 
 recollect-ed-tion Ray 2 -Kel-Kay 
 
 reflect-ed-ion Ray 2 -Ef-Kay 
 
 reform Ray^Fer 
 
 reformation Rayshun 2 
 
 relate-d-ion ReP 
 
 relative Reltive 2 
 
 relevancy ReP-Ven 
 
 religion Jen 1 
 
 religious jays 1 
 
 reluctant-ce Rel 2 -Ket 
 
 repeat-d-ion Ray 1 -Pet 
 
 republic-ish-ed-ation Ray *-Pee-Bec 
 
 republican Ray 2 -Pee-Ben 
 
 repute-d-ion Ray 3 -Pet 
 
 reserve-d-ation Rays 2 -Ray 
 
 resignation Rays 2 -Gay 
 
 respect-ed-ful-fu'lly Rays 2 -Pee 
 
 respectable Rays 2 -Pee-Bel 
 
 respective Rays 2 -Pef 
 
 reveal Ref J 
 
 revelation Layshun 2 
 
 revolution Layshun 3 
 revolve-d Ref 1 
 rnle-d ReP 
 ruler ReP-Ray 
 
 Sanguine Iss-Iugen 2 
 sanguinary Iss-Ingen 2 -Ray 
 satisfy-ed-actory Iss-Tee 3 
 satisfaction Iss-Teeshun 3 
 Savior Iss-Vee 2 
 scale SkeP 
 scholar Skier 1 
 scientific Es J -Net 
 scripture-al Sker 1 
 security Skret 3 
 September Spet-Em 2 
 share Sher 3 
 signature Iss-Gay l -Net 
 significance-ation Iss-Gens 1 
 significant Iss-Gay 1 
 signify-ed Iss-Gay 1 
 similar-ity Iss-Em J 
 singular-ity Iss-Gler 1 
 situated Iss-Tet 1 
 situation Iss-Teeshun 1 
 skill SkeP 
 skillful Sklef 1 
 somebody Iss-Emb 2 
 South America Iss-Ith 2 -Em 
 south-east Iss-Thee 2 -Stey 
 south-eastern Iss-Thes 2 -Ren 
 south-west Iss-Wayst 2 
 south-western Iss-Ways 2 -Ren 
 southern Iss-Then 2 
 speak Spec 1 
 special-ity Spec 3 
 spoken Spen l 
 spontaneous-ity Spent 1 
 standard Stet 2 -Ard 
 strange-ness Stren 2 
 stranger Iss-Ter 2 -Jer 
 strength Ster 2 -Ith 
 strengthen Ster 2 -Then 
 stupendous Stey-Pend 2 
 stupid-ity Stey-Pet 3 
 sublime-ity Iss-Bel 1 
 subordinate-ive-ion Iss-Bee 1 
 substantial-ity Iss-Bee 2 -Stee 
 sufficient-cy Iss-Ef 2 -Shay 
 
168 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 suggest-ed-ive Iss-Jay 2 
 stiperintend-ed-etit-ence Sprent 2 
 superior-ity Iss-Spee 1 
 superlative Sprel- 
 supernatural Spren 3 
 supplication Spelshun 2 
 supply Spel 2 
 suppress Spers 3 
 surprise Spers 1 
 suspension-ive Ses-Pen 2 
 suspicious Ses-Pee 1 
 swindle Iss-Way * -Del 
 
 Take Tee 2 
 
 take it Tee 2 -Ket 
 
 mistake Ems-Tee 2 
 
 overtake Vert l - Kay 
 
 partake Pret 2 -Kay 
 
 retake Art 2 -Kay 
 
 undertake .End-Tee 2 
 taken Ken 2 
 tend-ed-ency Tend 2 
 thankful Thef 3 
 technical-ity Tee 2 -Kay 
 telegram Tel 2 -Em 
 telegraph-er-ic Tel 2 -Ger 
 temperate Tee 2 -Emp 
 temperament Tee 2 -Enip-Ment 
 temperature Tee 2 -Emper 
 tenement Tee 2 -Ment 
 terminate-d-ion Ter 2 -Men 
 testify-ed Tees 2 -Ef 
 testimony Tees 2 -Em 
 testimonial Tees 2 -Em-Nel 
 Texas Tee 2 -Ses 
 texture Tee-Ster 2 
 thousand Ith 3 
 time Tee 1 
 tolerate-d-ion Tier 2 
 took Tee 3 
 tragedy Ter 2 -jed 
 tragic Ter 2 -Jay 
 transient Ter 2 -En-Shent 
 tranquil-lity Terming 
 transfer-red Ters 2 -Ef 
 trial Trial 1 
 
 tuition Teeshun 1 
 twelve-th Tlef 2 
 
 u 
 
 United States En-Ses 1 
 uniform-ity En 2 -Fer 
 unimportant En^Emp 
 unimproved En 2 -Emp 
 universe Vers 2 
 universal Vers 2 -Lay 
 university Ver 3 -Iss-Tee 
 unless Nels 1 
 unsecured Ins-Kret 3 
 useful-ness Esef 3 
 
 Valid-ity Vee 2 -Eld 
 vegitate-ed-ion Vee 2 -Jet 
 vengeance Vee 2 -jens 
 Virginia Vee'-jay 
 version Vershun 2 
 virtue Vert 2 
 vice versa Vee 2 :Ver 
 vocation Veeshun 2 
 void-ed-ance Ved 1 
 
 w 
 
 Warrant-ed-able Wernt 1 
 will-ing-ingness Lay 2 
 will (noun) Wei 1 
 woman Weman 2 
 women Wemen 1 
 wonder-ful-ly Wender 2 
 work Wer 2 
 workman Wern 2 
 workmen Wern 2 
 workingman Wer 2 Ingen 
 workingmen Wer 2 -Ingen 
 worship Wer 2 -Ish 
 
 Yield-ed Yeld 1 
 year-s Yeh l 
 yealy Yeh 1 -El 
 yes Yay : 
 yes sir Yays 2 
 yesterday Yeh 2 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 169 
 
 WORDS DISTINGUISHED. 
 
 346. There are many words which are capable of being represented 
 by the same phonographic outline, but to avoid confusion and delay in 
 reading, they should be distinguished by some difference of outline or 
 position. The following is a partial list of such words, some of which 
 the student has already learned, but they are here gathered in a con- 
 venient form for study, and when these distinctions are made thoroughly 
 familiar the student will be able to form distinctions for himself when 
 occasion requires. 
 
 Special Spec 3 
 especial Es 2 -Pee 
 
 provide Pref J -Dee 
 private Per 1 -Vet 
 
 pursue Pee 3 -Ray-Es 
 oppress Pers 3 
 peruse Pee 3 -Rays 
 
 proportion Per 2 -Peeshun 
 appropriation Per 2 -Pershun 
 
 purport Pee 2 -Ray-Pret 
 appropriate Per 2 -Pret 
 prepare-d-ation Per 2 -Pee-Ray 
 
 Prussian Pershun 2 
 Persian Pee 2 -Ray-Ishn 
 Parisan Pee 1 -Rayshun 
 portion Pee 2 -Rayshun 
 apportion Pee 3 -Rayshun 
 perfection Pershun 1 
 operation Pershun 2 
 oppression Pershun 3 
 
 proffer Pref^Ray 
 prefer Pref 2 -Ray 
 approver Pref 3 -Ray 
 
 partner Pret 2 -Ner 
 
 part owner Pret 3 -Ner (voc.) 
 
 spread Spret 2 
 separate Spret 2 (voc.) 
 support Spec 2 -Ret 
 
 power, pure Pee 3 -Ray 
 poor Pee 3 -Ar 
 
 appeal Pee^L/ay 
 compel Pee 2 -Lay 
 comply Pel 1 
 apply Pel 3 
 
 prohibition Per^Beeshun 
 probation Per 2 -Beeshuu 
 approbation Per 3 -Beeshun 
 
 pertain Pee 2 -Ret-En 
 appertain Per^-Ten 
 patient Peeshunt 2 
 passionate Peeshun 3 -Tee 
 
 perhaps, propose Per^-Pees 
 purpose Pee 2 -Pees 
 
 protect Pret 2 -Kay 
 product Per 2 -Dee 
 perdition Per'-Deeshuu 
 production Per 2 -Deeshun 
 protection Pret 2 -Kayshun 
 
 persecute 
 prosecute 
 
 Pee 2 -Rays-Ket 
 Pers^Ket 
 
 persecution 
 prosecution 
 
 Pee 2 -Rays-Kayshuu 
 Pers 1 -Kayshun 
 
 completion Pelshun 1 
 complexion Pelshun 2 
 application Pelshun 3 
 compilation Pee^Lay-Shun 
 
 prompt Per 1 -Met 
 permit Per 2 -Met 
 promote Per 3 -Met 
 
 traitor Ter 2 -Ter 
 trader Tred 2 -Ar 
 
170 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 breath Ber 2 -Ith 
 birth Bee-Ray-"Ith 
 situation Steeshun 1 
 station Steeshun 2 
 satisfaction Steeshun 3 
 
 extension Sten 2 
 extenuation steu 2 -Ishn 
 
 turn Tee 2 -Ren 
 train Treu 2 
 
 attainable Ten 3 Bee 
 tenable Tee 2 -En-Bel 
 terrible Tee 2 -Ray-Bel 
 trouble Ter 2 -Bel 
 
 strife Stref 1 
 starve Stey 3 -Ref 
 
 transfer Ters 2 Ef 
 transform Ters 2 -Fer 
 
 disease Deeses 1 
 decease Dees'-Es 
 
 device 
 advice Vees 1 
 
 daughter Dee 1 -Ter 
 deter, editor Dee 2 -Ter 
 
 doubter Det 3 -Ar 
 auditor Det 1 -Ar 
 duration Dersnun 3 
 adoration Dee 2 Rayshun 
 distribute Deester 2 -(Bet) 
 disturbed Dee 2 -Ster-Bet 
 destine Dee 2 -Sten 
 destiny Deest 2 En 
 unavoidable En-Ved^Bel 
 inevitable En-Vet 2 -Bel 
 instead of Ens 2 -Def 
 inside of Ens 1 -Def (voc.) 
 collision Kelshun 1 
 calculation Kelshun 3 
 coalition Kay : -Layshun 
 collusion Kay 3 -L,ayshun 
 accordance Kred 1 
 credence Ker-Dens 2 
 expert Kays 2 -Pret 
 export Kays 2 -Pret (voc) 
 expired Kays-Pee J -Ard 
 
 column KeP-Em 
 claim-Kel 2 -Em 
 
 God Ged 1 
 guide Gay-Dee 1 
 good Ged 2 
 
 greatly Gret 2 -Lay 
 gradually Gred 3 -Lay 
 
 favorite Ef 2 -Vert 
 favored Ver 3 
 
 effect Ef 2 -Kay 
 affect Ef 3 -Kay 
 
 from Fer 1 
 firm Fer 2 -Em 
 farm Ef 3 -Ar-Em 
 
 finally Ef'-Nel 
 finely Fen 1 :Lay 
 
 valuable Vel 3 Bel 
 available Vee 2 -Lay-Bel 
 
 theory Ith x -Ray 
 thorough Ith 2 -Ray 
 through Ther 3 
 therefore Ther 2 -Ef 
 therefor Ther 2 :Ef 
 ascend Es 2 -End 
 assigned Esnd 1 
 unsociable Ins-Ish 2 -Bel 
 insatiable Ens 2 -Shay-Bel 
 embarrass Emb 3 -Rays 
 embrace Em 2 -Bers 
 renewed Ray 3 En-Dee 
 ruined Ray 3 -Ned 
 repeat Ray 1 -Pet 
 rapid Ray 2 -Pet 
 repute Ray 3 -Pet 
 diminish Dee 1 Men 
 dominate Dee 2 Men 
 admonish Dee 3 Men 
 alcohol El 2 -Kay-El 
 alkali EPKel 
 migrate Em^Gret 
 immigrate Em^Gret (voc.) 
 emigrate Em 2 Gret 
 Mrs. Em-Iss-Es 2 
 Misses Emses 1 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 171 
 
 HOW TO FORM CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 347. In the reporting of technical matter many new, and often long 
 and clumsy outlines will be encountered, and the reporter should, if 
 possible, read up on the subject to become somewhat familiar with the 
 vernacular, and to construct easy outlines for frequently recurring words 
 and phrases. Special contractions when familiarized in connection with 
 certain kinds of subject matter might thus be allowable, which would 
 not be safe in general reporting. In the formation of a contraction 
 regard must be had to legibility, brevity, and convenience of forming 
 derivatives. Merd, for instance, would be a legible, brief and conven- 
 ient outline for hemorrhoid in reporting medical matter, because it may 
 be properly vocalized, and the derivative, hemorrhoidal, is easily formed 
 by adding Lay. The word or phrase which it is proposed to contract 
 must first be correctly analyzed, and then such parts selected as will be 
 most suggestive, or most easily made. The shorthand initials may be 
 used for a phrase of frequent occurrence, but these shorthand initials 
 must be thoroughly learned as word signs ; as, Ar-Kav, for Roman Cath- 
 olic; Jay -En, for Jesus of Nazareth. A more frequent method is the 
 employment of two or more suggestive stems for the phrase ; as, Spee- 
 Kel, for spinal column ; Ems-Enter for Michigan Central. 
 
 METHOD OF PRACTICE. 
 
 348. The student should enter upon the practice and study of 
 shorthand with enthusiasm. He cannot become too interested or 
 too enthusiastic, and his mind must run in a groove until the 
 whole theory and practice is mastered. There is one thing about short- 
 hand which cannot be said of any other science, unless perhaps it be 
 arithmetic, and that is, that it is a complete science, and the end of its 
 study may be reached in a comparatively short time. It does not require 
 a very long time to master all the principles, but there is hardly any 
 limit to manual dexterity. The mind must deal constantly with short- 
 hand characters ; it must think in outlines all during the progress of the 
 study. The student need have no fear that it will narrow his mind ; on 
 the contrary, it will strengthen and intensify it. His ear becomes more 
 acute, his intelligence more on the qui vive to -watch ideas and their 
 orderly marshalling. While listening to a conversation, a sermon, or a 
 speech, he should follow in his mind the shorthand characters for every 
 word uttered, tracing a mental image of the same, or tracing on the 
 thumb the shorthand forms. The larger part of the student's early prac- 
 
172 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 tice should be copying engraved exercises. The continued copying of 
 well written matter will advance one much more surely and quickly than 
 the careless writing of many volumes of new matter without any attempt 
 at correcting and improving forms. Every time an error is detected and 
 corrected the student may feel sure he has made some progress. Or, if 
 he is so well disciplined as to write correctly from the start, he will save 
 himself much unnecessary labor, and his progress will be sure. 
 
 The secret of expertness in shorthand is the same as in every other 
 line of manual or mental skill. It lies in perfect familiarity with the 
 subject matter and this familiarity is reached only by wise and intelli- 
 gent practice. Great skill is reached in any kind of manual craft only 
 by constant and thoughtful practice, a practice which is always on the 
 alert to avoid errors, and to detect and correct them when once made. 
 The pianist, in acquiring delicacy of touch, the painter in acquiring a 
 mastery over the technique of his art, attains it only by long continued 
 practice. Haphazard and unthinking practice is productive of more 
 harm than good. One short selection, it matters little what, if practiced 
 upon unremittingly until every outline can be made correctly, easily and 
 swiftly will advance the student much more than days and days of 
 writing from a too rapid dictation on new matter. The correct outlines 
 of the selection should be determined before it is practiced upon, and 
 then it should be gone over and over again until every phrase is im- 
 proved upon to the utmost, and the writing is as legible as longhand. 
 
 The student will find in beginning to read shorthand that certain 
 words will conflict unless made with extreme accuracy, and the young 
 writer must guard against some very common faults of outline, such as 
 sloping an upright letter, as Tee or Dee, or making an inclined letter 
 upright, such as Pee or Bee. Thus, " it was " will conflict with " which 
 was " unless the proper slope be given to the which, or it be made per- 
 fectly upright. The upright letter should be made perfectly upright, 
 and the inclined letter should be given its due slope. The student 
 should also guard against lapsing into careless habits of shading. Give 
 all the shaded characters their proper shading. It is too important and 
 distinctive a feature of shorthand to be disregarded. Plain distinctions 
 should be made between the rounded curves of the brief Ways and the 
 Petoid word signs with a final tick. Thus, " of the " is mistaken for 
 "what." The making of an En the shape of an Ef, and all similiar 
 deviations from the ideal form will cause infinite trouble in reading 
 unless corrected by constant practice. We have seen notes which were 
 marvels of illegibility solely because of slight abberations from the 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 173 
 
 standard forms, and we have seen these same students continue in their 
 old way of reproducing mistake after mistake in their practice, think- 
 ing it conscientious practice, and wondering why their progress was 
 unsatisfactory. Such practice is utterly worthless. Neither should the 
 student endeavor to draw his notes accurately, for absolutely painful 
 copper-plate notes is the abomination of abominations, as they preclude 
 the possibility of any degree of speed. Speed must be attained, as 
 well as legibility, and the two must go hand in hand. 
 
 'The shorthand writer will meet with all sorts of awkward expres- 
 sions which puzzle him to read unless he is careful to make proper dis- 
 tinctions in his notes, and his judgment must be constantly exercised in 
 his notes, and his judgment must be constantly exercised in determin- 
 ing whether he will describe the exact words of the speaker or will 
 change the words or vary the construction without changing the exact 
 ideas intended by the speaker. How far he can do this will depend upon 
 circumstances. In reporting a trial at law the exact words of the wit- 
 ness should generally be transcribed. It is not for the stenographer to 
 put a construction upon the words of the witness. Manifest errors and 
 repetitions should, of course, be eliminated. Sometimes the tones of 
 the speaker's voice will express more than his words, and when peculiar 
 meanings are brought out by the speaker by emphasis or inflection, and 
 can be denoted in print by underscoring or other marks, they should be 
 so employed in transcribing. 
 
 READING. 
 
 349. From the very nature and character of shorthand writing, it 
 follows that the reading of shorthand notes is not as easy a matter as 
 reading print, and the student can acquire skill in reading shorthand 
 only in one way, and that is by a vast amount of practice in the reading 
 of shorthand. Of course, the more nearly the shorthand outlines 
 resemble the perfect forms of the engraved characters, the easier will 
 the reading become, and to make easy reading the student should strive 
 to make accurate notes. As soon as the learner begins dictation he 
 should make it a rule to read over everything he writes. Time spent on 
 reading shorthand is never wasted, though the student is too prone to 
 think so. He should not allow himself to read hastily or carelessly, but 
 carefully and accurately at every step, and with the utmost painstaking 
 over the smallest and seemingly most unimportant and readily supplied 
 ticks. This habit should be resolutely adhered to throughout his 
 whole study, for it will save much useless labor. It is not judicious and 
 
174 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 beneficial practice for a student to write page after page from rapid 
 dictation which he knows he cannot read easily, and is fearful lest he 
 cannot read at all, but he should write slowly and with a confident feel- 
 ing of his ability to read his notes fluently. Shorthand is always legible 
 when well written, though easy reading requires some experience. Both 
 engraved shorthand and notes of actual work should be used in reading 
 practice. It may almost be said that the reading of shorthand is an art 
 in itself, and can be mastered in no other way than by much practice iu 
 reading. The mind must be on the alert to watch the meaning. It is a 
 mark of a high order of reporting to follow all the ideas closely, and to 
 take the liberty of arranging the language in grammatical form, if not the 
 thoughts in logical order. The ability to read shorthand rapidly tends 
 to increase speed in writing by removing the hesitation which arises from 
 lack of confidence in reading notes. Going over the same ground in 
 any kind of labor is of the utmost importance. Carlyle says, " The old 
 Romans plowed their fields fourteen times because fourteen times were 
 better than thirteen." And it is so in shorthand ; the reading of a pa_ge 
 of well-written shorthand notes fourteen times is better than the 
 reading of it once or the reading of it thirteen times. This applies 
 to the reading of one's own notes as well as to engraved exercises. We 
 cannot too often reiterate the great value of much practice in reading 
 shorthand notes, for it gives that intimate acquaintance with shorthand 
 forms which produces speed. The ability to make the proper outlines 
 instantly and without any hesitation in writing is the result of familiar- 
 ity with shorthand material, and reading becomes valuable as an aid to 
 speed in writing because it brings this familiarity. It is comparatively an 
 easy matter to learn to write one hundred words a minute, but to go be- 
 yond that, to add another hundred words per minute, requires an outlay of 
 patient study and practice which should not be lightly estimated. Every 
 writer will pass through a stage of practice when an unaccountable 
 hesitation will possess him, and seems the only barrier to speed. The 
 outlines are tolerably familiar, but the mind becomes at times balky. 
 Here, again, increased familiarity with forms and outlines is the only 
 remedy, and further practice and reading the only means of obtaining it. 
 The student should not halt or pause after making an outline, but 
 should go on with the next outline without perceptible loss of time. 
 The hand should move over the paper with a perfectly steady, uniform 
 motion, and with a certain rythm which has been called the balancing 
 movement of the hand, similar to the movement of the body of a swift 
 skater or bicycle rider. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 175 
 
 A JUST JUDGE. 
 
176 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 --fc-t^ 1 -^- 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 -tr~7 
 
 iVL v 
 
 X 
 
 ^_._! 
 
 '/ ' \ ( c 
 /-^->- k 
 
 7 
 
 JS-sJL.tL 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 177 
 
 --? _ /^ e I - v 
 
 J. V^ o _So t 
 
 
178 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 .LIZl 
 
 BUSINESS AND OFFICIAL LETTERS. 
 
 /T 
 
 >r\ 
 
 > V 
 
 ^^v 
 
 V^A; 
 
 '; 
 
 V 
 
 __________ ..... L 
 
 ^ 
 
 f \ ..- 
 
 ..... ........ 
 
 _, 
 
 -K 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 179 
 
180 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND, 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 181 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 
 vi. 
 
 ^-/.. f 
 
 A I 
 
 * 
 
 .I.... 
 
 r\.l...l/..<u., 
 
182 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 ^ -- 1 ">V / -^S 
 
 * ^^ 
 
 
 JS~ 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 183 
 
184 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 SOCIAL LETTERS. 
 
 / U \ x-> 
 
 ' 
 
 y 
 
 -^-H^ 
 
 X/ ' .i^^rvJVi 
 
 \^ 
 
 i^JJi^i 
 
 s*- 
 
 J 
 ,^^-ov 
 
 -// 
 
 ^ ^^<U 
 ~~A ~"'~~~ 
 
 ^^ 'ibr 7 
 
 -V-i.^. 
 
 <ta.^X-I^\ ..^. )j/__.....^. U|..../ 
 
 ' ^ U / 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 185 
 
 . /?/0fl HAQGARD. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 ZLiLl.e** 
 
 L.I. 
 
 / 
 
 1 yj i " f " ^ L i " 
 -^- L ^^-^^fc^r 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 187 
 
 THE ACTION OF GLACIERS. 
 
 
 , i/ i 
 
 J .^^.. i/ ^... 
 
 17 
 
 V > 
 
 VI 
 
 .L 
 
 V 
 
188 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 ^.^r^.L^l --X.J- ^^J-vAr- 
 
 v *l 
 
 \j / 
 
 /--j>^l ........ .=~V.L ....... 
 
 ~^ c \ \ r 
 
 _j9i ______ I 
 
 Vc 
 
 . / No "/- 
 
 -VI 
 
 - Ax 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 189 
 
 : JL 
 
 
 .Yl..,/ 
 
 i 
 ""7J 
 
 > ^r c~ 
 
 <i_^ -<?- "3s \ 
 
 > ^.^^^,l.^.I.LC.^..^v. 
 * s i 
 
 THE MAGIC OF MODERN SCIENCE. 
 
 u 
 
 .O-. 
 
 VI "-^A/ 
 
 ^L 
 
 <n 
 
 K, -Lr, J l 
 
 JL. 
 
190 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 CHARACTER OF ABRAHAM LINCOLN. 
 
 101 
 
 ^f- 
 
 t 
 
 J G 
 
 j. .1. ^-. A ._... .i> r\..- c ^> jf-.^.^.s-^ vr. 
 
 V k L 
 
 
 x:. 
 
192 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 <-rfi* 
 
 ;'- 
 
 / ; 
 
 v.L^ 
 
 \ 
 
 Y../.U.: 
 
 /*~-4s . . o 
 
 ...... P. 3. - JL-. ff\ _-<-^ . _\ 
 
 j..c.x 
 
 .-^-..-f-^C-'j: _./-:.. W^. 
 
 ^..f. I.A^^rx I .. 
 
 1^ -- 1 C ^ x^ 
 ;.^ltJ:>..^V ! .SL---cfc.,\ai" 
 
 v//15. C. BLAINE. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 ELEMENTARY SCIENCE IN THE PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 
 
 193 
 
 u 
 
 
 ri~Y /-i_ -\. 
 
194 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 =^X -*-9- 
 
 v r _^ 
 L^.^^..:i^...V^4.:r. f ^n 
 
 >^/u^ 
 
 \>~ 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 FACSIMILE NOTES BY A. R. BAILEY. 
 
 195 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 I / ~7 ^ 
 
 
 ^ >fV/.? 3 ^ 
 
 y\ I 1 
 
 -<c^ 
 
 i r / 
 
 -9 / 
 
 - -&ft 
 
 ^4^0^^ 
 
 ^/l?..,^ 
 
196 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 NOTES OF R. S. WRIGHT, ENGRAVED 
 
 ^ 
 
 *-/ -.ft (<?. ' /O 
 
 -#^a 
 
 f 
 
 iV 
 
 
 1 
 
 y 1 
 I.U 
 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 197 
 
 FACSIMILE NOTES BY FRED. IRLAND. 
 ^-\ c--- (9 ^\ 
 
 
 ft 
 
198 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 NOTES OF EDMUND DANIEL, ENGRAVED FACSIMILE. 
 
 LX*jeJ 
 
FACSIMILE NOTES OF LEI/AND B. CASE. 
 
 199 
 
 ^/y^C/^ 
 
 j/^A 
 
 
 r \ . 
 *-/ 
 
 lUni-k 
 
FACSIMILE NOTES BY DAVID WOI.FE BROWN. 
 
 L !.., 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 201 
 
 TRANSCRIPTS 
 
 OF 
 
 Advanced Beading Exercises, and Fac-Similo Notes of 
 Prominent Reporters. 
 
 THE STORY OF NARCISSUS. 
 
 (Pages 134 and 135.) 
 
 In days long ago, when birds and flowers and trees could talk, in a 
 country far over the sea, there was a beautiful fountain. It was in an 
 opening in the forest and the little sunbeams that crept between the leaves 
 falling upon it, made it shine am} sparkle like silver. You would have 
 thought the wind was playing a polka among the trees, so gayly did the 
 fountain dance and bubble over the rocks while it was sending up little 
 showers of spray that made tiny rainbows. But between its banks 
 further down, it was as quiet as a sleeping child and the ferns bent over 
 and bathed themselves in it and the cool green moss crept down to the 
 water's edge. 
 
 The mountain goat that wandered through the forest had never 
 been there to drink. Even the wind was tenderly careful not to ruffle 
 it and the leaves that had shaded it all summer long, laid themselves 
 noiselessly on either side when their turn came to fall, but they never 
 sullied its fair surface. One day a youth named Narcissus who had been 
 hunting in the forest, lost sight of his companions, and while looking 
 for them, chanced to see the fountain flashing beneath a stray sunbeam. 
 He at once turned his steps toward it, much delighted, for he was heated 
 and thirsty. As he drew nearer, and heard the plash of the falliug water 
 and saw its crystal clearness, he thought he had never seen so beautiful 
 a place and he hastened to bathe his burning forehead and cool his 
 parched lips. 
 
 But as he knelt upon the mossy bank and bent over the water, he 
 saw his own image, as in a glass. He thought it must be some lovely 
 water sprite that lived within the fountain and in gazing upon it he 
 forgot to drink. The sparkling eyes, the curling locks, the blushing 
 rounded cheeks and the parted lips rilled him with admiration and he 
 fell in love with that image of himself, but he knew not that it was his 
 own image. The longer he looked, the more beautiful it became to him, 
 and he longed to embrace it, but as he dipped his arms in the water and 
 touched it with his lips the lovely face disappeared as though its owner 
 had been frightened. Narcissus felt himself thrilled with alarm, lest 
 he might never behold it again, and he looked around in vain to find out 
 where it had fled. What was his delight to see it appearing again as 
 
202 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 the surface of the water became smooth. It gave him glance for glance, 
 and smile for smile, but although the lips moved as if they were speak- 
 ing, they gave him not a word. He begged the beautiful creature to 
 come out of the fountain and live with him. You are the most beautiful 
 being my eyes ever looked upon, he said, and I love you with all my 
 heart. You shall have all that is mine, and I will forever be your faith- 
 ful friend, if you will only come with me. The image smiled, and 
 seemed to stretch out its arms to him, but still it was dumb. This only 
 made him desire all the more to hear it speak, and he besought it for a 
 reply until saddened by continual disappointment his tears fell upon the 
 water and disturbed it. This made the face look wrinkled. He 
 thought it was going to leave him, and exclaimed, " Only stay, beauti- 
 ful being, and let me gaze upon you if I may not touch you." And so 
 he hung over the brink of the fountain, forgetting his food and rest, 
 but not losing sight for an iustaut,of the lovely face. As daylight faded 
 away, and the moonbeams crept down into the little glade to bear him 
 company he still kept his faithful watch, and the morning sun found 
 him where it had said good night to him the evening before. Day after 
 day and night after night he stayed there gazing and grieving. He 
 grew thin and pale and weak until worn out with love and longing he 
 pined away and died. When his friends found the poor dead Narcissus 
 they were filled with sorrow and they went about sadly to prepare a 
 funeral pile, for it was the custom in those days to burn the dead. But 
 most wonderful to tell ! when they returned to bear away the body it 
 could nowhere be found. However, before their astonished eyes a little 
 flower rose from the water's edge just where their friend had died. So 
 they named the flower in honor of him, and it has been called Narcissus 
 unto this very day. Anna M. Pratt. 
 
 A JUST JUDGE. 
 
 (Pages 175-177.) 
 
 A gentleman who possessed an estate worth about 500 a year in 
 the eastern part of England had two sons. The eldest being of a 
 rambling disposition went abroad. After several years his father died, 
 when the younger son destroyed his will and seized upon the estate. 
 He gave out that his elder brother was dead and bribed false witnesses 
 to attest the truth of it. In the course of time the elder brother 
 returned and came home in destitute circumstances. His younger 
 brother repulsed him with scorn and told him that he was an imposter 
 and cheat. He asserted that his real brother was dead long ago, and he 
 could bring witnesses to prove it. The poor fellow, having neither 
 money nor friends, was in a sad situation. He went round the neighbor- 
 hood making complaints and at last to a lawyer who, when he heard the 
 poor man's story, replied, " you have nothing to give me. If I undertake 
 the case and lose it, it will bring me into disgrace as all the wealth and 
 evidence are on your brother's side ; however, I will undertake it on this 
 condition : You shall enter into an obligation to pay me one thousand 
 guineas if I gain the estate for you; if I lose it, I know the conse- 
 quences and I venture with my eyes open." Accordingly he entered an 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 203 
 
 action against the younger brother, which was to be tried at the next 
 general term at Kssex. The lawyer having engaged in the cause of 
 the young man and being stimulated by the prospect of a thousand 
 guineas, set his wits to work to contrive the best method to gain his 
 end. At last he hit upon this happy thought, that he would consult the 
 first judge of his age, Lord Chief Justice Hale. Accordingly he 
 hastened up to London and laid open the cause and all its circumstances. 
 The Judge, who was a great lover of justice, heard the case attentively 
 and promised him all the assistance in his power. The lawyer having 
 taken leave, the judge contrived matters so as to finish all his business 
 at the King's Bench before the general term at Essex. When within a 
 short distance of the place he dismissed his man and horses and sought 
 a single house. He found one occupied by a miller. After some con- 
 versation, and making himself quite agreeable, he proposed to the 
 miller to change clothes with him. As the iudge had a very good suit 
 on, the man had no reason to object. Accordingly the judge shifted 
 from top to toe and put on a complete suit of the miller's best. Thus 
 clothed he walked to Essex and procured good lodgings suitable for the 
 court that should come on next day. When the trial came on he walked 
 like an ignorant country fellow backward and forward along the county 
 hall. He observed narrowly what passed around him, and when the 
 hall began to fill he found out the poor fellow who was the plaintiff. 
 As soon as he came into the hall the miller drew up to him. " Honest 
 friend," said he, "how is your cause likely to go to-day?" "Why my 
 cause is in a very precarious situation and if I lose it I am ruined for life." 
 "Well, honest friend," replied the miller, "will you take my advice, I 
 will let you into a secret which perhaps you do not know ; every 
 Englishman has the right and privilege to except against any one jury- 
 man out of the whole twelve ; now you must insist upon your privilege 
 without giving a reason why, and if possible get me chosen in his stead, 
 and I will do you all the service in my power. " Accordingly when the 
 clerk had called over the names of the jurymen, the plaintiff excepted 
 to one of them. The judge on the bench was highly offended with this 
 liberty. "What do you mean," said he, "by excepting to that gentle- 
 man ?" " I mean, my lord, to assert my privilege as an Englishman, 
 without giving a reason why." The judge who had been highly bribed, 
 in order to conceal it under a show of candor and having a confidence in 
 the superiority of his party, said : " Well, sir, as you claim your privil- 
 ege in one instance, I will grant it. Who would you wish to have in the 
 room of that man excepted ?" After a short time taken in consideration : 
 "My lord," says he, "I wish to have an honest man chosen in," and 
 looking around the coxirt : "my lord, there is that miller in the court, 
 we will have him if you please." Accordingly the miller was chosen in. 
 As soon as the clerk of the court had given them all their oaths, a dex- 
 terous fellow came into the apartment and slipped ten golden guineas 
 into the hands of the eleven jurymen and gave the miller but five. He 
 observed that they were all bribed as well as himself, and said to his 
 next neighbor in a soft whisper, "how much have you got?" "Ten 
 pieces," said he. But he concealed what he had got himself. The cause 
 was opened by the plaintiff 's counsel, and all the scraps of evidence that 
 they could pick up, were adduced in his favor. The younger brother 
 
204 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND, 
 
 was provided with a great number of witnesses and pleaders, all plenti 
 fully bribed as well as the judge. The witnesses deposed that they were 
 in the self-same country when the brother died, and saw him buried. 
 The counsellors pleaded upon this accumulated evidence, and every- 
 thing went with a full tide in favor of the younger brother. The judge 
 summed up the evidence with great gravity and deliberation. " And 
 now," said he, "lay your heads together and bring in your verdict as 
 you shall deem it most just." They waited but for a few minutes before 
 they determined in favor of the younger brother. The judge said, 
 "gentlemen, are you agreed?" "We are all agreed, my lord," replied 
 one. "Hold, my lord," replied the miller, "we are not all agreed." 
 " Why," said the judge in a very surly manner, "what's the matter with 
 you, what reasons have you for disagreeing?" " I have several reasons, 
 my lord," replied the miller. " The first is, they have given to all these 
 gentlemen of the jury ten bright pieces of gold and to me but five, 
 which you know is not fair, besides I have many objections to make to 
 the false reasonings of the pleaders and the contradictory evidence of 
 the witnesses." Upon this the miller began a discourse which dis- 
 closed such avast penetration of judgment, such extensive knowledge of 
 law, and was expressed with such manly and energetic eloquence that it 
 astonished the judge and the whole court. As he was going on with 
 his powerful demonstrations, the judge in great surprise stopped him. 
 " Where did you come from and who are you ?" "I came from West- 
 minster Hall," replied the miller, " my name is Matthew Hale. I am 
 lord chief justice of the King's bench. I have observed the iniquity of 
 your proceedings this day, therefore come down from a seat which you 
 are in no wise worthy to hold. You are one of the corrupt parties in 
 this iniquitous business. I will come up this moment and try the cause 
 all over again." Accordingly Sir Matthew went up with his miller's 
 dress and hat on, began the trial from its very commencement and 
 searched every circumstance of truth and falsehood. He evinced the 
 elder brother's title to the estate from the contradictory evidence of the 
 witnesses and the false reasoning of the pleaders, unraveled all the 
 sophistry to the very bottom and gained a complete victory in favor of 
 truth and justice. 
 
 IvETTER OF JOHN RUSKIN, ABOUT BOOKS. 
 (I- age 177.) 
 
 SIR : Your note of inquiry as to what books have most influenced 
 my style and which are my favorites, has lain these seven days in my 
 desk, "becoming less answerable the more I thought of it. Every book 
 that I like influences my style, and fifty years of constant reading have 
 carried me through more pleasant books than I can remember. But 
 what I suppose to be best in my own manner of writing has been 
 learned chiefly from Byron and Scott. Of favorite books I have none. 
 Every book on niy library shelves is a favorite in its own way and time. 
 Some are the guides of life, others its solaces, others its food and 
 strength; nor can I say whether I like best to be taught or amused. 
 The book oftenest in my hand of late years is certainly Carlyle's 
 " Frederick." 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 205 
 
 It is one of the griefs of my old age that I know Scott by heart 
 But still if I take up a volume of him it is not laid down again for the 
 next hour, and I am always extremely grateful to any friend who will 
 tell me of a* cheerful French novel or a pretty French play. 
 
 There is little difference, as far as I can see, between me and any 
 other well trained scholar in the liking of books of high caste and 
 cheerful tone. But I imagine few people suffer as I do from any chance 
 entanglement in a foolish or dismal fiction. I am, sir, 
 
 Your faithful servant, 
 
 JOHN RUSKIN. 
 
 BUSINESS AND OFFICIAL, LETTERS. 
 
 (Pages 178-183.) 
 
 GENTLEMEN : 
 
 Referring to your letter of March 2, we beg to advise you that our 
 space at the World's Fair will be in the Transportation building. 
 The space is 8 feet wide by 40 long. 
 
 We have been treated with the utmost courtesy by the authorities 
 in this matter, and although there has been great delay in allotting 
 space, we can readily see that it is unavoidable. We shall endeavor to 
 arrange this exhibit tastefully, but cannot say just at present what will 
 be put into it. We will confine ourselves, however, to bicycles and 
 bicycle sundries. The most important part of the exhibit will be the 
 " Ohio King " wheel and the "'Juniata." Both are new to' the people, 
 and we think of a charactei to excite their interest, and also show them 
 the new developments in bicycle manufacture. The exhibit will also 
 contain smaller goods, such as Starr Lamps,' Samson Lamps and an 
 assortment of cheaper lamps of great merit 
 
 DEAR SIR: 
 
 I enclose herewith the application of the Cleveland Electric Railway 
 Co. for permits to run certain feed wires from the power-house on Second 
 avenue, and respectfully recommend that the same be not granted. 
 
 After examination of the question I am of the opinion heretofore 
 verbally expressed, that the city council has the power to fix the terms 
 and conditions upon which street railways within the city may be con 
 solidated. Until the matter has been submitted to the council and 
 action taken by it in respect to such terms and conditions, I think that 
 the executive officers of the city should not in any manner recognize 
 the alleged consolidation of the several lines of street railways now 
 claimed to be represented by the Cleveland Electric Railway Co. 
 
 DEAR SIR : 
 
 I have been absent for a week in Cleveland and Cincinnati which 
 will account for the delay in replying to your letters. 
 
 I would say in reference to the cargo cf coal that your order for the 
 same has been cancelled. It would require five thousand dollars im- 
 mediately to pay for this coal and the freights on it, which sum must of 
 
206 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 course be advanced by Moore, Benjamin & Co., and as it seems that the 
 consolidated company will take possession of the mines in about two 
 months, there will be considerable coal on hand, which under the terms 
 of the contract would be a loss to the present stockholders. The burden 
 of meeting the monthly expenses of the mines has been very great to 
 Moore, Benjamin & Co., and on that account and for other reasons, it 
 was thought best that the mines should buy their fuel a little at a time 
 even though it cost something extra until they are in better financial 
 condition than at present. You must not feel that the cancellation of 
 this order is any reflection on your judgment in purchasing the coal ; 
 it was siniply because we could not advance the money at present to pay 
 for it. 
 
 I found in Cleveland that the steamer had left there on Saturday 
 last and made an arrangment to have the cargo shipped to Duluth 
 instead of to Ashland. 
 
 WAR DEPARTMENT, \ 
 WASHINGTON, SEPT. 21. / 
 
 SIR: I have the honor to transmit herewith a letter from Messrs. 
 Murphy Bros, of Detroit, Mich., proffering the sum of $100 in the settle- 
 ment of a claim for damages against their tug, Onaping, done the 
 St. Clair Flats canal, and beg to invite your attention to the suggestion 
 of the chief of engineers indorsed thereon. Very respectfully, 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 THE HONORABLE, GEORGE W. McCREARY, 
 
 THE ATTORNEY GENERAL. ACTING SEC. OF WAR. 
 
 DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE, \ 
 
 S. M. CUTCHEON, Esq., WASHINGTON, SEPT. 26, '87. / 
 
 U. S. Attorney, 
 
 Detroit, Midi. 
 
 SIR: I enclose herewith copy of a letter of the 2ist directed to 
 this department by the Sec. of War relative to the settlement of a claim 
 against Murphy Bros, for damages done the St. Clair Flats canal by 
 their tug Onaping. Your attention is called to the documents accom- 
 panying the Secretary's letter, and you are instructed to take such 
 action as you may think proper in relation thereto. 
 
 Very respectfully, 
 
 S. F. PHILLIPS, 
 
 ACTING ATTY. GEN. 
 
 DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE, 1 
 SEPT. 29, '87. ] 
 
 SIR : Acknowledging your letter in reference to the offer of $100 
 made by Murphy Bros, for damages done the St. Clair Flats canal by 
 their tug Onaping, you are hereby directed to accept this offer of 
 settlement. Vefy respectfully, 
 
 CHARLES DEVENS, 
 
 ATTY. GEN'L. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 207 
 
 DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR \ 
 JANUARY 19, '89. / 
 
 HON. CHARLES DEVENS, 
 
 Attorney General. 
 
 SIR : I have the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of 
 the I2th inst., enclosing copy of a letter dated the ist inst., from the 
 United States Attorney for the Eastern District of Michigan, in relation 
 to a quantity of logs alleged to have been cut from a tract of land 
 therein described, embraced in the Isabella Reservation in said State, 
 and suggesting that the Registrar of the Land Office, iu whose district 
 said logs are, be instructed to seize the same and make sale thereof as 
 iu other similar cases. 
 
 In reply I have to state, that I have this day instructed the Com- 
 missioner of the General Land Office, to direct the Registrar of the United 
 States Land Office at Reed City, to take possession of said logs, make 
 sale thereof, and pay the proceeds arising therefrom to the P.eceiver 01 
 the United States Land Office at Reed City, who will be instructed to 
 cover the same into the Treasury of the United States as other moneys 
 received from the sale of timber cut and removed from the public lands. 
 
 Very respectfully, 
 
 CARL SCHURZ, 
 
 SECRETARY. 
 
 WASHINGTON, APRII/ 3, 89. 
 S. M. CUTCHEON, ESQ., 
 
 U. S. Attorney, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 
 SIR : The stenographic account of Whittaker, Maitland & Co. for 
 services iu the case of the United States vs. O. F. Lockhead, amounting 
 to $50 is approved because of the endorsement of Judge H. B. Brown, 
 that he suggested the employment. Otherwise it would have been dis- 
 allowed, because it had not been previously authorized by this depart- 
 ment which must be considered a condition precedent. 
 
 DEAR SIR: The case of Tillyer versus Eureka Mining Co. is 
 assigned for trial and is likely to be reached by the court during the 
 next ten days. I send you this advice in order that you may have your 
 witnesses in position to respond to our call upon telegram. If there is any 
 change in your address, or if you are likely to be absent from your present 
 place of residence during the next ten days for any considerable length 
 of time, kindly advise us of that fact, so that we may be in a position to 
 communicate promptly by wire. We will undertake to give you one or 
 two days notice besides the time required for you to get from Meadville 
 here. It is impossible at this time to state definitely that the case will 
 oe tried at the expiration often days or at the expiration of any number 
 of days, for the reason that there are six or eight cases ahead of this 
 md they may be tried rapidly or they may consume a greater amount of 
 time. 
 
208 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 DEAR SIR : In response to your letter of recent date, we quote you 
 Nitrous Oxide Gas at $1.40 per hundred gallons, f. o. b. Cleveland, Ohio. 
 
 We will fill any standard make of cylinders. The freight rate 
 between Cleveland and Denver will be very little, if any, more than 
 from Chicago. As to that matter we will equalize freight between here 
 and Chicago, provided you purchase goods in half dozen cylinder lots. 
 We guarantee our goods to be as pure as any on the market, and our 
 increasing demands convince us that it is as we guarantee. 
 
 With regard to the outfits for the manufacture of gas, would say, 
 our outfits are larger than the one you inquire about, as their capacity 
 is about 250 gallons. The prices of these are as follows : 
 
 Retort f 10, one gallon Wolfe bottles $2, glass tubing and rubber 
 stoppers 5oc. a set, gas stoves $3.50 each. 
 
 Hoping to hear from you by way of a trial order, we are, 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 DEAR SIR : The Atlantic Iron Mining Co. obtained its right to the 
 So acres of land upon which the mine is situated from Edward Ryan of 
 Hancock, Michigan. We have always understood that this mine was 
 owned by the Wisconsin Central Railroad Co. But when we came to 
 negotiate definitely for a lease on the property, we found that the north 
 forty acres that is to say the south-west quarter of the north-west 
 quarter of section i, township 45, range I east, is owned by the Wis- 
 consin Central Railroad Co., and that the south forty acres, being the 
 north-east quarter of the south-east quarter of section 12, is owned by 
 another corporation called the Penokee and Gogebic Development Co. 
 This makes complications of a very serious character, because if we op- 
 erate on two separate leases, we must report separately the ore which is 
 mined from each piece of laud and pay royalties to two different com- 
 panies. The difficulties that this will entail will suggest themselves to 
 you. I have therefore opened negotiations looking to the consolidation 
 of the interests of the railroad company and the development company 
 on these two pieces of land, but so far have not met with any encour- 
 agement. Before we do anything further in the matter, will you kindly 
 let us know upon which of these two tracks the ore is now found, and 
 whether in your opinion both pieces of land are necessary to the mine, 
 for if the ore is found upon one piece and not upon the other piece, 
 we might abandon one or the other of them. In order that you may 
 be better informed of the true condition of affairs, we enclose here- 
 with copies of the leases as far as they relate to the two tracts in 
 question. We have not yet made any definite contract between the 
 aiining company, the railroad company and the development company. 
 
 Your early and careful reply will be appreciated. 
 
 DEAR SIR: Referring to the attached papers concerning the short- 
 age of Red Line cars at Ludington. During the month of December 
 we gave them 397 M. T. Red Lines, during January it has been light on 
 account of the weather and the demand for Red Lines at Chicago and 
 vicinity. About a week ago I asked the F. P. M. if they could not use 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 209 
 
 200 N. Y. C. cars to be loaded for N. Y. C. and New England points. 
 They replied that they had no shipments for these points but could load 
 them for Buffalo and Philadelphia. I would add that prospects are not 
 very flattering for line cars for them until the weather moderates. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 Mr. T. W. 
 
 DIVISION FREIGHT AGENT, 
 
 Buffalo, N. Y. 
 
 DEAR SIR : Mr. Jackson, commercial agent Santa Fe line at 
 Buffalo, writes that the New York Central and P. & R. will place orders 
 with us for refrigerator cars via these lines and that he has placed orders 
 with you accordingly. Advises 3 for Knowlesville, 10 for Bloomfield 
 and 2 for Gasport, all on the N. Y. C., and 4 for Victor on the P. & R. 
 You can use California fruit cars on these orders provided you received 
 the orders from the above named companies for the same. 
 
 Please mail me the number of the cars you deliver, also send same 
 to Mr. Jackson so that he can protect shipments for our line and 
 Santa Fe. 
 
 DEAR SIRS : We are in receipt of your letter of the isth and in 
 reply would say we are well aware of the fact that there is no such 
 thing as perfection in any line of business, still at the same time we 
 think that we are entitled to the proceeds of this sale. If it were nec- 
 essary for us to enforce payment, and we do not think it is, we should 
 place the matter in the hands of the proper officer of this company and 
 allow him to do as he thinks best. We trust it will not be necessary for 
 us to proceed to such extreme measures, but should it become our duty 
 we shall most certainly do as above stated. 
 
 Our manager starts for your place to-morrow, and we trust you will 
 be able to' arrange matters satisfactorily to all parties concerned. 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 EXECUTIVE MANSION, \ 
 WASHINGTON, July 13, '63. j 
 MAJOR GENERAL GRANT. 
 
 My dear General : I do not remember that you and I ever met per- 
 sonally. I write this now as a grateful acknowledgment for the almost 
 inestimable service you have done the country. I write to say a word 
 further. When you first reached the vicinity of Vicksburg, I thought 
 you should do what you finally did march the troops across the neck, 
 run the batteries with the transports, and thus go below, and I never 
 had any faith except a general hope that you knew better than I that the 
 Yazoo Pass expedition and the like could succeed. When you got 
 below and took Port Gibson, Grand Gulf and the vicinity, I thought you 
 should go down the river and join Gen. Banks, and when you turned 
 northward, east of the Big Black, I feared it was a mistake. I now wish 
 to make the personal acknowledgment that you were right and I was 
 wrong. Yours truly, 
 
 A. LINCOLN. 
 
210 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 TREASURY DEPARTMENT, OFFICE OF SECRETARY, ) 
 WASHINGTON, D. C., October 9, '90. \ 
 
 SIR: I have the honor to recommend that the Board of Examiners 
 of this department be authorized to add to the general average 
 obtained by candidates under examination for promotion in this 
 department, an additional credit of five per centum when the candidates 
 have, under section 1754 of the Revised Statutes, claim of preference in 
 civil appointments; that is to the general average of those persons 
 honorably discharged from the military or navai service by reason of 
 disability resulting from wounds or sickness incurred in the line of duty. 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 HON. WM. WINDOM, (JAMES BROOKS,) 
 
 Secretary of Treasury. Chief Clerk and Member of the 
 
 Board of Examiners. 
 
 HON. WM. P. FRY, 
 
 Washington, D. C. 
 
 SIR : I have the honor to respectfully acknowledge receipt of your 
 letter dated the 23d inst., inclosing Senate Bill No. 1104, making an ap- 
 propriation and providing for the constrnction of two revenue cutters 
 for service on the Pacific coast, and requesting this department to 
 furnish your committee with such suggestions as it may deem proper, 
 touching on the merits of the bill and the propriety of its passage. 
 
 In reply thereto, I would say that the department has considered the 
 necessity for two new cutters on the Pacific coast so urgent that it has 
 included in the regular estimates the sums of $175,000 and $150,000 for 
 the construction of two vessels, the former sum for a vessel for sen-ice 
 at San Francisco and, during the summer months, in the Behring Sea 
 for the protection of the seal islands and the government interests in 
 Alaska, and the latter for a vessel for service in Puget Sound and the 
 waters adjacent in Washington state. The revenue cutters now on the 
 Pacific coast were built many years ago and have been kept steadily at 
 work in the performance of the multifarious duties required of them. 
 They are of the age when vessels require frequent repairs, and they 
 should gradually be replaced by new vessels of more modern type of 
 hull' and machinery which will give greater power and speed. 
 
 I earnestly recommend to your committee the passage of this bill 
 and name the amounts herein mentioned respectively, as necessary to 
 properly build and equip the new vessels. 
 
 Senate Bill No. 1 104 is herewith returned, 
 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 MY DEAR SIR : I found your letter of February 3 awaiting me on 
 my return from New York. I am very much interested in the subject 
 of rapid transit, and while in New York made an investigation of that 
 adopted by the Fourth Avenue Railway Co., known as the Julian 
 system. The difficulty is that all these parties interested in storage 
 batteries are spending so much time and money in litigation among 
 themselves, that they seem to lose sight of the advantages of using 
 storage batteries. For instance, the Fourth Avenue road, running down 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 211 ' 
 
 town from the Grand Central Depot, is using the Julian system of 
 storage batteries. The Electric Accumulator Co. got an injunction 
 against them, and now claims to control the market and to monopolize 
 the whole system of storage batteries. I see they have brought suit in 
 our court against the Woodward Co. in this city. On the other hand 
 the Brush Co. claims that all these patents, including those used by the 
 Accumulator Co., and the Woodward Co., and the Julian Co. are in- 
 fringements upon theirs, so that it seems unsafe for us to take hold of 
 anything. I saw one car on Fourth avenue operated by the Julian 
 system and the superintendent seemed to be satisfied that he would 
 have put a large number of cars upon his road had it not been 
 for the injunction of the Accumulator Co. The Accumulator Co. 
 run no cars of their own, except perhaps one in Philadelphia, but have 
 succeeded in putting a stop to everything in the nature of storage bat- 
 teries, and have destroyed a business which they ought to be building 
 up. I tried to convince them that they were cutting their own throats 
 by enjoining all storage batteries. The better plan to me would seem to 
 be to allow them to run and recover pecuniary damages for the infringe- 
 ment of their patent. I am not informed what machine is used by 
 your company, but if it is anything in the nature of that used by 
 storage companies in general, you will probably have a suit on your 
 hands before a great while; judging from what I heard in New York 
 city. I shall be glad to look at your car when it is in operation. 
 
 Very truly yours, 
 
 DEAR SIR : Your favor of the 8th inst. is before us. Would the 
 Ohio Central standard box car built in accordance with the last lot we 
 constructed for that company during the early part of this year, be 
 such a car as you would require ? We presume it would as it is a 
 60,000 pound capacity car. Just what volume of grain can be loaded 
 into it, we cannot say, but presume it would not be far from what you 
 want. If this car would suit you, I will name you a price at which we 
 could build you a similar lot. From what you say concerning air 
 brakes, etc., we would simply take the Ohio Central car complete and 
 omit the air brakes, using automatic couplers, however. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 DEAR SIR : I beg to acknowledge receipt of your favor of the yth 
 inst. I will look into this matter and see that you are promptly advised. 
 1 was under the impression that advices were going forward every day, 
 and know no reason why this should not have been. 
 
 SOCIAL, LETTERS. 
 
 (Pages 184-186.) 
 
 MY DEAR SIR: I have to acknowledge receipt of your letter of 
 the yth inst., which I have found upon my return from New York. I 
 judge from what I heard there that there is a possibility that my ambition 
 may yet be gratified as you say, but it is only a mere possibility,and while, 
 of course, if I removed to Washington, I should wish to dispose of my 
 
213 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 house, I do not allow myself to look so far ahead as to determine how 
 this ought to be done. Two or three persons have already spoken to 
 me with regard to it, and expressed a wish to purchase, but the contin- 
 gency of my selling is so remote that I have not deemed it necessary to 
 give it serious consideration. It is quite probable that if I ever wish 
 to dispose of my place, my brother-in-law, Major Warren, would feel as 
 though he was entitled to the refusal of it, though he has not spoken to 
 me on the subject. 
 
 The judicial celebration in New York was a grand affair. Indeed 
 I have never seen such a distinguished and intellectual body of men 
 assembled together as there was at the banquet on Wednesday. I met 
 all the judges of the Supreme Court, who were very kind to me, and 
 two or three expressed a wish that I might be one of their number, and 
 to some of them Judge Gray's appointment seems to have been some- 
 what of a surprise. At the same time he is an excellent man, and if I 
 am not to have it myself, I prefer that it should go to him. 
 
 MY DEAR JUDGE: I did not receive your letter of the ist until my 
 return from New York on Saturday, where I went to attend the Cen- 
 tennial Judicial Celebration. I hoped and rather expected to meet you 
 there. It was a grand affair and I could not forego the pleasure of 
 making the acquaintance of some of my brother judges and seeing the 
 distinguished gentlemen who were gathered there. A larger number of 
 refined and intellectual men I never saw assembled in one place. 
 
 I have been so very busy with admiralty cases this winter that I 
 have not found time to take up the patent cases from Jackson, but will 
 do so at the earliest opportunity, as I know they are anxious for a 
 decision. I have never had so many and so important admiralty cases 
 as I have had this wnnter, and the term bids fair to last till March. I 
 hope, however, within a week or ten days to at least come to a conclusion 
 in the patent cases. 
 
 I shall be very glad to see you in June, although I do not think the 
 business will detain you a great while. I have reserved two or three 
 cases for a conference with you and it is possible there will be as many 
 admiralty appeals. I think you had better, if it is equally convenient to 
 you, postpone your visit until the latter half of the mouth, particularly 
 if you decide to bring Mrs. and Miss Field with you. It is needless to 
 say that we should be delighted to see either of them. I did intend 
 to go to Cuba this month, but I have so much business on hand it is 
 impossible to leave, and the w r eather has been so warm that there really 
 is little temptation. Very truly yours, 
 
 MY DEAR SIR: You are so good as to ask me to tell you what 
 books have influenced me. Now to be frank I have never been a very 
 great reader unless the reading was in some way connected with a sub- 
 ject in which I take an interest. My days have been too busy to allow 
 of it, and besides I have always preferred to try to study human char- 
 acter from life rather than in the pages of books which, if they be true 
 to art, must to some extent idealize and exaggerate nature. I think 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 213 
 
 that to those who have eyes to see although the doctrine is a perilous 
 one for a novelist to preach the tangled drama of existence, as it is 
 from day to day revealed to us in every drawing-room and street, has 
 more fascination and appeals more largely to the sympathies than any 
 novel. But as to books,wheu a boy I loved those books that other boys love 
 and I love them still. I well remember a little scene which took place 
 when I was a child of eight or nine. Robinson Crusoe held me in his 
 golden thrall, and I was expected to go to church. I hid beneath a bed 
 with Robinson Crusoe, and was in due course discovered by an elder 
 sister and the governess who, on my refusing to come out, resorted to 
 force. Then followed a struggle that was quite Homeric. The two 
 ladies tugged as best they might but I clung to Crusoe and the legs of 
 ihe bed, and kicked until perfectly exhausted; they took their departure 
 in no very Christian frame of mind, leaving me panting indeed but trium- 
 phant. Next to Robinson Crusoe I think I liked the Arabian Nights, 
 the Three Musketeers and the poems of Edgar Allen Poeand Macaulay. 
 My two favorite novels are Dickens' " Tale of Two Cities " and Lytton's 
 " Coming Race." Both these books I can read again and again and 
 with an added pleasure. Only my delight in the last is always marred 
 afresh by disgust at the behavior of the hero who, in Order to return to 
 this dull earth, put away the queenly Zoe's love. 
 
 I think, however, that I have always been more stirred by poetry 
 than by prose, except indeed by some passages where prose in the 
 hands of a perfect master, rises to a poetry of its own, which to my 
 mind surpasses even the dignity of worthy verse. And there is one 
 immortal work that moves me still more a work that utters all the 
 world's yearning anguish and disillusionment in one sorrow-laden and 
 bitter cry, and whose stately music thrills like the voice of pines heard 
 in the darkness of a midnight gale, and that is the book of Ecclesiastes. 
 
 H. RIDER HAGGARD. 
 
 DEAR SIB : I received your kind letter with your excellent advice 
 to the people of the United States which I read with great pleasure and 
 hope it will ,be duly regarded. Such writings, though they may be 
 lightly passed over by many readers, yet if they make a deep impression 
 on one active mind in a hundred, the effects may be considerable. Per- 
 mit me to mention one little instance which, though it relates to myself 
 will not be quite uninteresting to you. When I was a boy I met with a 
 book, ' Essays to do Good," which I think was written by your father. 
 It had been so little regarded by a former possessor that several leaves 
 were torn out, but the remainder gave me such a turn of thinking as to 
 have an influence on my conduct through life, for I have always set a 
 greater value on the character of the doer of good than on any other 
 kind of reputation, and if I have been, as you seem to think, a useful 
 citizen, the public owes the advantage of it to that book. 
 
 You mention your being in your y8th year ; I am in my 79th ; we 
 are grown old together. It is now more than sixty years since I left 
 Boston, but I remember well both your father and grandfather, having 
 heard them both in the pulpit and seen them in their houses. The last 
 time I saw your father was in the beginning of 1724, when I visited him 
 
214 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 after my first trip to Pennsylvania. He received me in his library, and 
 on my taking leave, showed me a shorter way out of the house through a 
 narrow passage which was crossed by a beam overhead. We were still 
 talking as I withdrew, he accompanying me behind and I turning partly 
 towards him, when he said hastily, " Stoop, stoop." I did not under- 
 stand him until I felt my head hit against the beam. He was a man 
 that never missed any occasion of giving instruction, and upon this he 
 said to me, " You are young and have the world before you, stoop as you 
 go through it and you will miss many hard thumps." This advice thus 
 beat into my head, has frequently been of use to me, and I often think 
 of it when I see pride mortified and misfortunes brought upon people 
 by their carrying their heads too high. B. FRANKLIN. 
 
 1 2th May, 1784. 
 
 AN ANECDOTE OF THE REVOLUTION. 
 
 Mrs. Daniel Hall, having obtained permission to pay a visit to her 
 mother on John's Island, was on the point of embarking when an officer 
 stepping forward in the most authoritative manner, demanded the key of 
 her trunk. 
 
 " What do you expect to find there," said the lady. 
 
 " I seek for treason," was the reply. 
 
 " You may save yourself the trouble of searching then," said Mrs. 
 Hall. " You may find plenty of it at my tongue's end." 
 
 THE ACTION OF GLACIERS. 
 
 (Pages 187-189.) 
 
 The observer who attentively considers the mode of action of the 
 rain on the surface of the land readily perceives that this work is 
 accomplished by the action of the solar forces which come in the form 
 of heat to the surface of the oceans and other water areas, lifting the 
 fluid in the form of vapor and dropping it on the land. He has per- 
 ceived that the work of rain water, whether it speedily, flows over the 
 surface or slowly courses within the ground, operates to sink down the 
 land and chisel the surface into hills and valleys, thereby giving the 
 parts of the earth which are above the level of the sea {he peculiar 
 diversity of surface which is of such importance not only to its external 
 shape but the physiographic condition of the life of the land. 
 
 To complete his survey of the action of rain water, the student 
 must now turn his attention to the work done by glaciers, or the action 
 of the water when it falls in the form of snow and remains unmelted 
 while it flows over the land areas on its path toward the sea. There is a 
 common though erroneous notion that glaciers demand for their exist- 
 ence certain very peculiar conditions, and that an ice period such as 
 characterized the Northern Hemisphere in very recent geological times 
 represents* very unique circumstances in the history of the earth. There 
 can be no question that the physiographic effect of the glacial period is 
 very great. When the ice lav over the surface of North America to the 
 depth of thousands of feet as far south as about the parallel of 40 degrees 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 215 
 
 in the region east of the Mississippi, and when it at the same time occu- 
 pied a large part of Northern Europe and Asia, it is easy to see that the 
 conditions of land locked in this enduring coat of ice were far other 
 than we now find them. It is important, however, that the reader 
 should disabuse his mind as to the singularity of the causes which bring 
 about a glacial period. There can be but little question that these ice 
 periods have again and again recurred in the history of the earth. If 
 they represent something out of the ordinary order of nature, we shall 
 have to change the rooted beliefs of modern geologists to the effect that 
 the earth, from the most remote ages, has been controlled by the forces 
 which are now operating upon it. To secure a good notion of the 
 glacial action the student should avail himself of observations on his 
 field, which he can readily make in the winter season. Going into the 
 field at the beginning of a snow storm he may see the snow fall flake 
 by flake on the earth. Unlike the fluid water, which falls with a sensible 
 force, these snow-flakes strike no blow. The snow crystals come down 
 in the gentlest possible manner. The first point to note is that whether 
 the water falls as rain or snow, depends on a very slight difference of 
 temperature. It will often happen that within the limits of a line a few 
 hundred feet in length, that at one point the water falls as snow and at 
 another point as a cold rain. The fact is that the difference between 
 the heat which brings the water down as rain drops and that which 
 sends it to the earth as snow is infinitely small. 
 
 While drops of rain are as they fall little irregular spheres, which at 
 once splash and commingle with the water already on the surface, the snow 
 flakes are each aggregations, the crystals of which assume a wonderful 
 variety of form and contain a great deal of air in their interstices. It is 
 this divided character of the ice in snow flakes which gives snow its 
 white appearance. We can imitate the result by powdering ice. Even 
 transparent glass has a whitish hue when broken into fine bits. 
 
 When the frozen water first comes to the earth its crystals inter, 
 mingle with each other, the whole mass being so spongy that a foot in 
 thickness will sometimes not give more than half an inch of water 
 when melted. But this feature of the snow rapidly undergoes a change. 
 As the thickness of the snow increases the flakes press upon each other, 
 the delicate crystals are melted by this pressure and the sheet becomes 
 consolidated. At first each flake tends to gather into the form of a little 
 ball, so that after lying on the ground a few weeks, we observe that 
 the snow is not only more compact, but that it has a granular appear- 
 ance. If the snow endure on the ground, if occasional rain storms fill 
 the interstices between the grains with water which freezes in its place, 
 the mass may change into a whitish ice so solid that the foot will not 
 sink into it often, indeed, so compact that it can be broken with hardl} 
 less ease than ordinary ice. 
 
 As soon as such a covering of snow, however trifling its depth, is ac- 
 cumulated on the surface of the field, the student is observing a glacial 
 sheet and for a time he is living in a glacial period. The more import- 
 ant phenomena which are now exhibited in the glaciers of Greenland 
 and which were present in this country in the last ice period are shown 
 in a small way on the hillsides of all countries which are snow-bound in 
 the winter part of the year. The most important action of the glaciers 
 
216 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 consists in the downward movement of the ice of which it is composed 
 over the slopes on which it rests. When the ice sheet is thousands of 
 feet in thickness and creeps over a lofty country to the sea it drags over 
 the rocks rending them by its movement, grinding the fragrants to 
 pieces and conveying the mass forward to the margin of the glacier. 
 There are other features connected with the great ice sheet, but this is 
 the only one of much geological importance. In the temporary glaciers 
 of our northern snow- field, we may observe that the movement of the 
 compact snow is precisely like that which occurs in all glaciers whatso- 
 ever. The sheet when it begins to creep down the hillsides, moves very 
 slowly, but with sufficient energy' often to produce noteworthy effects. 
 In a cemetery near Augusta, Maine, the burial places are on a tolerably 
 steep hillside, where the snow accumulates to a depth of several feet 
 and remains for several months. It has more than once happened that 
 the downward movement of this snow, not in the form of an avalanche, 
 but by slow glacial creeping, has broken off the monuments and 
 iron fences about the graves, conveying them a few feet down the 
 declivity. If the observer will closely note the condition of the surface 
 of the hillside after the snow has gone away, he will often see that the 
 stems of plants are bent downward and that small stones have been 
 slipped from their original bedding -places and carried a little ways on 
 their glacial journey. Prof. JV. S. Shaler, in The Chautauqiian. 
 
 THE MAGIC OF MODERN SCIENCE- 
 
 (Page 189.) 
 
 This is pre-eminently the age of physical science, of machinery, 
 electricity and chemistry. These wonderful agencies are enabling the 
 human race to realize the wild dream of that ancient period when men 
 were supposed to be able to wield the powers of magic. We do not 
 possess Alladin's lamp, nor do we seek to unfold the secrets of the 
 philosopher's stone, but we work with our science wonders more aston- 
 ishing and vastly more valuable than were attributed to ancient magic. 
 When we consider that the potentialities of science are merely in their 
 infancy we are brought to realize that the greatest sphere of usefullness 
 and profit possible for human intelligence, is in the stud}- and elucida- 
 tion of the secrets of machinery, electricity and chemistry. With the 
 greatest respect for the legal profession, it is doubtful if there is a lawyer 
 in the whole world whose name is as widely known as that of Edison, 
 the electrician ; of Watt, the steam engineer; or of Farraday, the chemist. 
 But what has been done in these branches of science is but the sugges- 
 tion of what is to be done. The telephone, the telegraph, the phono- 
 graph,electric illumination and propulsion, are the loose ends of industrial 
 economics of the most far-reaching power and stupendous importance. 
 The secrets of chemistry, so far as they have been developed, have 
 exercised an enormous influence on human progress. The refining of 
 crude medical and food products, the purification of oils and metals, the 
 discovery of dye-stuffs, the compounding of explosives, the elaboration 
 of methods of analysis by which the composition of all substances may 
 be ascertained and distinguished, are splendid achievements, but they 
 onlv indicate how much more is to be done. New. Orleans Picayune. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 217 
 
 LETTER OF JOHN BRIGHT. 
 
 (Page 190.) 
 
 LONDON, March 29, 'Si. 
 
 DEAR SIR : I have not time to answer your letter at length. If you 
 will read the little book to which I referred in my letter on the speech 
 of the member for Preston, you may learn much from it more than I 
 can tell you in any letter I can write. 
 
 We all regret that France, the United States of America, and other 
 countries continue their high tariffs, and it is, we believe, a misfortune to 
 them and injurious to us ; but we can only legislate for our own country 
 and not for them. If you think that not being able to sell freely we 
 should mend ourselves by giving up the power to buy freely, I may as 
 well leave you to that opinion, only expressing wonder at it. But you 
 will perhaps say that we can force other nations to reduce their tariff if 
 we enforce a tariff against them. You forget probably that we have 
 tried this in times past, and that it has wholly failed. Sir Robert Peel 
 taught this nearly forty years ago, and he believed, as I believe, that 
 the best defense we can have against the evils of foreign tariffs is to 
 have no tariff of our own. 
 
 You speak of France : the French senate is in favor of more pro- 
 tection. The Chamber of Deputies is disposed to free trade, and to a 
 more liberal policy. The free trade party in France is more powerful 
 than in times past, and it is not certain that the proposed treaty will be 
 less favorable to trade between the two countries. As to America, how 
 will you compel its government to reduce their tariff? By placing 
 duties on American exports to England ? If so, on what exports, on 
 cotton for the mills of Lancashire, or on corn for the food of all our 
 people? The American protective tariff makes it difficult or impossible 
 for Americans to become great exporters of manufactures. If you fight 
 them at the custom-house you can only assail them by duties on cotton, 
 or on corn, and this surely will not benefit Lancashire, or the West 
 Riding. When the debt of the United States is much reduced, when 
 the revenue is in excess of their wants, then their tariff will be reformed, 
 and their import duties will be reduced. 
 
 If you doubt what free trade has done for England, go back to your 
 histories and read what was the condition of our workmen and their 
 families for the first forty years of this century when everything was 
 supposed to be protected, and compare it with what it is now. 
 
 For some years past manufacturers and farmers have suffered 
 greatly and workmen have suffered much, but they have not seen one 
 tenth part of the distress which afflicted them during the forty years of 
 the high duties from 1800 to 1840. The country suffers now, not from our 
 purified tariff, and not wholly or in chief part from foreign tariffs. It 
 suffers from want of sunshine from the short harvests of several years ; 
 and till we Ime good harvests we must suffer and endure^ Parliament 
 cannot give sun and heat for our fields, and it will be no compensation 
 to reimpose import duties and to deny us the right to purchase freely 
 what we need from foreign nations. 
 
 I am respectfully yours, 
 
 JOHN BRIGHT. 
 
218 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 THE CHARACTER OF ABRAHAM LINCOLN. 
 
 (Pages 191 and 192.) 
 
 Six days after the surrender of Lee, the nation was thrown into the 
 deepest grief by the assassination of the President. The gloom which 
 enshrouded the country was as thick darkness. The people had come 
 through many alternations of fear and hope to repose the most absolute 
 trust in Mr. Lincoln. They realized that he had seen clearly where they 
 were blind, that he had known fully where they were ignorant. He had 
 been patient, faithful and far-seeing. Religious people regarded him as 
 one divinely appointed, like the prophet of old, to a great work, and 
 they found comfort in the parallel which they saw in his death with that 
 of the leader of Israel. He, too, had reached the mountain's top and 
 had seen the land of the redeemed unto the utmost sea, and had then 
 died. 
 
 Mr. Lincoln had been for some time in the presidency before the 
 public esteem of him was correct or appreciative. The people did not 
 at first understand him; in the glamour of the presidential canvass they 
 had idealized him, attributing to him some traits above and many below 
 his essential qualities. After his election and before his iuaguration there 
 was a general disposition to depreciate him. He became associated in 
 the public mind with an impending calamity, and tens of thousands 
 who had voted for him heartily repented the act, and inwardly execrated 
 the day that had committed the destinies of the Union to his keeping. 
 
 The first strong test brought upon Mr. Lincoln was this depressing 
 reaction among so many of his supporters. A man with a less resolute 
 purpose would have been cast down by it, but Mr. Lincoln preserved 
 the " metis equa zw ardms." Through the gloom of weeks preceding 
 his iuaguration he held his even way. Perhaps in a more terrible crisis 
 through which he was afterwards called to pass, a firmer nerve was 
 required, but not so rare a combination of qualities as he had shown in 
 the dismal months with which the year 1861 opened. 
 
 Mr. Lincoln united firmness and gentleness in a singular degree ; he 
 rarely spoke a harsh word. Ready to hear argument and always open to 
 conviction he adhered tenaciously to the conclusions which he had finally 
 reached. Altogether he had confidence in himself, trusted to the 
 reasoning of his own mind, believed in the correctness of his own 
 judgment. Many popular conceptions concerning him are erroneous. 
 No man was further than he from the easy familiar jocose character in 
 which he is often painted. 
 
 While he paid little attention to form and ceremony, he was not a 
 man with whom liberties could be taken. There was but one person in 
 Illinois, outside of his own household who ventured to address him by 
 vhis first name. There was no one in Washington who even attempted 
 it. He appreciated wit and humor, and relished a good story, especially 
 if it illustrated a truth or strengthened an argument ; he had a vast 
 fund of illustrative anecdotes which he used with the best effect. But 
 the long list of vulgar, salacious stories attributed to him were retailed 
 only by those who never enjoyed the privilege of exchanging a word 
 with him. His life was altogether a serious one, inspired by the noblest 
 spirit, devoted to the highest aims. Humor was but an incident with 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 219 
 
 him, a partial relief to the melancholy which tinged all his years. He, 
 presented an extraordinary combination of mental and moral qualities.. 
 As a statesman he had the loftiest ideal, and it fell to his lot to 
 inaugurate measures which changed the fate of millions of living nxen,, 
 of tens of millions yet to be born. As a manager of political issues 
 and master of the art of presenting them he had no rival in this 
 country, unless one to be found in Jefferson. 
 
 The complete discomfiture of his most formidable assailants in 1863, 
 especially those who sought to prejudice him before the people on account 
 of the arrest of Vallandingham cannot easily be paralleled for shrewd- 
 ness of treatment and for keen appreciation of the reactionary influence 
 which are certain to control public opinion. There was not the slightest 
 lack of candor or fairness in his methods ; he sought to control men 
 through their reason and their conscience. The only art he employed 
 was that of presenting his views so convincingly as to force conviction 
 on the minds of his hearers and his readers. 
 
 The executive talent of Mr. Lincoln was remarkable he Was 
 emphatically the head of his own administration, the ultimate judge at 
 all points and on all occasions, when questions of weight were to be 
 decided. He had not only full trust in his own capacity, but a deep 
 sense of his own responsibility a responsibility which could not be 
 transferred, and for which he felt answerable to his conscience and to 
 God. 
 
 There has been a discussion as to Mr. Lincoln's religious belief. 
 He was silent as to his own preference among creeds. Prejudice 
 against any particular religion he did not entertain. Allied all his life 
 with Protestant Christianity, he thankfully availed himself of the services 
 of an eminent Catholic Prelate, Archbishop Hughes, of New York, in a 
 personal mission to England of great importance at a crisis when the 
 relations between the two countries were disturbed and threatening. 
 Throughout the whole period of the war he constantly directed the 
 attention of the nation to dependence upon God. It may indeed be 
 doubted whether he omitted this in a single state-paper. In every 
 message to Congress, in every proclamation to the people, he made it 
 prominent. 
 
 In July, '63, after the battle of Gettysburg, he called upon the people 
 to give thanks, because "it has pleased Almighty God to hearken to the 
 supplications and prayers of an afflicted people, and to vouchsafe signal 
 and effective victories to the Army and Navy of the United States," and 
 he asked the people "to render homage to the Divine Majesty, and to^ 
 invoke the influence of His Holy Spirit to subdue the auger which has 
 produced and so long sustained a needless and cruel rebellion." OH' 
 another occasion, recounting the blessings which had come to the Union,; 
 he said, "No human counsel hath devised, nor hath any mortal hand 
 worked out these things." They are the gracious gifts of the most High 
 God, who while dealing with us in anger for our sins, hath nevertheless 
 remembered mercy." Throughout his entire official career attending 
 at all times with exacting duty and painful responsibility he never 
 forgot his own dependence or the dependence of the people upon a 
 higher power. In his last public address delivered to an immense 
 
220 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 crowd assembled at the White House on the nth of April, to congratu- 
 late him on the victories of the Union, the President standing as he 
 unconsciously was in the very shadow of death, said reverently to his 
 hearers, "In the midst of your joyous expression, He from whom all 
 blessings flow must first be remembered." Jas. G. Elaine. 
 
 ELEMENTARY SCIENCE IN THE PUBLIC SCHOOLS. 
 
 (Pages 193 and 194.) 
 
 The question, should science be taught in the public or common 
 schools, I answer in the affirmative, most decidedly yes. Which of the 
 sciences? Should it be chemistry or physics or zoology or mineralogy 
 or botany or physiology or geology? I answer all of them as one sub- 
 ject the study of nature. Specialization, differentiation or the division 
 of labor characterizes civilization. It is forced upon us in the higher 
 studies. This is simply a matter of necessity due to the vastness of the 
 field of higher learning, the shortness of life and the limits of the 
 human mind. But it is possible to specialize only in the maturity of 
 manhood and womanhood. It is not possible in childhood. The youth- 
 ful mind is not capable of such work. The young mind is unable to fix 
 attention or concentrate thought upon a subject, and particularly if the 
 subject be studied in an isolated and disconnected manner. Add to 
 this a method that is both systematic and abstract, and the avenues to 
 learning are completely closed. In very early years, say before the age 
 of eleven or twelve, the average child cannot readily or profitably study 
 anything in an isolated, a systematic or abstract manner, and he can 
 do it but very feebly at this age. 
 
 The study of a subject systematically, by classification, the study of 
 the abstract and the cultivation of the reasoning faculty should not be 
 attempted early. Nature rebels against it. It is the faculty of percep- 
 tion which appears first. This is the faculty which should receive the 
 attention of the teacher of children. To the cultivation of observation, 
 expression and memory, along with the full physical development of the 
 child, all the best energies of the teacher should be given. It is not a 
 question then of dividing and classifying the natural and physical 
 sciences and choosing one or more of them to be placed on the curriculum 
 of schools. This is necessary and proper in the later years of the high 
 school courses and in the higher institutions, but not in the common 
 school or to any great extent in the lower classes of the high school. 
 System, method and classification in study are exceedingly important 
 for matured persons ; but they do not belong to early life. As soon as 
 the mind is prepared to undertake such work, it should be begun and 
 it should be increased very slowly, gradually and almost imperceptibly. 
 I repeat it, common school pupils should not be taught zoology as a 
 distinct science, nor botany, nor physics, nor geology as such. 
 
 All systems of classification, even to the division of these, are arti- 
 ficial. Chemistry, physics, mineralogy, botany, zoology, physiology and 
 geology should not be separated. These sciences come naturally 
 together when studied in this way. Let the child see the fish swim in 
 the water, the bird fly through the air, the duck swim and sail on the 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 221 
 
 pond. Let him see the sand, gravel, grass, trees, flowers, butterflies, 
 beetles, worms, crops, streams, hills, ravines, bees, squirrels, ants, 
 crickets, birds, snow, rain, stones, rocks and fossils, just as they occur 
 in nature. In any case, even to adult persons, the associations are of 
 vital significance. Many a time it happens that a mineral sample or a 
 bit of rock or fossil by itself is of little use in helping us to understand 
 some question of moment. Again, an extract from a book may be 
 unintelligible or ambiguous. But in the one instance permit us to see 
 the associated mineral and rocks in position, and in the other to read 
 the context, and what a flood of light is let in upon us. The relations 
 which objects of the three kingdoms of nature bear toward one another 
 are of the utmost importance. But in addition to the importance of the 
 associations and relations, the ease with which children are enabled to 
 comprehend the characteristic structure, habits and uses of anything 
 when studied as it occurs in nature is something the teacher and parent 
 connot afford to ignore. Prof. Montgomery. 
 
 TRANSCRIPT OP A. R. BAILEY'S NOTES. 
 
 (Page 195.) 
 
 Testimony taken Saturday, April 25, 1891, before Hon. 
 Grover Cleveland as referee, in the case of McHugh vs. The 
 Manhattan Elevated Railway Co., in New York City, by A. 
 R. Bailey, official stenographer in the Elevated Railroad liti- 
 gation : 
 
 Q. Mr. Davis, what is your business ? 
 
 A. Real estate broker and appraiser. 
 
 Q. For how many years have you been engaged in the real estate 
 business ? 
 
 A. Twenty years and over. 
 
 Q. During that time have you carried on the real estate business 
 in the city of New York ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir, in different parts of the city of New York. 
 
 Q. Have you also had charge of estates and collected rents of prop- 
 erty during that time ? 
 
 A. Well, to a limited extent I have collected rents. 
 
 Q. Have you also appraised property for different parties during 
 that time ? 
 
 A. I have appraised quite a number of parcels ; I am appraising 
 all the time. 
 
 Q. Are you regularly employed as an appraiser bv any companies 
 or firms ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir, two or three of them. 
 
 Q. Are you at present so employed ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Do you take the publications that contain the transfers of prop- 
 erty ? 
 
 A. I have taken the Record and Guide for a number of years ; I 
 can't say how many, but I think nearly twenty. 
 
 Q. Are you a membeer of the Real Estate Exchange ? 
 
222 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 A. I am, sir. 
 
 Q. And have you frequently attended auction sales at the Real 
 Estate Exchange ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir, sometimes every day and sometimes twice a week, just 
 as I have the opportunity and time or disposition to know what any par- 
 ticular sale brings that takes place. 
 
 Q. Are you familiar with 34th street east of Third avenue ? 
 
 A. I am acquainted with the premises around there, yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Have you been acquainted with that locality for several years ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. And have you had actual transactions there ? 
 
 A. I have sold two or three pieces of property at different times in 
 34th street 
 
 Q. And have you kept yourself informed as to the condition of real 
 estate in that section for a number of years ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir, I have had property for sale in different parts. 
 
 Q. Have you viewed the premises in suit, No. 327, East 34th street, 
 for the purpose of obtaining information upon which you could esti- 
 mate the value of those premises ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Have you visited those premises more than once for that pur- 
 pose? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. When did you last visit those premises ? 
 
 A. This morning. 
 
 Q. Will you describe the location of the premises 327 East 34th 
 street ? 
 
 A. Those premises are on the northerly side of 34th street, about 
 the middle of the block, and contain 600 feet. There is a four-story 
 tenement on the property, with a store and sub-cellar, and it is in very 
 poor condition, without improvements of any kind. There are eight 
 rooms on the floor over the store, and these rooms are rather small and 
 uninviting. 
 
 Q. What is the condition of the hallway ? 
 
 A. It is a dilapidated affair. The doors were all open when I went 
 there and there was a stone against the door to keep it open, and it had 
 every appearance of a house that no one cared about. 
 
 Q. What, in your opinion, is the present fee value of the lot and 
 building of the premises in suit ? 
 
 A. I placed the lot at $8,000 and the building at $13,000. The lot is 
 more valuable in proportion to the building upon it. A full lot there 
 would be worth $10,000. 
 
 Q. What was the value of the premises in 1872 to 1874 ? 
 
 A. I place it at $i 1,000. 
 
 Q. What do you consider the rental value of these premises ? 
 
 A. About $800. 
 
 Q. Has there been a change in this block in the last twenty years ? 
 
 A. I don't think there has been an improvement of any kind on 
 this block in the last twenty years. 
 
 Q. Have there not been more improvements in buildings on other 
 streets in that vicinity? 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 223 
 
 A. Thirty-third street has improved materially by modern tene- 
 ment houses, called " cold-water flats," which gives the street a very 
 desirable appearance. 
 
 Q. Is there any other block on the side streets similar in all res- 
 pects, having a series of old-fashioned tenement houses with no 
 improvements ? 
 
 A. Well, Thirty-third street, between First and Second avenue, 
 and 3 ad street also, are about the same. There are some private houses 
 in 32d street. 
 
 Q. Have there not been some modern tenement houses built there? 
 
 A. I don't think there has been any modern tenements between 
 First and Second avenues. 
 
 Q. Have you been familiar with the general character of 34th street 
 for a number of years and the reputation of the street. 
 
 A. The entire surroundings from 3oth street to 36th street has 
 always been considered a very hard neighborhood, mostly occupied by 
 ruffians, but in latter years since this good class of factories has gone up 
 on First avenue it has somewhat improved the tone of it. 
 
 TRANSCRIPT OF R. S. WRIGHT'S REPORTING NOTES. 
 
 (Page 196.) 
 
 Extract from an address by Mr. B. P. Roberts, on The 
 Use of the Storage Battery for lighting Purposes, delivered 
 at a meeting of the Civil Engineers of Cleveland, O., Oct. 4, 
 1892. 
 
 Mr. Roberts Mr. President : In incandescent lighting it is neces- 
 sary to have constant E. M. F. (electro motive force.) Unfortunately the 
 batteries drop in voltage, also there seems to be line loss of not less than 
 three or four per cent, at full load. When at light load, the line loss being 
 practically nothing, the lamps are strained to that extent, and moreover 
 this is aggravated by the fact that the time of light load commencement 
 is when the E. M. F. is two volts per cell , giving five per cent, m ore voltage 
 than when the battery has reached its normal condition. Another diffi- 
 culty arises from the fact that two and a quarter volts per cell are neces- 
 sary when charging; and, if it is desired to tnrn on the lamps while the 
 battery is charging, it is necessary to insert resistance in the lamp cir- 
 cuit, or to use lewer cells for the same. This can be accomplished 
 automatically, but it is extremely difficult to construct automatic ap- 
 paratus which can always be relied upon for this purpose. Probably the 
 best arrangement is merely an automatic device which will cut out the 
 light circuit while the battery is charging. There are three mtthods for 
 using the storage battery for lighting purposes. The first is locating 
 the batteries at the power house. The second is locating them in sub- 
 stations which are the center of distribution for a small district. The 
 third, locating them in each building where the light is desired. The 
 first has the following advantage: The E. M. F. on the line can be con- 
 trolled in the same manner as it would be if dynamos were operating. 
 The batteries are under constant inspection, and it would seem easier 
 
224 PRACTICAL SHOR'l HAND. 
 
 to keep constant load on the engines than when using either of the 
 other plans. The second plan has some of the advantages of the first 
 and some of the disadvautagt s of the third. The third has the disad- 
 vantages incident to installing a large number of cells in each house in 
 order to supply the maximum output, if required, which would proba- 
 bly be ten times or more the general output. The first plan is, there- 
 fore, the most debirable when the lamps are not situated too far from 
 the station, the line loss in such a case being a large factor. The sec- 
 ond plan can be resorted to when the lamps are at a great distance from 
 the station and therefore the current can be sent over the line at a 
 higher E. M. F. than would be used when the batteries are charged in 
 series. The third plan is seldom advisable. One great advantage ob- 
 tained from using the storage battery is that the engines can be kept 
 on their most economical load all the time while operating, and this is 
 especially advantageous when using compound-engines. In large sta- 
 tions not using batteries there are generally so many engines that the 
 same result can be accomplished, but in the smaller stations having 
 only two or three engines, it is probable that for a considerable portion 
 of the time one or two engines will be operating under very light load, 
 and consequent inefficiency. The batteries can be charged either from 
 a constant potential and varying current system or from a constant 
 current and varying potenial. The first is used if they are located at 
 not too great a distance from the station. If, however, the lamps are 
 at a great distance from the station, the second system can be used 
 with an arc dynamo for charging, and the line loss will be very 
 small. This was the system exploited by the Brush Company. One 
 trouble with this method is that the charging current is of such high 
 E. M. F. that it is not safe to have the batteries connected with the 
 house wires when the battery is charging. Automatic devices to dis- 
 connect the house wires are therefore desirable, but owing to their un- 
 certainty it is probably better to use hand-switches. 
 
 Mr. Barber Mr. President: I think there is one fundamental 
 trouble with the storage battery, and that is that when the battery is 
 charged and discharged and charged again, it does not return to' its 
 former condition. There is a difference. There is a deterioration which 
 takes place every time. Of course it is very slight in the best batteries; 
 that of itself, I think, is iatal to the battery. 
 
 TRANSCRIPT OP NOTES BY FRED. IRLAND, 
 
 OFFICAI, REPORTER, UNITED STATES HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES. 
 
 (Page 197.) 
 
 MR. WILKINSON. Now, Mr. Speaker, when these individual 
 conferees were such indifferent listeners, as I have described, and 
 protested that the information that was offered them was alreadv 
 possessed by them, I could not help being astounded at the extent and 
 variety of the knowledge that must be possessed by any one man to 
 master in such a complete manner all the vast and varied interests 
 affected by this bill I felt as Goldsmith says the villagers felt about 
 their schoolmaster: 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 225 
 
 And still they gazed, and still the wonder grew 
 That one small head could carry all he knew. 
 
 [Laughter.] 
 
 I have said, Mr. Speaker, that this was a sectional bill. The gentle- 
 man from Ohio [MR. McKiNLEY] told us the other day that this bill was 
 not sectional because it placed a duty on yellow pine higher than the 
 duty on white pine. So far as yellow pine is concerned, there is an 
 enormous quantity of it shipped abroad from the Gulf States Louisiana, 
 Mississippi, Alabama and Florida. They are large exporters of it, but 
 import none whatever, and none of the people interested in the business 
 to whom I ever spoke on the subject seemed to care one whit what the 
 duty on yellow pine was. 
 
 But, Mr. Speaker, the sectionalism of which I have spoken has not 
 been omitted in the sugar schedule. Maple syrup is given a duty of 20 
 cents a gallon in addition to the bounty on maple sugar, but cane syrup 
 and cane molasses, all the products of the cane up to 1 6 Dutch standard, 
 are made free. 
 
 MR. DINGLEY. The gentleman is mistaken as to maple syrup. 
 It was struck out in conference. 
 
 REPORTING NOTES OF EDMUND DANIEL, 
 
 STENOGRAPHER OF THE WAYNE CIRCUIT COURT, DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
 
 (Page 198.) 
 CROSS-EXAMINATION BY MR. CONELY. 
 
 Q. Will you give us the date, Mr. Clark, of the very commence- 
 ment of your employment with the George T. Smith Middlings Purifier 
 Company ? 
 
 A. As I remember it, Mr. Conely, I was there eight years and a 
 little over with the company, being apart I quit there in January, 1887, 
 and I began eight years and something like three months as I remember 
 it, before that. The first three months that I worked was in the latter 
 part of 1878, I should think it was. 
 
 Q. I notice in your testimony given in a case which you had against 
 the company you say: " I think that employment began the latter part 
 of 1878?" 
 
 A. No. 
 
 Q. "A. My active employment continued to the loth of January. 
 1887." Is that correct? 
 
 A. I think that is right. 
 
 Q. You first commenced under an oral contract, didn't you, verbal ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Then you had a written contract ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Will you let me have the first written contract ? 
 
 A. If it is in the files. 
 
 Q. What files? 
 
 A. The files in this case. 
 
 Q. It does not have to be. It ought not to be, but it may be. I 
 will read this contract, and if it is correct, as copied, you can say so. 
 
226 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (Reading) " The George T. Smith Middlings Purifier Company, a cor- 
 poration duly organized under the laws of the state of Michigan, doing 
 business at the City of Jackson, Michigan, party of the first part, and 
 Myron W. Clark, of Parma, Jackson Co., Mich., party of the second 
 part, agree and contract as follows : Party of the second part is to act as 
 general and collecting agent for said Purifier Company during ihe year 
 1883 at a yearly salary of $4,500, and his necessary and reasonable travel- 
 ing expenses, which salary the party of the first part agrees to pay. 
 Provided, however, that if the gross amount of sales of machines by 
 said Purifier Company during said 1883 is as large as the gross amount 
 of such sales for such company in the year 1882, then, in consideration 
 of such sales, the salary of the party of the second part shall be $5,000 
 instead of $4,500, and the party of the first part agrees to pay him 
 accordingly. This contract to expire by limitation on the 3ist day of 
 December, 1883. (Signed) George T. Smith, President, M. W. Clark." 
 
 A. So far as I remember it that is a correct copy. 
 
 Q. Prior to that you had only a verbal contract ? 
 
 A. That is all, yes, sir. 
 
 Q. What was your salary when you first went into the employment 
 of the George P. Smith Middlings Purifier Co. ? 
 
 A. $75 a month. 
 
 Q. How soon was it raised ? 
 
 A. At the beginning of January of the next year ; of the first year. 
 
 Q. What was it for that year ? 
 
 A. $1200 I think. 
 
 Q. And when was it raised again ? 
 
 A. The next year it was raised to $2,500. 
 
 Q. That would be when was it next raised ? Give us the raises. 
 We will go right along. 
 
 A. The next year to $3,500. The next year to $4,500. 
 
 Q. Is that the first of the written contract ? 
 , A. No, I think that $4,500 was prior to that contract. 
 
 Q. So you received $4,500 for one year before the written contract ? 
 
 A. Please follow these years along to see if I am correct. I give 
 this entirely from memory, and I may be wrong. 
 
 Q. Your present memory is that you received $4,500 at least one 
 year before the term of the written contract ? 
 
 A. Before the contract, yes, sir, but it may be that is not so. It 
 may be that $3,500 was the last before that. 
 
 REPORTING NOTES BY L. B. CASE, 
 
 STENOGRAPHER OF UNITED STATES COURT, DETROIT, MICHIGAN. 
 
 Page 199. 
 
 CLINTON BENTLEY, after being duly sworn on behalf of the libelant, 
 testified as follows: 
 Examined by MR. CANFIEUX 
 Q. Where do you live ? 
 A. Ashtabula, O. 
 Q. What is your business ? 
 A. Sailor. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 227 
 
 Q. How long have you sailed? 
 
 A, About six years. 
 
 Q- What vessel were you on in 1891? 
 
 A. The C. H. Green. 
 
 Q. In what capacity? 
 
 A. Wheelsman. 
 
 Q. Do you remember a collision that occurred between the Japan 
 and the Whitaker up near White Rock, on Lake Superior ? 
 
 A. I remember some incidents of it, yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Were you on watch on your vesssel at the time ? 
 I was. 
 
 At the wheel? 
 Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Do you remember the Whitaker and tow passing your tow? 
 
 A. I do. 
 
 Q. And according to your judgment how far from your tow dia 
 she pass. How far to the westward did she pass you ? 
 
 A. From half a mile to a mile. 
 
 Q. Do you remember seeing a steamer coming up the lake? 
 
 A. I do. 
 
 Q. Do you remember the squall that set in ? 
 
 A. I do. 
 
 Q. Did you see that steamer before the squall ? 
 
 A. The one down the lake ? 
 
 Q. Yes, sir, the one that was coming up down below. 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. And how did she seem to be from you ? 
 
 A. She seemed to be very near ahead, if anything aport a trifle, on 
 our port bow. 
 
 Q. Have you an idea of the distance she was when you first sav; 
 her? 
 
 A. Well, judging as I saw her, off about ten miles ; eight or ten 
 miles. 
 
 Q. And when you last saw her before the squall how far did she 
 seem to be ? 
 
 A. In the neighborhood of three miles, more or less. 
 
 Q. On which bow was she when you last saw her ? 
 
 A. Trifle on our port bow. 
 
 Q. When the squall shut in I suppose you lost sight of her? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Do yon remember whether you got any order after the squall 
 set in ? 
 
 A. Yes, sir, I did. 
 
 Q. What was that order ? 
 
 A. To port a half. 
 
 Q. Who communicated that order to you? 
 
 A. The first mate. 
 
 Q. When you saw the Japan, you say a little on your port bow, on 
 which side did you expect her to pass you? 
 
 A. I expected she would pass us ou the port side. 
 
228 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Q. Now do you know what kind of a boat that was that you saw? 
 
 A. Yes, I do, some features of her. 
 
 Q. What line did she belong to ? 
 
 A. She was a Lake Superior Liner, the Lake Superior Transpor- 
 tation Co. 
 
 Q. And as to being a passenger boat? 
 
 A. Yes, with one closed cabin. 
 
 Q, Did you obey that order to port at that point? 
 
 A. I did immediately. 
 
 Q. Well, it was thick, I suppose, objects were obscured? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. Now, how soon did it brighten up again after it got thick? 
 
 A. From the time it first set in to from four to six or eight minutes, 
 I should think, I could not tell exactly. 
 
 Q. When it brightened up what did you see ahead of you ? 
 
 A. I saw the Unadilla and the Watson, making them out to be the 
 Whitaker's consorts. 
 
 Q. What did you see of the Japan ? 
 
 A. The Japan was as near as I could judge in under the Whitaker's 
 stern. 
 
 Q. And the Whitaker was heading which way ? 
 
 A. The Whitaker was heading well in towards the shore? 
 
 Q. Will you state whether you passed the Whitaker's tow after this 
 collision, after the squall cleared up? 
 
 A. We did pass it, yes, sir. 
 
 Q. How did the tow seem to be in respect to their course ? 
 
 A. As near as I could judge they were well on their course down 
 the lake. 
 
 Q. Did you see any other steamer before the squall coming up 
 besides this one you saw on your port bow, which you have designated 
 as the japan ? 
 
 A. No, sir, nothing to attract my attention. 
 
 Q. Did you at any time see a steamer coming up before the squall 
 on your starboard bow ? 
 
 A. I did not. 
 
 Q. Was there anything to prevent you from seeing it if one had 
 been over there? 
 
 A. There was nothing to prevent me from seeing it, no, sir. 
 
 CROSS EXAMINATION BY MR. GOUI.DER. 
 
 Q. You say you would have noticed it? 
 
 A. Noticed which ? 
 
 Q. Any other boat that had been around there ? 
 
 MR. CANFIEUX I guess you misunderstood him. He said if there 
 had been any, there was nothing to prevent him from seeing it. 
 
 Q. Then you think you may have seen it ? 
 
 A. I might have. 
 
 Q. That is as strong as you can put that? 
 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. When the collision had occurred, the squall cleared up, you 
 could see all about this boat, on her 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 229 
 
 REPORTING NOTES OP DAVID WOLFE BROWN, 
 
 CHIEF OF CORPS OF STENOGRAPHERS, UNITED STATES HOUSE OF 
 REPRESENTATIVES. 
 
 (Page 200.) 
 
 MR. DAIvZELL. Mr. Speaker, I shall assume that the facts con- 
 nected with this case have already been sufficiently discussed to put 
 them entirely into the possession of the House, so that it will be 
 unnecessary for me to make any recital of them. The question 
 
 under discussion has no relation to the ultimate right of either of these 
 parties to a seat in this House. The question at present is simply as to 
 a.prima facie right; or, in other words, as to what the Clerk ought to 
 have done, in making up the roll of this House, with respect to these 
 two applicants for membership. 
 
 Now, the Revised Statutes (section 31) provide that " in making up 
 the roll of members at the first meeting of a Congress, the Clerk of the 
 next preceding House shall place thereon the names of such persons 
 and of those persons only whose credentials show that they were 
 regularly elected in accordance with the laws of their States, respectively, 
 or the laws of the United States." 
 
 Now, it will be observed that this statute points out the party who 
 shall make up the roll, to-wit, the Clerk of the House; it designates the 
 parties who shall be put on that roll, tp-wit, those whose credentials 
 show that they were regularly elected in accordance with the laws of 
 their respective States or of the United States. It prescribes, further- 
 more, impliedly at least, the time at which the Clerk of the House shall 
 make up the roll in accordance with the credentials of its members, 
 to-wit, upon the assembling of Congress. 
 
 I pause here to say that nobody, therefore, can be deceived by 
 the claim that because the Clerk, upon the receipt. 
 
230 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 CHAPTER ON PHONETICS, 
 
 With Special Beference to Shorthand. 
 
 FIRST PRINCIPLES. 
 
 350. Language, which is defined in the treatises on grammar as 
 the medium for the communication of thought, is made up of sentences, 
 clauses, phrases, words, syllables and letters. The last analysis to which 
 written language is susceptible is letters. Letters represent sounds, 
 ard sounds form the ultimate analysis of spoken language, and the basis 
 of modern shorthand writing. As a valuable aid to the study of short- 
 hand we present a rather full chapter on the study of the elementary 
 sounds. While theoretically it is true that we have to deal only with 
 sounds in shorthand, yet practically it is true only in a limited sense. 
 Quite as many sounds are omitted as are expressed. 
 
 To some students who have been imperfectly trained in English, 
 and to others who may desire to refer occasionally to the first principles 
 of language this chapter will be helpful. Language existed before 
 letters. In other words, sounds were used in speech long before letters 
 grew to represent them. Our present letters had their origin in the 
 ancient picture writing or hieroglyphics of the Phoenicians. Their 
 history can be distinctly traced, and however pleasant and tempting a 
 field of inquiry opens before us in this historical study of language, we 
 will confine our present inquiry to language as we find it. If the student 
 discovers the relation between letters and sounds he will have little dif- 
 ficulty in the study of phonetics and it will pave the way to an easier 
 mastery of shorthand. Let us look for a moment at the first principles 
 of language. 
 
 351. The sounds of human speech are produced by the breath pas- 
 sing over the organs of speech, the lips, teeth, tongue, and palate. The 
 infinite modifications of articulate sounds found in language are produced 
 by the vibration of the breath while the organs of speech are held in dif- 
 ferent positions. 
 
 VOWELS AND CONSONANTS. 
 
 352. An elementary sound is one that cannot be divided, and is 
 produced by a single impulse of the voice. As, the word ebb has two 
 elementary sounds, that of e and of b- 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 231 
 
 There are forty elementary sounds of the English language of 
 which twelve are called vowels, twenty-four consonants, and four 
 diphthongs. 
 
 353. A Vowel is an open, unobstructed tone which may be pro- 
 longed at will. The word vowel comes from a Latin word meaning 
 open. 
 
 354. A Consonant (from the Latin con, with, and sonant, sound- 
 ing) is a tone more or less obstructed by the organs of speech, and must 
 be sounded with a vowel to form a syllable. 
 
 The sound of a consonant may be given without the aid of a vowel, 
 as it has a distinct and independent sound of its own, but a consonant 
 cannot be named without the aid of a vowel. The student will note the 
 distinction between the sound of a consonant and the name of the con- 
 conant. Thus, the name of h is aitch, while the sound is whispered or 
 rustling utterance produced by the breath passing over the partly closed 
 organs of speech. 
 
 355. The Vowels are a, e, i, o, and u. JFand y are sometimes vowels, 
 or substitutes for vowel sounds. 
 
 The distinction between vowels and consonants is not always sharply 
 defined. One of the distinguishing characteristics of a vowel is that it 
 may form a syllable when standing alone, while a consonant must be 
 sounded with a vowel to form a syllable. But even this distinction does 
 not always obtain, as n in the words reckon, ripen forms a complete 
 syllable, the e being entirely silent. So, the letter / in such words as 
 riddle, etc. 
 
 356. Vowels have what are called long and short sounds accord- 
 ing to their quality and the relative time which is occupied in uttering 
 the sound. There are also other variations of vowel sounds produced 
 by the organs being put in different positions, and are called broad, 
 slender, medial, according to the nature of the sound. 
 
 A SUBSTITUTE. 
 
 357. The elementary sounds are not always represented by their 
 appropriate letters. For instance, the long sound of a is sometimes re- 
 presented by ey and ei as in they and weight. When one letter thus 
 performs the functions of another it is said to be a substitute for it. 
 Thus, * is a substitute for e long in the word machine. This irregularity 
 is what makes our English spelling and pronunciation so difficult. 
 
 358. A long (a), the open or vowel sound in make, airfreight, they, 
 is produced by speaking the letter a as heard in the alphabet. It is 
 most frequently represented by a and is therefore called a. A letter 
 which most frequently represents a sound gives the name to the sound. 
 It will be seen by the examples above that this sound is not always re- 
 presented by this letter. The same sound is represented by ei in weight 
 and ey in they. 
 
 359. A short (a). This is the vowel sound heard in man, latch, etc., 
 
232 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 and is always represented by a. It is called a short. This sound may 
 be produced by trying to pronounce the word at without touching the 
 tongue to the roof of the mouth. 
 
 360. A medial (a). This sound always occurs before the letter r as 
 air, fair, prayer. Considerable difference of opinion exists as to the 
 exact quality of this sound. It is so nearly like short a (In most sections 
 of the country) that in shorthand it is represented by the same character 
 as a short. Graham and the English phonographers consider this sound 
 so nearly like a long that they represent it by the same shorthand sign, 
 that is, a heavy dot in the second position. In the Western sections of 
 this country the phonographer will represent this sound by the same 
 sign as used for a short. 
 
 361. A slender (a). This sound is heard in ah, far, calm, and has 
 no substitute. It is always represented by the letter a, and is produced 
 by pronouncing the word ah. 
 
 362. A broad (a). The vowel sound of call, law. The letter o is 
 sometimes found representing this sound, as in for, but it is most frequ- 
 ently represented by a. It is produced by speaking the word awe. 
 
 363. E long {). The vowel sound of me. Its distinct sound may 
 be produced by sounding e as heard in the alphabet. It has f for a 
 substitute, and is a member of several digraphs. 
 
 This letter, together with its short sound, occurs more frequently 
 than any other letter in the alphabet. At the end of words it is usually 
 silent, but serves to indicate that the preceding vowel has the long sound, 
 as mane, cane, mete, etc. 
 
 364. E short (e), the vowel sound as heard in met, any, bury. It is 
 usually represented by e but sometimes by a and u as in the above 
 examples. 
 
 365. I long (i) is properly a diphthong and is treated of under 
 that head. 
 
 366. I short ( i). This is the vowel sound heard in the words hymn, 
 English, city, women, etc. O, e, u, and y are often used to represent this 
 sound. The simplest specific direction for producing this sound is to 
 endeavor to pronounce the word it without allowing the tip of the 
 tongue to touch the roof of the mouth. 
 
 367. O long (o). This is the vowel sound heard in the words oak, 
 beau, sew. Eau and ew are the only substitutes for this letter. To pro- 
 duce the sound utter the sound of o as heard in the alphabet. 
 
 368. O short { 5 ). The vowel sound heard in doll, on, and what, is the 
 short sound of o. Its only substitute is a as in what. To make this 
 elementary sound, hold the tougue perfectly still and endeavor to pro- 
 nounce the word on, taking care to prolong the sound. 
 
 369. O slender (o). This is the vowel sound heard in the words 
 do, cool. It is always represented by o or oo. 
 
 370. U long (u). This is a diphthong and will be treated under its 
 appropriate head. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 233 
 
 371. U short (ft). This is the vowel sound heard in#/>, and is gener- 
 ally represented by u and hence is called the short sound of u. It has for 
 substitutes e, i, o, oo, and ou, as in son, blood, young, etc. 
 
 There are two distinct shades of this sound which have given rise 
 to endless dispute among phoneticians, and the sound of this vowel in 
 but, flood, earn, etc. is called a neutral vowel, "because of the virtual 
 absence in its utterance of a positive determining position of the organs, 
 it being rather the product of their different position in breathing and 
 the form towards which vowels excessively slighted in pronounciation 
 tend." 
 
 372. U medial (ij). This is the sound of u as heard in pull, full, 
 etc. It has a sound midway between u long and u short, and hence is 
 called a medial sound of u. It is often represented by the letter o as in 
 wolf, foot, etc. 
 
 The Century Dictionary has called this the real short sound of u. 
 aud the so-called short sound is in fact a neutral vowel. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 373. A Diphthong is the union of two vowels sounded in the same 
 syllable.. There are six diphthongs in English and four diphthongal 
 sounds; as, oi, oy; ou, ow; i and u. 
 
 In the utterance of a diphthong neither vowel has its usual sound, 
 but both are so blended as to form one syllable. 
 
 374. Oi, oy, as in oil and boy represents a perfect diphthong. It is 
 composed of the sounds of broad a and short i uttered in rapid 
 succession. 
 
 375. Ou, ow, as in out, cow, form a distinct diphthong. 
 
 376. I. The so-called long sound of * is a blending of the sound of a 
 and e. The sound is sometimes represented by the sound of y as in 
 rhyme. 
 
 377. What is called u long has a distinct y sound preceding the 
 sound of oo, and is hence a diphthong. It has a substitute as ew in new. 
 
 378. A digraph is the use of two letters to rspresent one sound, as 
 ea in mean. 
 
 379. A Triphthong is a union of three vowels in the same syllable, 
 two of which are silent : as, eau in beauty, iew in view. 
 
 380. Consonants are divided into two great classes, spirants and 
 subvocals. 
 
 381. Spirants are consonant sounds produced by the breath pas- 
 sing over the partly closed organs of speech, resulting in a fricative or 
 rustling utterance like the sounds of p and / in the syllables per, ter. 
 They are mere whispers, having no vocal tone. S and h are examples of 
 pure spirants. They are also called aspirates or sibilants. 
 
 382. The Subvocals are the consonants which have an undertone 
 or sort of murmer in the throat or nasal passages. They are heard in 
 the first letters of bay, day, woe. 
 
234 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 383. Cognate Letters are those which are made by the same 
 organs of speech held in the same position, one being a sub vocal and 
 the other a spirant. Thus, p is a cognate of b. The following are 
 cognate letters: p, b; t, d; ch, j; k (c hard) g; f, v; th, th\ s, z; sh, 
 zh ; wh, w. 
 
 NOTE: C 1 soft is equivalent to , g soft to j, and chard to k, as seen in the 
 following words : cent, George, cat. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAKING THE CONSONANT SOUNDS. 
 
 384. p. The sound of p is made by closing the lips and forcing them 
 abruptly apart with the breath. The result will be a whispered utter- 
 ance. 
 
 b. The sound of b is made in the same manner as p but in connec- 
 tion with the undertone or sub-vocal. The undertone or murmur in the 
 air passages must cease as soon as the lips are opened. 
 
 t. Place the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth and 
 force it suddenly away with the breath. 
 
 d. As this letter is the cognate of / it is made in the same manner 
 with the addition of the sub-vocal. 
 
 ch. Close the teeth and suddenly force them apart with the breath. 
 In making this sound it will be seen that the breath is deliberately held 
 for an instant. 
 
 j. (And g soft as in George) is made like that of ch in connection 
 with the sub-vocal. 
 
 k. (And c as in cat) is made by blocking the air passage from the 
 mouth to the throat with the tongue, or closing the palate and suddenly 
 forcing out the breath. 
 
 g. The cognate of k is made in the same manner in connection 
 with the subvocal. 
 
 f . Place the upper teeth upon the lower lip, and let the breath pass 
 between them. 
 
 v. Its cognate is made in the same manner in connection with the 
 subvocal. 
 
 th. Place the tongue loosely against the upper teeth and emit the 
 breath with sufficient force to produce a rustling sound. 
 
 th. The heavy sound represented by th is made in the same 
 manner as the above, in connection with the subvocal. 
 
 385. 36. L, r, n, and m are called Liquids because their sounds 
 unite smoothly with other consonants. 
 
 I. Place the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth, make 
 the undertone or nasal murmur by letting the breath escape on both 
 sides of the tongue. Or try to pronounce the word lo without sounding 
 theo. 
 
 r. Try to pronounce the word ray without sounding the a. 
 
 NOTE: The letter r has a peculiar power of influencing and modifying the 
 sound of the vowel preceding it. For instance, the sound of u in hut is distinctly 
 different from u in hurt. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 235 
 
 m. Close the lips and emit the subvocal through the upper nasal 
 passages. 
 
 n. Place the tip of the tongue against the roof of the mouth and 
 emit the undertone through the nasal passages. 
 
 ng. Close the palate (or prevent all breath from escaping through 
 the mouth) and emit the undertone through the nose ; or, separate the 
 sound of ng from si in sing. , 
 
 NOTE: Observe that this is an elementary sound and differs from the two 
 distinct sounds represented by ng in the word singe. 
 
 y. Place the sides of the tongue against the upper back teeth, 
 leaving the tip free, and emit the subvocal. 
 
 w. Try to pronounce the word way without sounding a. 
 
 s. (And c soft as in cent.) Place the tip of the tongue looselj 
 against the closed teeth and emit the breath with a slight force. 
 
 Z. This sound is made in the same manner with the subvocal. 
 
 sh. Close the teeth, bring the middle of the tongue against the 
 roof of the mouth, and emit the breath with a slight force. Or, try to 
 pronounce the' word show without sounding the o. 
 
 zh. As this is the cognate of sh it is made in the same manner in 
 connection with the undertone or subvocal. 
 
 wh. The vowel sound represented by wh is made by contracting 
 the lips to a round position, and abruptly relaxing them while the 
 breath is rushing out. 
 
 386. Mutes and Semivowels. Consonants are naturally divided 
 into two classes, called mutes and semivowels. This division is founded 
 on the fact that the organs of speech are more closely connected in 
 pronouncing the one class than the other. A mute or close consonant 
 admits of no escape of breath while the organs are in contact. A semi- 
 vowel, as its name implies, does admit of the escape of breath while the 
 organs are in contact. The mutes or pure consonants are p, b. t, d, k, 
 g hard, and c hard. The semivowels are c soft, f, v, th, th, s, z, sh, zh t 
 I, r, m, n, ng and wh. 
 
 The four semivowels /, m, n and r are called liquids. (Century 
 Dictionary) S and z are sometimes called sibilants. 
 
 The teacher may require the student to point out the mutes and 
 semivowels in the following words: teach, make, permit, relative, 
 student, game. 
 
 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 387. Syllabication is the correct division of a word into its con- 
 stituent syllables in writing and printing. 
 
 The division of words into syllables is founded on correct pronun- 
 ciation, that is, the letters of a word must be arranged into syllables 
 exactly as they are heard when correctly pronounced. But this rule is 
 not always a reliable guide. The breaking of a word at the end of a line 
 in writing and printing is not dependent on any real principles, but 
 largely a matter of conventional usage, and it is sometimes difficult to 
 determine where to divide a word. Printers have established the custom 
 
236 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 of making ure and ing a syllable in such words as rag-ing and junct-ure, 
 instead of ra-ging aud junc-ture, which is a plain violation of true pro- 
 nunciation. It is largely a matter of taste. 
 
 388. Derivatives are generally divided between the primitive parts 
 and terminations: as, fear-less. 
 
 Compound words should be divided into the simple words which 
 compose them. The student may exercise his skill and taste in separat- 
 ing the following words into proper syllables: Farmer, worthy, cornice, 
 juncture, opportunity, aerial, laborious, ratan, regret, transmit, result, 
 return. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 389. Accent is an increased stress or force of voice on a particular 
 syllable. As the very nature of accent implies a comparison of syllables, 
 monosyllables cannot be accented, but every word of more than one sylla- 
 ble has one of its syllables accented, and the accent, of course, falls 
 upon the vowel. Words of three or more syllables have frequently two 
 accents, viz: a primary or principal accent, and a secondary or lighter 
 accent. The primary accent is indicated in dictionaries with an accent 
 mark. The secondary accent is indicated by a lighter mark or by a 
 double accent mark. 
 
 In unaccented syllables, when a vowel is followed by r, the vowel 
 has frequently an obscure sound as of u in but. This obscure sound 
 is exemplified in the following words, tender, mayor, martyr, abundant, 
 republican, pronounced, tendur, mayur, abundunt, republicun. This 
 seems to be the latest teaching of the authorities as exemplified in the 
 Cent Die. (p. xviii). $ut it seems to us better to preserve the vowel's 
 own sound in all cases if possible. We think great care should be taken 
 in pronunciation not to run these accented vowels into this sound if it 
 can be avoided, and we see no reason why it cannot be. The custom of 
 so-called good speakers is not always a safe guide, for great speakers 
 are likely to have some favorite lapsus linguae. It is well here to recall 
 words of Walker, written a hundred years ago: "There is scarcely any- 
 thing more distinguishes a person of mean or good education than the 
 pronunciation of the unaccented vowels. When the vowels are under the 
 accent, the learned and the ignorant, with very few exceptions, pro- 
 nounce them in the same manner, but the unaccented vowels in the 
 mouth of the former have a distinct, open and specific sound, while the 
 latter often totally sink them, or change them into some other sound. 
 Those therefore who wish to pronounce elegantly, must be particularly 
 attentive to the unaccented vowels, as a neat pronunciation of these 
 forms one of the greatest beauties of speaking." 
 
 390. Words are either primitive or derivative. A primitive word 
 is one that is not derived from another word and which can be reduced 
 to no fewer letters without destroying or changing its meaning: as, 
 bring, kind, be. 
 
 A derivative word is one formed from a primitive, generally by the 
 addition of a prefix or suffix : as, unkind, brought, was. 
 
 When the meaning of a word is entirely changed by the addition of 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 237 
 
 a prefix or suffix it is, notwithstanding the addition, a primitive word: 
 as, reproof, in which the meaning of re nor proof is retained. 
 
 In accordance with the specific directions which have been given 
 for the production of the elementary sounds, let the student separate 
 the following words into their elementary sounds, pronouncing each 
 separately. 
 
 SPELLED. 
 
 PRONOUNCED. 
 
 SPEIyl^ED. 
 
 PRONOUNCED. 
 
 me, 
 
 m-e, 
 
 shun, 
 
 sh-u-ii, 
 
 bay, 
 
 b-a, 
 
 bright, 
 
 b-r-I-t, 
 
 calm, 
 
 c-a-m, 
 
 thoroughfares, 
 
 th-u-r-6-f-a-r-z, 
 
 paw, 
 
 P-a 
 
 sail, 
 
 s-a-1, 
 
 oak, 
 
 6-k, 
 
 castle, 
 
 k-a-s-1, 
 
 cool, 
 
 k-g-1, 
 
 thistle, 
 
 th-i-s-1, 
 
 it, 
 
 I-t, 
 
 success, 
 
 s-u-k-s-e-s, 
 
 met, 
 
 m-e-t, 
 
 plum, 
 
 p-l-u-m, 
 
 at, 
 
 a-t, 
 
 plume, 
 
 p-l-ii-m, 
 
 not, 
 
 n-o-t, 
 
 raised, 
 
 r-a-z-d, 
 
 up, 
 full, 
 
 u-p, 
 f-9-1, 
 
 possessed, 
 illness, 
 
 p-o-s-T'-s-t, 
 i-1-n-e-s. 
 
 shrine, 
 
 sh-r-i-n, 
 
 funny, 
 
 f-u-n-I, 
 
 thin, 
 
 th-i-n, 
 
 lily, 
 
 l-i-l-I, 
 
 month, 
 
 ui-ii-ii-lli. 
 
 massy, 
 
 m-a-s-i, 
 
 stretched, 
 
 s-t-r-e-ch-t, 
 
 duty, 
 
 d-u-t-I, 
 
 mouth, 
 
 m-ou-th, 
 
 teach, 
 
 t-e-ch, 
 
 mouths, 
 
 m-ou-th-z, 
 
 china, 
 
 ch-I-n-a, 
 
 whisps, 
 
 wh-i-s-p-s, 
 
 theme, 
 
 th-e-m, 
 
 ghosts, 
 worlds, 
 
 g-o-s-t-s, 
 w-ft-r-1-d-z, 
 
 wring, 
 sing, 
 
 r-I-ng, 
 s-i-ng, 
 
 sixth, 
 
 s-i-k-s-th, 
 
 cherry, 
 
 ch-e-r-y. 
 
 Analyze in a similar manner, the following words : Ache, oak, eke, 
 key, caw, easy, gnaw, check, ship, calm, tithe, loth, loathe, damage, 
 quell, choir, dilate, priest, shrink, gifts, still, lax, box, fox, extra, deputy, 
 interest, compliment, church, exchange, embezzlement, illustrate, tem- 
 pest, syllable, avoirdupoise. 
 
238 
 
 PRACTICAL S 
 
 GLOSSARY. 
 
 391. A list of of several hundred frequently recurring words wit 
 their outlines, for convenient reference. 
 
 Abandon Ben 3 -Den 
 abate Bee 2 -Tee 
 abode Bee 2 -Dee 
 abominable Bee ^Men-Bee 
 abomination Bee^Men-Eshun 
 abrupt-ness Bee-Ray-Pet 
 absorb Bees 2 -Ray-Bee 
 abstemious Bees ^Tee-Ems 
 abstract Bee 3 -Ster 
 absurd-ity Bees 2 -Ard 
 accountant Kent 3 -Ent 
 accumulate Kay 3 -Em-Let 
 acid Es 3 -Dee 
 ascetic acid Est 3 -Kays-Dee 
 actuary Ket 3 -Ray 
 actor Kay-Ter 3 
 adjacent Jays 2 -Net 
 adhesion Deeshun 1 
 adversary Def 2 -Rays-Ray 
 aesthetic Es 2 -Thet : Kay 
 agriculture Ger 2 -Kel (Ter) 
 ah Hay 3 
 alien Len 2 (voc.) 
 altitude Let 2 -Tee-Dee 
 ambiguity Emb 2 -Gay-Tee 
 anatomy En-.Tee 2 -Em 
 ancestor En-Esster 3 
 ancient En-Ishnt 2 
 annihilate En 1 -Let 
 antecedent Nets-Dent 2 
 apparatus Per 2 -Tees 
 arbitrary Ar 3 -Bet (Ray) 
 architect Ar 2 -Ket (w. s.) 
 artist Ray 3 -Teest 
 ascertain Es 2 -Ret-En 
 
 assault Es^Let 
 
 assets Es 2 -Tees 
 
 asylum Es 2 -Lay-Em 
 
 Atlantic Ocean Tee 2 -Lent-Kay- 
 
 shun 
 
 atmosphere Tee 2 -Ems-Fer 
 attorney Ter 2 -En 
 audacity Dees 1 -Tee 
 audience Dens 1 
 auspicious Es^Pee (w. s.) 
 avail Vee 2 -El 
 avarice Vee 3 -Rays 
 avocation Vee 3 -Kayshun 
 
 B 
 
 Balance Blens 3 
 bankrupt-cy Bee 3 -Ing-Ray-Pet 
 baptise-d Bee 2 -Pee (w. s.) 
 baptism Bee 2 -Pees-Em 
 barometer Ber 2 -Emter 
 barometrical Ber 2 Emter-Kel 
 Benjamin Ben 2 -Jay-Men 
 barrack Bee 3 -Ray-Kay 
 benefactor Ben 2 -Ef-Kayter 
 benefactress Ben 2 -Ef-Kay-Terf 
 beneficent Ben 2 -Efs-Net 
 beneficial Ben 2 -Ef-Shel 
 beneficiary Ben 2 -Ef-Sher 
 benevolent Ben 2 -Vee-Lent 
 between Bet 1 -Wen 
 biography Bee^Ger-Ef 
 belladonna Bee 2 -Lay-Dee-En 
 belligerent Bel 2 -Jrent 
 bequeath Bee^Kay-Ith 
 biennial Bee^Nel 
 bombastic Bee 3 -Embs-Kay 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 239 
 
 brilliant Ber 2 -Lent 
 Buffalo Bee 2 -Pel 
 bulletin Bee 2 -Lay-Ten 
 bouyant Bee ^En-Tee 
 
 c 
 
 Calendar KeP-Ender 
 California Kief l -Ray (En) 
 captain Kay 2 -Pet (w. s.) 
 casual Kays 3 -Lay 
 catalogue Ket 3 -Lay-Gay 
 catastrophe Ket-Ster 3 -El 
 -ategory Ket 3 -Ger 
 centrifugal Sent-Ef 2 -Gel 
 centripetal Sent-Pee 2 -Tel 
 certificate Iss-Ret 2 -Ef 
 challenge Chel 2 -Jay (w. s.) 
 character Ker 2 -Kay (Ter) 
 characteristic Ker 2 -Kayst 
 characterize Ker 2 -Kaj'S 
 characterizes Ker 2 -Kayses 
 chattels Chay 3 -Tels 
 chemistry Kay-Ems-Ter 2 
 circular Iss-Ray 2 -Kler 
 collateral Kay 2 -Layter 
 commercial Kay 2 -Mer-Shel 
 community Corn-dot: En-Tee 3 
 conscientious Ish 2 -En-Ishes 
 consequent Con-dot: Iss-Kent 1 
 conservative Iss-Ray 2 -Vee-Tef 
 conspicuous Spec ' -Kays 
 covenant Kay-Ven 2 -Ent 
 courteous Kret-Es 2 
 criterion Kret^Ren 
 
 D 
 
 December Dees 2 -Em (w. s.) 
 deceptive Dees 2 -Pee (w. s.) 
 deficient Dee 2 -Ef- Shay 
 delegate Del 2 -Get 
 deliberate Del 2 -Bret 
 delicacy Del 2 -Kay-Es 
 delight Diet 1 
 
 demurrage Dee 2 -En-Ray-Jay 
 denounce Dee 3 -En-Ens 
 deponent Dee 2 -Pen-Ent 
 derange Der 2 -En-jay 
 destination Deest 2 -Enshun 
 detest Deds 2 -Tee 
 devolve Def 2 -Vee 
 dilapidate Del 2 -Pet (w. s.) 
 diligent Dee 2 -Lay-Jent 
 
 discrepancy Dees 2 -Kay-Pen (Es) 
 discriminate Dees'--Kay-Men (Tee) 
 distinguish DeestMng (w. s.) 
 distribute Deester'-Bet 
 District of Columbia Dees 2 Kel(ws) 
 divulge Def 2 -Jay 
 domestic Dees 2 -Em-Kay 
 dwindle Dee l -Wen-Dee-Lay 
 dyspectic-sia Dees 2 -Pee-Pee 
 
 E 
 
 Earnestly Ray 2 Ens-El 
 eccentric Kays 2 -Enter (Kay) 
 economical Ken^Em-Kel 
 educate Dee 2 -Ket 
 effectual Ef 2 -Kay-Tee-Lay 
 efficient Ef 2 -Shay 
 embezzle Embs- 2 -Lay 
 emergency Em 2 -Ray-Jen-Es 
 emphatic Em-Fet 2 : Kay 
 encounter En-Kent 2 -Ar 
 enforce En-EP-Ars 
 engagement En- Gay- Jay 2 -Men t 
 enormity Ner^-Em (Tee) 
 enthusiast En-Ith 3 -Ses-Tee 
 envelope En-Vee 2 -Peell omitted) 
 equivalent Kay- Vee 2 -Lent 
 erroneous Kay 2 -Ens 
 essential Es 2 -En (Shel) 
 estimate Est 2 -Met 
 eventual Vee 2 -Net-El 
 exhaust Kay-Ses-Tee 1 
 exorbitant Kays 2 -Ray-Bet (w. s.) 
 expedient Spet 1 (w. s.) 
 experiment Sper 2 -Ment 
 extinct-ion Kays-Tee 1 
 extinguish Kays-Tee 2 (w. s.) 
 extraordinary Ster 2 -Ard (w. s.J 
 
 F 
 
 Facetious Efs 2 -Shay 
 faculty Ef 2 -Kel-Tee 
 fainthearted Fent 2 -Art 
 falsehood Fels 1 -Dee 
 falsification Felseshun 1 
 fanatic Ef 3 -Net-Kay 
 fantastic Fent 3 -Est : Kay 
 farewell Ef 2 -Ar-Lay 
 fertile Fret 2 -Lay 
 figurative Ef 2 -Gertive 
 financial EP-En-Shel 
 fluctuate Fel 2 -Kay-Tet 
 
240 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 forge Ef 2 jay 
 forger Ef 2 -Jer 
 fragment Fer 3 -Gay-Ment 
 Frank Fer 3 -Kay 
 frankly Eer 3 -Kel 
 Franklin Fer 3 -Klen 
 frustrate Fers 2 -Tret 
 furnace Ff 2 -Ray-Ens 
 
 Q 
 
 Garrulous Ger 2 -Lays 
 generous Jay 2 -Ners 
 genuine Jen 2 -En 
 gigantic Jay-Gent 3 -Kay 
 good-humored Ged 2 -Merd 
 gradual Gred 3 -Lay 
 graduate Gred-Tee 2 
 gravity- ate Ger 2 -Ved (w. s.) 
 gratuitous Gret 2 -Tees 
 Great Britain Gret-Bret 2 
 grotesque Grets 2 -Kay 
 guarantee Ger 1 -En-Tee 
 
 H 
 
 Habitual Bet 3 -Lay 
 habitation Bee 3 -Teeshun 
 habeas corpus Hay 2 -Ker (w. s.) 
 handle Ned 2 El 
 handwriting Nert 3 -Ing 
 hazard Zee 2 -Ard 
 healthy Lay 2 -Ith 
 heartily Art 3 -Lay 
 henceforth Ens 3 -Ef 
 hereditary Hay 2 -Ray-Det-Ray 
 hieroglyphic Ar 1 -Glef (Kay) 
 history Est x -Ray 
 homeopathy Em-Pee 2 -Ith 
 homicide Em-Iss-Dee 1 
 honesty Ens 1 -Tee 
 hopeful Pef 3 
 horticulture Art 2 -Kel (Ter) 
 hospital Hays 2 -Pet-Lay 
 humanity Men 3 -Tee 
 humiliation Em 3 -Layshun 
 hurricane Ar 2 -Ken 
 hypocrisy Pee : -Ker-Es 
 hypocrite Pee^Kret 
 
 I 
 
 Identical Ded 2 -Kel 
 
 identification Dent 2 -Efshun 
 ignominious Gen^Men-Es 
 illustrate Lay 2 -Stret 
 imitate Em-Tet 2 
 imperceptible Em-Pers 2 -Pet 
 impoverish Emp^Ver-Ish 
 impracticable Em-Per 3 -Ket 
 impropriety Em-Per 1 (voc with i) 
 inauspicious En-Es^Pee 
 incredible En 2 -Kred-Bel 
 indefatigable Ned-Fet 2 -Gay-Bel 
 indefinite En-Def 2 -Net 
 indemnify Ned^Em-Ef 
 indenture Ned 2 -Net (Ar) 
 independent Ned-Pend 2 (Ent) 
 indifferent En-Def 2 
 Indiana Ned J -En 
 indignant Ned*-Gay-Nent 
 individual Ned 1 -Ved 
 individuality Ned 1 : Ved 
 indivisible Ned-Vees^Bee 
 infer En-Ef 2 
 infers-ence En-Efs 2 
 inferential En-Ef 2 -Shel 
 inferior En-Ef 1 (Ray-Ray) 
 infringe En-Fren 1 (Jay) 
 ingredient En^Gred-Net 
 inhabit En-Bet 3 
 inhabitant En-Bet 3 : Ent 
 inherit En-Art 2 
 inquire En J -Wer 
 inquisitive En-Kays-Tef 1 
 insignificant Ens 1 -Gay 
 insolvency In-Slay^Ven-Es 
 integrity Ent 2 -Gret (Tee) 
 intellect-ual-ity Ent 2 -Ket (El) 
 intemperate En 1 -Tee-Emp 
 interpret Net-Pret 2 
 interpreter Net-Pret 2 -Ar 
 intestate Nets-Tet 2 
 intimidate Net J -Med (Tee) 
 intolerable Net-El 1 -Bel 
 intrinsic Enter 1 -Ens-Kay 
 introduction Net-Deeshun 2 
 inventor En-Vent 2 -Ray 
 invisible En-Vees 1 -Bee 
 involve En-Vee 2 -Vee 
 irrelevancy Ar 2 -Lay-Ven-Es 
 irresistible Ar 2 -Ses-Tee (Bel) 
 irrespective Ars 2 -Pef (w. s.) 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 241 
 
 January jay 2 -En (w. s.) 
 Jefferson Jef 2 (Rays-En) 
 jealous Jay 2 -Lays 
 Jesus Jay 2 (w. s.) 
 Jesus of Nazereth Jay 2 -En 
 jovial Jay 2 -Vel 
 judicature Jed 2 -Kay-(Ter) 
 judicial Jed 2 -Shel 
 judiciary Jed 2 -Sher 
 judicious Jed 2 -Ish 
 junction Jay 2 -Ingshun 
 jurisprudence Jers 2 - Per (Dens) 
 justify Jays 2 -Ef 
 K 
 
 kindly, kindle Kent 1 -Lay 
 kindred Kent 1 -Ret 
 
 L 
 
 landscape Lends 3 -Kay-Pee 
 languid El 3 -Ing-Ged 
 lassitude Lays 3 -Ted 
 lateral Let 3 -Rel 
 latterly Layter 3 -Lay 
 legacy Lay 2 -Gay-Es 
 legalize Lay 1 -Gels 
 legitimate Lay 2 -Jet-Met 
 lengthwise Ing 3 -Ways (w. s.) 
 lenient Len 2 -Net 
 license El 2 -Sens 
 likelihood Lay^Kel-Dee 
 likewise Lay^Kay-Weh-Iss 
 liquid Lay ^Kay-Dee 
 liquidate Lay 1 -Kay-Det 
 lithograph Lay 2 Ith-Gref 
 literature Layter 2 -Ter 
 locomotive Lay 2 -Kay-Met 
 loquacity Lay 3 -Kays-Tee 
 lubricate Lay-Ber-Ket 
 ludicrous Led 3 -Kers 
 luxury Lay 2 -Kays- Ray 
 
 M 
 
 Magazine Em 1 -Gays-En 
 magnanimous Em 2 -En-Ems 
 magnet Em 2 -Gay-Net 
 magnificent Em 1 -Gay (w. s.) 
 maintain Ment 2 -En 
 majesty Em-Jays 3 (Tee) 
 majority Em-Jert 1 
 
 malevolent Mel-Vee z (Lent) 
 malicious Mel-Ish 1 
 malignant MeP-Gay-Nent 
 manuscript Em 3 -Ens-Kay-Pet 
 manifest Em 2 -En-Efst 
 manifestation Em 2 -Ens-Eshun 
 manufacture Em 2 -En-Ef (w. s.) 
 margin Em 2 -Ray-Jen 
 marvellous Mer 2 -Vels 
 Massachusetts Ems-Chay s 
 maximum Em 2 -Kays-Em 
 meanwhile Em l -Nel 
 mechanic Em 2 -Ken-Kay 
 mechanical Em 2 -Key-Kel 
 mechanism Em 2 -Kays-Em 
 Mediterranean Med-Tren 2 (w. s.) 
 melancholy Mel 2 -Kel 
 memoir Em 2 -Em-Wer 
 memory-anda-andum Em 2 -Em 
 
 (w. s.) 
 
 merchandise Em 2 -Ray-Che t-Zee 
 meritorious Em 2 -Ray-Tee-Rays 
 Methodist Em-Thet 2 -Stey 
 metropolitan Emter-Pel 2 (w. s.) 
 microscope Em^Kers-Pee 
 military Melt 2 -Ray 
 minimum Men 1 -Em 
 ministerial Men 1 -Ester-Lay 
 minority Em-Nert 1 
 miscellaneous Ems 2 -Len-Es 
 mischievous Ems-Chef J -Es 
 moderate Emder-Tee a 
 modern Emdern 1 
 modest Med 1 -Stey 
 modify Med-Ef 1 
 modification Med-Efshun 1 
 monstrous Mens^Tees 
 morbid Em 1 -Ray-Bed 
 mortgage Mer 1 -Gay 
 mortgagee Mer 1 -Gay-Jee 
 muscular Ems 2 -Kay-Lay-Ai 
 mutilate Met 3 -Let 
 mysterious Ems-Ters 1 
 
 N 
 
 Narrate Ner-Tee 2 
 nautical Net 1 -Kel 
 neighborhood En-Ber 2 -Dee 
 neglect En 2 -Gel-Kay (Tee) 
 neglectful En 2 -Gef (w. s.) 
 negligent En 2 -Gel-Jent 
 
J42 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 nervous system Ner-Vee 2 -Ses-Tee 
 neutralize Enter 2 -Els 
 Newfoundland Ned 2 -Fed-Eland 
 New Jersey En 2 -Jay 
 New York En 2 -Yay 
 nocturnal En 2 -Ket-Ren 
 nondescript Ned^Skay-Pee 
 nonsense Nen 1 : Sens 2 
 North America Ner^Em 
 North Star Nerster 1 
 notary En-Tee 2 -Ray 
 notification Net-Efshun 2 
 nourish NerMsh 
 November En-Vee 2 (w. s.) 
 noxious En-Kay-Ish 1 
 nugatory En 2 -Gay-Tee-Ray 
 nuisance En 3 -Sens 
 numerous En 2 -Mers 
 nutriment En 2 -Ter-Ment 
 
 Obedient Bed 1 (voc.) 
 obligatory Bel 2 -Get 
 obliterate Blet^Ret 
 obstacle Bees 1 -Kel 
 obstinate Bees 1 -Net 
 odorous Ders 2 (voc.) 
 officious EH-Ish 
 oftentimes Fent^Ems 
 Ohio Hay 2 
 ominous Men 1 -Es 
 omnipotent Men 1 -Pee 
 omnipresent Em 1 -Pers-Net 
 opponent Pen 2 -Net 
 ordinance Ret ^En-Ens 
 original Ray 1 -Jen 
 ornament Ren^Ment 
 ornamentation Reneshun 1 (w. s.) 
 orthodox RayMth (Dee. Kays) 
 ostensible Est 2 -Ens-Bee 
 ostentatious Est 2 -En-Ish 
 outward Tee 3 -Ard 
 overturn Vert 2 -Ren 
 overwhelm Ver J -El (Em) 
 .oxygen Kays 1 -Gen 
 
 Pacific Pees^Ef-Kay 
 painful Pen 2 -Ef 
 palpitate Pel 2 -Pee:Tet 
 pantomime Pent 2 -Men 
 
 paradise Pee 2 -Ray-Dees 
 paragraph Per 3 -Gref 
 paralytic Per 2 -Let:Kay 
 partisian Prets 2 -En 
 paternal Pet 2 -Ren-Lay 
 patronage Pet 3 -Ren (Jay) 
 pecuniary Pee 3 Ken (Ray) 
 pedantic Pee 2 -Dent-Kay 
 pedantry Pee 2 -Det-Ray 
 penetrate Pent 2 -Ret 
 penitential Pent 2 -En-Shel 
 Pennsylvania Pees 1 Vee 
 perennial Pee 2 -Ren-Lay 
 perilous Per 2 -Lays 
 periodical Pred'-Kel 
 perpendicular Per 2 -Pen (w. s.) 
 perpetual-ate-ion Pee 2 -Ray-Pet 
 
 (w. s.) 
 
 perseverance Pers 2 -Vee-Rens 
 perspective Pers 2 -Pef (w. s.) 
 pertinacious Pee 2 -Ret-En-Ish 
 phenomena-on-al Fen 2 -Em 
 Philadelphia Felt 2 -Ef 
 philosophy Fels^Ef 
 phosphorus Efs J -Ef-Rays 
 photography Fet 2 -Ger-Ef 
 physiognomy Efs^Gen-Em 
 physiology Efs 1 -jay 
 piquant Pee : -Kent 
 piquancy Pee 1 -Ken-Es 
 picturesque Pee^Kays-Ters-Kay 
 political Plet^Kel 
 popular Pee 1 -Pee (Lay-Ar) 
 post-mortem Pees 2 -Em-Ray-Tee- 
 
 Em (w. s. Pees-Em) 
 precipitate Pers^Pet (w. s.) 
 prejudice Per 2 -Jay 
 prejudicial Per 2 -Jed-Shel 
 premature Per 3 -Met-Ray 
 prerogative Per 2 -Ray-Gative 
 presbytery Pers 2 -Bet-Ray 
 Presbyterianism Per 2 -Bets-Em 
 pretension Per 2 -Ten (w. s.) 
 prevaricate Per 3 -Ver-Ket 
 prima- facie Per 2 -Ef 
 privilege Pref^-Jay 
 prodigious Perd^Jays 
 product Per 2 -Dee 
 proficient Per 2 -Ef-Shay 
 property Per J -Pee 
 propitious Per^Pee-Ish 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 243 
 
 proportion Per 2 -Peeshun 
 prospect Pers T -Pee 
 prospective Pers^Pef 
 protestant Prets 2 -Tent 
 protraction Per 3 -Tershun 
 providential Preft 2 -En-Shel 
 provincial Pref 1 -En-Shel 
 prudential Per 2 -Den-Ish 
 public-ish-ation Pee 2 -Bee (w. s) 
 pulpit Pel 2 : Pet 
 punctual Pee 2 -Ing-Ket-I/ay 
 pungency Pen 2 -Jen-Es 
 purgatory Per 2 -Get-Ray 
 pusillanimous Pees 3 -L,en-Ems 
 pyrotechnic Pret 1 -Kay-En-Kay 
 
 Quadrangle Kay 2 Dee-Ray-Ing- 
 
 Gel 
 
 quadrant Kay 2 -Drent 
 quadruple Kay 2 -Der-Pel 
 quaint Kay 2 -Went 
 qualification Kel-Efshun 2 
 quarantine Kay 2 - Wernt-En 
 quarter Kay 2 -Werter 
 
 R 
 
 Radical, ridicule Red 3 Kel 
 rapture Ray 3 -Pet-Ar 
 ratification Ret 2 -Efshun 
 rebut Ray 2 -Bet 
 reciprocate Rays 2 -Per-Ket 
 rectify Ray 2 -Ket-Ef 
 redeemable Ard 1 -Em-Bel 
 redundance Ret 2 -Ned-Ens 
 redundant Ret 2 -Ned-Net 
 referee Ray 2 -Ef-Ray 
 reiterate Ray 2 -Tret 
 reflect-ed Ray 2 -Ef-Kay 
 refund Ray 2 -Fend 
 reject-ed Ray 2 -Jay-Ket 
 rejection Ray 2 -Jayshun 
 relegate Rel 2 -Get 
 relevancy ReP-Ven-Es 
 reliant ReP-Net 
 relinquish Rel 2 -Ing 
 remittance Ar 1 -Met: Ens 
 remonstrate Ar 2 -Ems-Stret 
 remunerate Ar 2 -Em-Nert 
 reprehensible Ray 2 -Prens-Bee 
 republican Ray 2 -Pee-Ben 
 
 resignation Rays 2 -Gay-Enshvm 
 retrospect Art 2 -Ray-Spee 
 return Art 2 -Ren 
 revenge Ray 2 -Vee-jay 
 revolver ReP-Lay (Ver) 
 rhetorical Ar^Ray-Kel 
 rheumatism Ar*-Mets-Em 
 foval Ray 1 -El 
 rudiment Ray 3 -Dee-Ment 
 rupture Ray 2 -Pet-Ar 
 
 Sacred Scret 2 
 sacrifice Sker 2 -Efs 
 sagacity Iss-Gays 2 -Tee 
 sagacious Iss-Gay^Ish 
 salutary Slet 2 -Ray 
 sanctimonious Iss-Ing 2 -Ket-En 
 
 Ens 
 
 satiate Iss-Isht 2 (voc) 
 saturate Stee 3 -Ret 
 Sec. of State Scret 2 -Stet 
 Sec. of War Scret 2 -Wer 
 scarcity Skers 2 -Tee 
 schedule Sked-El 3 
 scientific Es^Net-Ef-Kay 
 scoundrel Sked 2 -Rel 
 sculpture SkeP-Pet (Ar) 
 scripture Sker 1 (w. s.) 
 sedentary Iss-Det 2 -Ray 
 separate Spret 2 (voc.) 
 September Spet 2 -Em 
 signature Iss-Gay 1 (Net) 
 sincere Iss 1 -Ens-Ray 
 social Iss-SheP 
 South America Iss-Ith 3 -Em 
 South Carolina Iss-Ith 3 -Ker 
 southeastern Iss-Thes 3 -Ren 
 southwestern Iss-Ways 2 -Ren 
 southwest Iss-Wayst 2 
 speculate Spee 2 -Klet 
 spendthrift Sped 2 -Ther-Fet 
 splendid Splen 2 -Ded 
 start Stret 2 
 standard Sted 2 -Ard 
 stimulate Stem 1 -Let 
 stipulate Stey-Pee 1 -Let 
 strengthen Ster 2 -Then 
 structure Ster 2 -Ter 
 solemn Slay 1 -Em 
 subterfuge Iss-Bet 2 -Ray-Ef-Jay 
 
244 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND, 
 
 summary Iss-Em 2 -R.ay 
 superficial Sper 2 -Ei-Shel 
 supernaturalism Spers 3 -Em (w. s.) 
 superstitious Sper^-Stee-Shay 
 surrender Iss-Ray 2 -Ender 
 suspension Ses-Pen 2 (w. s.) 
 swindle Iss-Way 2 -Del 
 sympathetic Iss-Emp-Thet 2 : Kay 
 
 Talent Tlent 3 
 technical Tee 2 -Kav (Nel) 
 telegraph Tel 2 -Gref 
 tenement Tee 2 -Ment 
 testament Tees 2 -Merit 
 testify Tees 2 -Ef 
 testimony Tees 2 -Em 
 testimonial Tees*-Em-Nel 
 Texas Teeses 2 
 texture Tees 2 -Ter 
 thenceforth Thees*-Ef 
 tragedy Ter 2 -Jay (Dee) 
 tranquil Terming (Kel) 
 transatlantic Ter- 3 - Lent-Kay 
 transfer Ters 2 -E? (Ar) 
 transgress Tp.rs 3 -Oays 
 transparent Ters* -Fee-Rent 
 tyranny Tee*-Rav-En 
 
 t 
 Unanimous 
 
 universalism (En) Vers 2 -Em 
 university (En)Vers*-Tee 
 useless Es 3 -Lays 
 usurp Es 2 -Ray-Pee 
 utilitarianism Tel 2 -Ters-Em 
 
 Valediction VeP-Deeshun 
 valid Viet 3 
 validity Viet 1 
 vanquish v*en 3 -Kay-Ish 
 variation Vee 2 -Rayshun 
 vegetable Vee 2 -Jet-Bel 
 vengeance Vee 2 -Jens 
 ventilate Vent 2 -Let 
 verify Vee 2 -Ray-Ef 
 vice versa Vees : : Ver-Es 
 Virginia Vee 2 -Jay-En 
 voluntary Vlent^Ray 
 
 W 
 
 Warfare Wer s -Ef-Ar 
 warm Wem 1 (w. s.) 
 worship Wer 2 -Ish 
 wretched Ray 2 -Chet 
 
 Y 
 
 Yield-ed Yeld 1 
 yonder Yeh'-Ender 
 younger Yeh 3 -Inger 
 youth Ith 3 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 AUG 
 
 Form L9-25/H-9,'47(A5618)444 
 
 UNIVERSITY of 
 AT 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
 T Tt>I> A r>Tr 
 
UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 A 000 564 840 7